THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


B.  0.  BAKER 

LAWYER 
DALLAb,  TEXASrHE 


NOTE-TAKER; 

OR, 

ELEMENTS  OF  TACIIYGRAPHY, 

II. 


A     TREATISE 


THE  SECOND  STYLE  OF  LINDSLEY'S   BRIEF   WRITING. 

FOR   THE    BSE    OP 

LAWYERS,  EDITORS,  REPORTERS,  STUDENTS,  AND  ALL  PER- 

SONS DESIROUS  OF  TAKING  FULL  NOTES  IN  COURTS 

OF  RECORD,  PROFESSIONAL  SCHOOLS  AND  SEMI- 

NARIES,   AND    PUBLIC    ASSEMBLIES. 


BY  , 

DAVID  PHILIP  LINDSLET. 


BOSTON: 

OTIS  CLAPP  &  SON  3  BEACON  STREET. 

CHICAGO:   D.  KIMBALL,  P.  0.  BOX  398. 

1873. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1873,  by 

DAVID  P.  L1NDSLEY, 
In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington. 


Stereotyped  by 
WJiitcomb  &  Co.,  Boxton. 


DEDICATION. 


To  THE  REV.  SAMUEL  II.  WINKLEY, 

BOSTON: 
REV.  AND  DEAR  SIR, 

Permit  me  in  dedicating  this  work  to 
one  whose  abundant  labors  for  the  little  ones  of  Christ's 
flock  deserve  a  better  tribute  to  recall  an  incident  in  the 

22     introduction  of  the  art  in  Boston. 
jtt 

Discouraged  by  the  indifference  of  many  whose  aid  and 

^    sympathy  I  had  reason  to  expect,  I  appealed,  as  a  last 

resort,  to  the  entire  clergy  of  the  city.    All  who  responded 

j     to  the  call  deserve  recognition  here,  and  they  represented 

the  principal  denominations  of  Christian  people  among  us. 

^    Some  of  them  have  continued  friends  to  the  present  time, 

and  some  have  fallen  asleep. 

I  desire  to  include  in  this  memorial  all  who   kindly 
~>     appreciated  arid  aided  the  art  in  that  time  of  weakness. 

Your  Christian  charity,  through  which  I  have  learned 

m    much  of  the  love  of  God,  has  been  of  inestimable  service 

£    to  me  in  keeping  alive  those  sentiments  of  fraternal  regard 

H    which  unite  men  in  sympathy,  and  perpetuate  the  arts  of 

peace. 

With  the  warmest  sentiments  of  affectionate  regard, 

I  remain  yours, 

In  the  cause  of  God  and  humanity, 

THE  AUTHOR. 


PREFACE. 


The  nature  of  the  style  of  writing  taught  in  this  work, 
the  demand  for  it,  and  the  degree  of  brevity  and  per- 
spicuity gained  in  it,  are  discussed  in  the  introductory 
pages.  The  persons  for  whom  it  is  especially  designed, 
and  the  style  best  adapted  to  each  of  the  leading  profes- 
sions, may  also  be  learned  from  the  introductions  to  this 
and  the  previous  volume. 

It  remains  to  give  a  few  suggestions  concerning  the  use 
of  this  work. 

1.  A  previous  knowledge  of  the  ELEMENTS, — not  merely 
a  theoretical,  but  a  practical  knowledge, —  is  an  essential 
foundation  for  rapid  success  in  the  study  of  this  style. 

It  is  a  mistake  on  the  part  of  those  who  think  that  the 
practice  of  the  longer  forms  given  in  the  preceding  volume 
is  time  and  labor  misdirected.  Such  practice  is  the  quickest 
road  to  success  in  the  briefer  styles  of  the  art.  Long 
word-forms  occur  in  the  most  contracted  styles;  and  if  the 
student  shirks  the  labor  of  mastering  them,  he  need  never 
hope  to  become  a  swift  writer.  Those  pupils  invariably 
succeed  best,  and  in  the  shortest  time,  who  apply  them- 
selves diligently  to  the  practice  of  the  Elements  until  they 
can  write  seventy-five  to  ninety  words  a  minute;  then  they 
are  prepared  to  commence  the  NOTE-TAKER'S  style. 

2.  The  chapters  of  the  present  work  should  be  studied 
and  mastered  consecutively;   and  each  writing   exercise 

1 


2  PREFACE. 

should  be  written  in  its  order,  corrected,  and  rewritten 
until  the  principles  embodied  in  it  are  made  practically 
useful. 

3.  The  correction  of  the  writing  exercises  by  a  com- 
petent teacher  is  the  only  way  in  which  most  persons  will 
be  likely  to  acquire  a  good  knowledge  of  the  style;  but 
if  any  one  is  obliged  to  rely  upon  himself,  by  a  diligent 
study  of  the  illustrations  and  reading  lessons,  and  a  fre- 
quent revision  of  his  own  exercises,  he  may  acquire  skill 
and  a  fair  degree  of  accuracy. 

4.  It  is  better  to  avoid  writing  miscellaneous  exercises 
until  those  here  given  are  mastered ;  but,  if  any  one  pre- 
fers to  master  a  part  of  the  book,  and  apply  the  principles 
first  introduced  without  completing  the. style,  it  will  do  no 
injury.      The  work  contains  more  contractions  than  are 
needed  by  all ;  but  if  a  mode  of  contraction  is  introduced 
into  a  person's  writing,  it  should  be  used  intelligently. 
The  habit  of  wresting  a  principle  from  its  proper  applica- 
tion, and  applying  it  at  random,  as  has  been  done  so  gen- 
erally by  amateur  phonographers,  is  destructive   to   all 
excellence,  and  a  source  of  contusion.    The  student  should 
study  one  principle  until  that  is  mastered  before  advancing 
to  the  next  principle. 

With  these  suggestions  to  the  student,  and  with  thanks 
to  all  who  have  labored  with  us  in  the  production  of  the 
work,  we  commend  it  to  those  whose  labors  it  is  designed 
to  lighten. 

ANDOVER,  MASS.,  Sept.  3,  1873. 


CONTENTS. 


INTRODUCTION. 

Page. 
The  Measure  of  Success  heretofore  gained  in  the  Introduction  of 

Short-hand  Writing 9 

The  Efforts  made  to  this  End " 

The  Need  of  a  Better  System  than  the  Old  Phonography  .        .        .    1O 

A  Style  for  Literary  and  Business  Men " 

The  Demand  for  a  Style  Adapted  to  Taking  Notes,  &c.      ..." 

The  Persons  who  need  it " 

Its  Use  in  Schools  of  a  High  Grade 11 

Qualities  of  the  Style  demanded 12 

Causes  of  the  Failure  of  Phonography ;  its  Indefiniteness  ..." 

This  Difficulty  Avoided  in  Tachygraphy " 

Redundancy  of  Phonography 13 

Numerous  Signs  for  Single  Letters " 

Various  Modes  of  Combining  Characters " 

The  Letter  P,  with  some  of  its  Adjuncts  in  Phonography  .  .  .14 
The  Letters  strd  Combined  into  Twenty  Differing  Outlines  .  .  15 
The  Labor  of  Acquiring  the  Phonographic  Orthography  .  '  .  .16 
One  Hundred  and  Twenty  Thousand  Word  and  Phrase  Forms  .  .  " 

The  Upper  Stories  of  the  Phonographic  Temple 17 

Minute  Distinctions " 

The  Contractions  used  in  Tachygraphy 18 

Degrees  of  Complexity .        .  " 

Pure  Phonic  Signs 19 

External  Uniformity  not  Sufficient 20 

FIRST  RESULT .   .       .21 

TUB  CONTRACTIONS  OF  THE  NOTE-TAKER'S  STYLE   .        .  " 

Words  of  Frequent  Occurrence  Abbreviated        .        .        .     ;" ,        .      " 
Pt.rasc-signs    .        ..  '    .        .'      .       .        .    ',.       '..       ..       .        .    22 

Compound  Words  of  Latin  and  Greek  Origin       .        .        .       .  "     .      " 

Consonants  Combined  in  Saxon  Words         .        .        .        .    "   .        .     23 

3 


4  CONTENTS. 

P«Ke. 

Contractions  Restricted  in  their  Use      .  .        .24 

Average  Rate  of  Public  speaking 25 

The  REPORTING  STYLE 26 

M.  Gourard  in  regard  to  Complexity  of  Outline    .        .     27 
Acknowledgment  of  Services  of  Writers  of  Old  School      28 

CHAPTER   I. 

SHORTENED  "WORD-FORMS.  29        Sect. 

Word-Signs — their  Classification 2 

Table  of  Word-Signs        .......  5 

Explanation  of  the  Table 6 

Writing  Exercise  First 36 

CHAPTER    II. 
THE  CIRCLE  AND  THE  DOUBLE  CIRCLE.         37 

The  Use  of  the  Circle 10 

Words  of  only  Two  Consonant  Letters  ....  11 

Group  of  Words  containing  I  8 12 

Groups  containing  r  8,  m  8,  and  p  8         .        .        .  12 

General  Rule  for  the  Use  of  the  Circle  ....  13 
The  Use  of  the  Circle  in  Long  Words    ....  13 — Reins. 

The  Circle  for  z •    .        .  14 

The  Double  Circle 15 

<S  before  Compounds  of  the  It  Series       ....  10 

The  Circle  before  /,  (/,  and  ^       ....  17 

8  before  the  Compounds  of  the  Z-Series.  and  c —  and  c 18 

Vocalization  of  Words  containing  the  Circle  and  Double  Circle  19 

Writing  Exercise  Second 55 

Writing  Exercise  Third  .......    56 

CHAPTER    III. 
THE  USE  OP  COMPOUND  SIGNS.  59 

Compounds  of  the  L  and  R  Series          ....  21 

The  U«e  of  zher  and  shcr  forjer  and  cher        ...  22 

The  Use  of  zhd  and  sficl,  or  zhc-la  and  she-la,  forjel  and  chel  23 
Writing  Exercise  Fourth        .        .        .                 .        .65 


CONTENTS.  5 

Paga.        Sect. 

The  Prefixes  nb,  ap,  &c.  omitted     .....  24 

Tlie  Prefix  ad  before  v  and  j 25 

Writing  Exercise  Fifth TO 

Briefer  Signs  for  Gua  and  Qua 26 

Contracted  Signs  for  Ha  and  Wha          ....  28 

Writing  Exercise  Sixth  .        .        .        .        .        .        .  74 

CHAPTER   IV. 

HALF-LENGTH  CHARACTERS.  77 

General  Principles  of  Shortening 80 

The  Liquids  Halved,  —  Heavy  and  Light       ...  32 

Ing  and  other  Letters  not  Shortened      ....  33 

Angles  Essential  to  the  Use  of  Shortened  Letters         .  35 

The  Shortened  Letters  not  Used  in  sound,  hasty,  &c.     .  36 

Shortened  Letters  used  in  article,  practical,  &c.      .        .  38 

Est  and  ste  Contrasted ' .  39 

Sest  and  Sus-te  contrasted 40 

Exceptional  Forms 41 

Writing  Exercif  e  Seventh       ......  §7 

Writing  Exercise  Eighth ^8 

CHAPTER   V. 

LENGTHENED  CURVES.  91 

Double-Length  Curves 42 

The  Liquid  Curves 44 

Vocalization  of  Lengthened  Curves        ....  45 

Dr  and  tr  followed  by  a  Vowel 46. 

The  Shortened  ^,  the  Circle,  and  the  Lengthened  ^~N  48 

Angles  with  Lengthened  Curves     .      ' .    .    »  .      ....  49 

En  and  ing  Trebled         .......        .        ,  ,               50 

Writing  Exercise  Ninth           .     \  ..   .     .."•.-    .  .      .  98 

Writing  Exercise  Tenth      .    . -    ' 99 

CHAPTER   VI. 

PREFIXES.  1O1 

Composite  Words 52 

Simple  Prefix  Signs i             54 


0  CONTENTS. 

Page.  Sect. 

Explanation  of  their  use 55 

Con  and  Com 55 

Con  and  Com  Radical 57 

Writing  Exercise  Eleventh 100 

Contra 58 

In  and  1m 69 

Not  used  in  certain  cases 60 

In  and  1m  before  the  Circle 61 

Intra,  Intro,  &c.       ...'.....  64 

Magna  and  Magni 65 

S-.-lf,  With,  Tram 66 

Writing  Exercise  Twelfth 115 

Compound  Prefixes 67 

Oircum 69 

Writing  Exercise  Thirteenth 12O 

Writing  Exercise  Fourteenth 121 

CHAPTER   VH. 

AFFIXES.  123 

Table  of  Affix  Signs 72 

Specifications: — 

ment,  mental,  mcntary 73 

eicnt,  ticnt,  &c 74 

soever 75 

self  and  tcith 76 

ward,  ure 77 

ural,  urally,  ual,  and  uatty       .....  79 

nation  and  ulation 81 

tional  and  sional       .......  82 

Jimtion 83 

The  shn  Hook 84 

ntion,  otion,  and  ution 85 

Writing  Exercise  Fifteenth 133 

Writing  Exercise  Sixteenth 134 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER 

Pa»e.         Btci. 
MISCELLANEOUS  CONTRACTIONS.  137 

The  Stems  of  Ha  and  Wlia  thickened    ....  86 

Thickened  Ea,  and  the  N-Hook 87 

The  Final  Syllables  ance  and  ence  .        ,        .  .  88 

The  V  and  F-Hook 89 

Derivative  Word-Signs 90 

The  Plural  of  Nouns,  and  Third  Singular  of  Verbs    .          90—1 

The  Termination  (Me 90—2 

The  Terminations  ly,  ed,  ing,  less,  ic,  &c.     .        .        .90 — 3  to  7 

Contracted  Words 91 

Compound  Words 92 

Writing  Exercise  Seventeenth 143 

Writing  Exercise  Eighteenth 145 

CHAPTER   IX. 
PHRASE-SIGNS.  147 

General  Principles •      .        .  93 

The  Signs  for  in,  have,  all,  of,  the,  us,  they,  though,  may,  are,  toitt     94 

Sign  for  ye  and  you 95 

The  Tick  for  Tie 96 

The  Word  as  in  certain  Phrases      .....  97 

Lengthened  Curves  implying  there  and  their          .        .  98 

Shortened  Phrases, — Contracted  Sign  for  at,  and  the  Omission 

of  and  and  the .        .  ..  99 

Can,  for,  from,  has,  T,  it,  not,  &c.  in  Phrases       .        .    :  100 

The  Words  at,  in,  out,  &c.  in  Phrases      .        . :     ' .        .  101 

List  of  Words  most  used  in  Phrases        .        .        .      *.         102— c 
Simple  Phrase-Signs,  —  Table  A      .....  158 

Brief  Phrase-Signs,  — Table  B        ;-'-;..        .      \        .  15» 
Special  Phrases,— Table  C      .        .        .       ...        .IGO 

Tables  D  and  E        .        .'     '  .        .        .        .        .'       .161-2 

Writing  Exercise  Nineteenth  .        .'        .  (     ,    •    .        .163 
Writing  Exercise  Twentieth    .  .  165 


CONTENTS. 
CHAPTER   X. 

Pa»e.  Sect. 
THE  TACHYGBAPHIC  NOMENCLATURE.        167 

Names  of  the  Letters 102 

Names  of  the  Compounds  of  the  L,  R,  and  S-Series       .  103 

The  Doable  Circle,  Halved  Signs,  &c 104 

Vocals  and  Vdcal  Hooks 105 

Examples  in  Spelling 107 

Names  of  Compound  Signs,  —  Tables     .        .        .        .171-2 
Writing  Exercise  Twenty-First 173 

CHAPTER   XI. 
ANALOGY  AND  EUOBAPHY.  175 

Definition  of  the  Word  Analogy 109 

The  Laws  of  Analogy      .               » 110 

Operation  of  the  Laws  of  Analogy         .        .        .        .  Ill 

Definition  of  the  Word  Eugraphy         ....  112 

The  Principles  of  Eugraphy  applied  to  Letters      .        .  113 

Applied  to  Words  and  Phrases       .....  115 

The  Requirements  of  Speed 116 

The  Brevity  01  Outlines 117 

The  Faciieness  of  Outlines 118 

The  Nature  of  the  Angles 119 

Acute  and  Obtuse  Angles •  120 

The  Ilomogeneousness  of  the  Curves ....  121 

The  Direction  of  the  Curves  influenced  by  Vocals      .  122 

Outlines  easily  joined  in  Phrases         ....  123 

The  Lineality  of  Outlines 124 

The  Requirements  of  Legibility 125 

Consistency  of  Outline,  &c.  .         .        .  .        .  12G-8 

The  Use  of  Vocalization 129 

Regard  to  the  Relations  of  Words  in  Sentences  .        .  130 

Conclusion 131 

Writing  Exercises  Twenty-Second  to  Twenty-Fourth    .  197 
Vocabulary 223 


INTRODUCTION. 


"IT  WOULD  BE  MADNESS  AND  INCONSISTENCY  TO  SUPPOSE 
THAT  THINGS  WHICH  HAV  NEVER  YET  BEEN  PERFORMED  CAN 
BE  PERFORMED  WITHOUT  EMPLOYING  SOME  HITHERTO  UNTRIED 

MEANS."  —  Lord  Bacon  in  " Novum  Organum" 

IN  practical  matters,  theories  and  systems  ar  tested  by  experi- 
ence, and  succes  gives  proof  of  value.  The  mesure  of  succes 
gained  in  the  introduction  and  actual  use  of  short-hand  writing  in 
this  country,  up  to  the  present  time,  is  not  very  creditable  to  the 
means  employed.  We  ar  assured  thro'  varius  channels  that  a  large 
majority  (some  say  three  fourths)  of  the  students  in  universities  in 
Europe,  especially  in  Germany,  use  brief  writing  in  taking  the  lec- 
tures of  their  courses  of  study.  In  this  country,  not  more  than  one 
student  in  fifty,  in  the  schools  of  this  grade,  use  short-hand  in  any 
form ;  and  this,  notwithstanding  the  immense  labor  of  the  Phonog- 
raphers  in  their  efforts  to  introduce  that  system. 

Nor  can  it  be  said  that  this  want  of  succes  has  been  owing  to 
any  general  indiference  to  the  subject.  Such  has  been  the  demand 
for  works  on  Phonography  that  one  publisher  alone  claims  to  have 
sold  one  hundred  thousand  (100,000)  copies  of  a  single  text-book 
in  this  country ;  while  those  sold  by  others,  and  those  imported 
from  England,  swell  the  amount  to  nearly  or  quite  a  quarter  of  a 
million  copies.  Had  this  sowing  produced  any  reasonable  harvest, 
we  should  hav  had  hundreds  of  thousands  of  writers  of  the  art 
where  we  hav  in  reality  only  a  few  hundreds. 

Besides  this  sale  of  books,  teachers  hav  visited  all  schools  of 
note  in  the  country,  and  raised  classes  (or  attempted  to  do  so),  and 

9 


10  BRIEF  WRITING  FOR   STUDENTS. 

hav  uniformly  failed  of  any  fair  degree  of  succes  in  giving  skill  of 
writing  in  Phonography  to  their  pupils ;  only  one  or  two  persons  in 
classes  numbering  twenty  or  thirty  students  continuing  the  practice 
of  the  art,  and  fewer  still  gaining  any  great  skill  in  its  use. 

With  such  facts  before  us,  we  trust  that  no  further  apology  is 
needed  for  offering  a  system  of  brief  writing  better  suited  to  the 
wants  of  the  students  of  this  country. 

In  the  volume  preceding  this,  "  The  Elements  of  Tachygraphy," 
we  gave  the  elementary  principles  of  a  style  adapted  to  the  use  of 
those  literary  and  busines  men  who  regard  a  high  degree  of  legi- 
bility of  more  importance  than  a  high  rate  of  speed.  We  produced 
a  style  capable  of  being  written  from  three  to  four  times  as  rapidly 
as  the  common  writing,  while  in  perspicuity  it  equals  the  best  of 
script.  This  style  has  been  entirely  succesful  in  its  sphere  —  its 
simplicity  and  accuracy  securing  for  it  friends  wherever  it  has  been 
known.  But  the  public  mind  has  been  led  to  regard  the  art  as 
useful  principally,  if  not  entirely,  for  the  taking  of  notes  of  public 
lectures,  or  for  verbatim  reporting,  rather  than  as  an  aid  in  the  study 
and  the  counting-room.  This  use  of  the  art  is  certainly  legitimate, 
and  we  provided,  several  years  ago,  a  style  peculiarly  adapted  to  it. 
It  was  not  convenient,  nowever,  to  publish  it  at  once ;  and,  though 
taught  by  means  of  manuscripts,  its  publication  has  been  delayed 
until  the  present  time.  We  hav  at  last  yielded  to  the  solici- 
tation of  friends  in  all  parts  of  the  country,  and  offer  this  style,- 
designed  especially  for  NOTE-TAKING,  to  our  friends  and  the  public. 
The  delay  has  not  been  entirely  in  vain,  for  it  has  enabled  us  to 
gradually  perfect  the  style  thro'  its  use  during  a  number  of  years, 
and,  with  the  final  revision  given  it  in  preparing  the  following  pages 
for  the  press,  will,  we  hope,  be  found  improved  in  simplicity  and  ef- 
fectivnes.* 

While  the  impresion  that  brief  writing  is  of  use  mainly  in  the 
lecture  or  court  room,  or  conference  hall,  is  unfortunate,  —  since  it 
must,  we  think,  achieve  its  greatest  succes  as  a  substitute  for  the 
common  writing,  —  yet  there  is  a  growing  demand  for  more  perfect 
reports  of  public  assemblies ;  and  the  few  well-trained  reporters 
hav  served  principally  as  an  example  of  what  might  be  done  in  jour- 
nalism were  all  our  editors  and  reporters  swift  writers,  and  how 

*  For  Key  to  spelling,  see  Rapid  Writer.  Nc.  11* 


LECTURING    VS.  DICTATION  OF  NOTES.        11 

much  the  busines  of  our  courts  of  record  would  be  expedited 
by  the  use  of  brief  and  rapid  writing  by  the  lawyers  and  the  court, 
as  well  as  the  profesional  reporter.  And  in  the  lecture-room  of 
the  college  and  seminary,  where  students  are  expected  to  copy  for 
future  study,  whole  courses  of  lectures,  there  is  a  wide  field  for  the 
use  of  a  style  rapid  enuf  for  full  notes,  and  easy  enuf  to  be  lerned 
and  used  by  all.  The  lecturer  must  now  either  deliver  his  instruc- 
tion with  painful  slownes,  or  the  student  must  content  himself 
with  an  abstract,  rude  and  imperfect.  Frequently  the  professor 
speaks  one  hundred  and  fifty,  and  more,  words  a  minute ;  while 
the  class  follow  him  at  the  rate  of  twenty-five  to  thirty-five  words  a 
minute,  getting,  at  the  most,  less  than  a  quarter  of  the  lecture, 
and  that,  too,  of  lectures  prepared  with  the  greatest  care,  and  ex- 
prest  in  the  most  condenst  language. 

This  difficulty  has  been  frequently  pointed  out  by  professors  of 
colleges,  and  other  institutions  of  a  high  grade.  Professor  Nairne, 
of  Columbia  College,  expreses,  we  thiiik,  a  sentiment  shared  by 
most  men  in  his  position  when  he  says,  "  For  many  years  I  hav 
desired  to  teach  the  students  that  lecturing  is  quite  different  from 
dictation  of  notes."  They  should  be  enabled  "  to  report  a  lecture 
without  interruption,  even  tho'  it  be  delivered  with  the  energy  of  a 
public  discourse.  Till  they  ar  able  to  do  this,  instruction  by  lec- 
tures must  be  a  very  slow  and  tedius  proces."  And  yet  such  is 
the  proces  of  necesity  followed  in  hundreds  of  institutions.  Now, 
for  this  class  of  persons  a  style  of  brief  writing  is  demanded  that 
shall  be  sufficiently  easy  to  be  retained  in  the  memory,  and  used  to 
advantage,  while  the  mind  is  intent  upon  the  performance  of  other 
duties,  to  which  the  mere  mechanical  part  of  the  writing  is  entirely 
subordinate.  The  Phonography  of  Mr.  Pitman,  and  the  styles  de- 
rived from  it,  hav  failed  for  these  uses  on  account  of  too  great 
complexity.  Even  after  the  practice  of  years  has  rendered  familiar 
its  irregular  word-forms,  they  ar  still  felt  to  be  a  "  burden,"  like 
the  heavy  armor  of  the  ancients.  To  master  its  varied  word  and 
phrase  forms  was  a  work  of  years  ;  and  they  were  retained  in  mem- 
ory by  sheer  force  of  inveterate  habit,  or  by  a  peculiar  tact  that  few 
persons  possest.  Added  to  these  was  another  difficulty,  equally  great 
—  viz.,  a  want  of  perfect  legibility.  Whatever  some  experts  may 


12         INDEFINITENESS   OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 

say  to  the  contrary,  Phonography  has  never  been,  and  never  can 
be,  easy  to  read.  Its  reporting  style  omits  nearly  all  the  vowels, 
and  supplies  their  place  partially,  and  very  obscurely,  by  means  of 
devices  which  ar  very  burdeusom,  such  as  positions  and  peculiarity 
of  outline.  The  rule  of  position  (placing  the  word  above,  on,  or 
below  the  line  of  writing)  interrupted  the  continuity  of  the  writing, 
broke  up  the  phrases,  and  still  failed  to  make  many  needed  distinc- 
tions. There  were,  in  some  cases,  a  dozen  words  to  be  distinguish!, 
and  only  three  positions,  so  that  four  words  were  represented  by 
the  same  form  in  a  given  position,  and  twelv  words  by  the  same 
form  in  the  diferent  positions.  The  outline  ^"°,  for  instance,  was 
written  (and  is  still  written)  for  the  following  words  :  eels,  ills,  isles, 
lees,  lease,  lies,  allies;  lace,  lays,  less,  else,  allays,  lows,  ails; 
laws,  loose,  lose,  lass,  alas,  owls,'  allows,  and  other  words  —  making 
seven  words  to  be  represented  by  this  one  outline  in  each  position, 
or  more  than  twenty  in  all.  Tho'  it  is  not  common  for  a  single 
form  to  hav  twenty  and  more  words  to  represent,  it  is  very  common 
for  a  single  outline  to  stand  for  six,  eight,  or  even  twelv  words. 

The  form  ^^  is  written  for  the  words  post,  pest,  paced,  past,  op- 
posed, weepest,  hopest,  &c. ;  and  the  form  I  for  taste,  test,  toast, 

attest,  teased,  tossed,  eatest,  aughtest,  &c.  We  need  not  multiply 
examples,  but  hundreds  of  them  will  occur  to  any  one  acquainted 
with  Phonography. 

In  Tachygraphy,  as  here  taught,  all  words  of  this  class  ar  written 
distinctivly  and  with  sufficient  brevity  by  the  use  of  a  connected 
vowel  where  it  is  needed.  In  this  way  we  avoid  the  use  of  the 
diferent  positions,  and  gain,  at  the  same  time,  a  far  higher  degree 
of  legibility  than  can  be  gained  by  resorting  to  this  expedient. 

But  there  ar  dificulties  that  embaras  the  writer  of  Phonography, 
which  ar  far  greater  than  those  we  haw  mentioned  above.  The 
entire  system  of  word-forms  is  based  on  the  use  of  duplicate  and 
triplicate  signs,  representing  the  same  sounds  or  group  of  sounds. 
Frequently  the  same  group  of  sounds  may  be  exprest  in  eiyht,  ten, 
or  a  dozen  ways ;  while,  on  the  other  hand,  five,  six,  or  seven  sounds 
may  be  combined  into  one  complex  sign,  based  on  a  single  full- 
sized  letter.  Some  of  these  devices  ar  useful  in  furnishing  a  vari- 


PHONOGRAPHY  REDUNDANT.  13 

ety  of  outline  and  brevity  of  form,  and  ar  to  be  cultivated  by  tbe 
profesional  reporter,  so  far  as  necessary  for  these  purposes  ;  but 
when  this  complexity  reaches  too  high  a  degree,  it  becomes  too 
burdensom,  and  places  a  style  entirely  beyond  the  reach  of  the  class 
of  persons  whose  wants  we  ar  considering. 

The  complexity  in  Phonography  growing  out  of  its  internal  struc- 
ture arises  from  —  1st,  The  use  of  several  alphabetic  forms  for  the 
same  letter  ;  and,  2d,  Several  modes  of  combining  the  same  sounds 
into  triple,  quadruple,  or  quintuple  stems. 

1.  The  alphabetic  forms  most  burdensom  ar  those  for  H,  Y,  and 
W.  H  has  four  modes  of  representation.  T  combines  with  the 
vowels,  assuming  their  positions  and  variations,  making  twelv 
signs  which  represent  y  with  a  following  vowel  (or,  to  speak  more 
exactly,  four  signs  varied  by  the  three  positions  in  such  a  way  as 
to  express  twelv  varieties  of  sound),  and  an  additional  sign  employed 
in  special  cases.  W  has  the  twelv  variations,  with  the  vocals,  as 
explained  above,  of  y,  and  three  more  forms,  —  for  wi  (i  long),  woi, 
and  wou,  —  and  a  w>-hook  on  four  of  the  consonants  ;  making,  with 
its  own  special  sign,  seventeen  *  variations,  or,  speaking  of  signs 
varied  only  by  form  and  not  by  position,  eight  distinct  signs  to  rep- 
resent this  one  letter. 

How  Represented  in  Tachygraphy.  —  These  sounds  (the  sounds 
of  W  and  Y)  ar  exprest  in  Tachygraphy  by  only  one  sign,  re- 
ducing their  use  to  the  most  perfect  simplicity,  and  cutting  off  the 
labor  of  many  weeks  in  acquiring  the  style  in  the  use  of  these  let- 
ters alone. 

2.    The    Varius    Modes    of  Combining    the   Same    Sounds    into 
TKIPLE,  QUADRUPLE,  or  QUINTUPLE  STEMS. 

We  can  give  here  only  a  brief  illustration  of  the  mode  of  con- 
traction employed  in  Phonography,  for  a  full  explanation  would 
require  a  treatise  on  the  art.  Our  explanation  cannot  apply  per- 
fectly to  the  conflicting  styles  now  known  under  the  name  Pho- 

*  It  dcscrvs  mention,  however,  that  some  of  the  modern  innovators 
npon  Mr.  Pitman's  system  hav  cndcvord  to  limit  the  number  of  the  forms 
for  W  and  Y,  and,  in  some  cases,  with  partial  success. 


14       PHONOGRAPHY  ILLUSTRATED. 

nography;   but  these  styles  hav,  in  this  respect,  about  the  same 
structure,  and  present  nearly  the  same  difficulties  to  the  learner. 

We  take,  by  way  of  illustration,  a  single  letter,  applying  to  it  a 
part  of  the  hooks,  circles,  and  loops  by  which  it  is  modified  in  form- 
ing the  system  of  contractions.  Ab  uno  disce  omnes!  The  same 
adjuncts  apply  to  all  the  straight  letters,  while  the  curved  letters 
lose  some  of  these  modes  of  contraction,  and  add  others  peculiar  to 
themselves. 


THE  LETTER  P,  WITH  SOME  OF  ITS  ADJUNCTS. 


\  \ 


pshns      pss    pnss   pst  pnst 
\  ^  NO  \o  ^  V\> 


s 


. 

0    e         1 

&c.,  &c.,  &c.,  &c. 

It  would  be  too  tedius  to  go  thro'  all  the  forms  that  this  one  let- 
ter assumes  in  combination  ;  but  the  curius  reader  can  fill  up  the 
list  for  himself  by  ading  the  final  hooks,  circles,  and  loups  that  ar 
attacht  to  the  \  in  the  illustrations  above,  to  each  of  the  following 
forms  :  — 


V 


pi      pr      sp    spl    spr     stp   stpr 

This  will  make  (after  deducting  those  especially  inconvenient) 
about  175*  forms  based  on  the  letter  P.     Multiplying  this  num- 

*  Mr.  Bcnn  Pitman  has  given,  in  his  "Reporter's  First  Reader,"  a 
table  of  compound  stems,  in  which  the  compounds  of  the  letter  \ 
amount  to  fifty-four,  in  plaee  of  the  thirty-four  given  above,  and  the 
variations  of  the  entire  alphabet  number  about  one  thousand;  but  he 


TWENTY  WAYS   OF  WRITING  S  T  R  D.          15 


t>er  by  eight  (the  number  of  straight  signs  to  which  such  modifica- 
tions belong),  we  get  1400  combinations.  To  these  must  be  added 
fhe  forms  arising  from  the  use  of  a  part  of  these  modes  of  contrac- 
ion  with  the  curved  signs,  and  we  get  more  than  2100  additional 
signs,  or  3500  in  all,  composed  of  single  stems  with  their  modifi- 
cations. 

There  is  a  degree  of  method  in  forming  these  complex  steins 
that  is  worthy  of  praise,  and  should  be  duly  appreciated  ;  but 
there  is  no  such  method  in  their  use,  and  it  is  not  easy  to  employ 
the  best  form  for  a  word  when  several  possible  forms  occur  to  the 
mind.  For  example,  suppose  that  a  word  containing  the  letters 
a  t  r  d  is  to  be  written.  The  Phonographic  letters  are  ),  j,  /  °r 
~^?  |.  The  form  may  be  varied  in  more  than  a  dozen  ways,  re- 
taining the  letters  in  the  same  order.  In  the  following  words,  the 
only  consonants  written  by  the  Phonographer  ar  s  t  r  d  ;  yet  each 
word  is  written  in  a  diferent  way,  as  follows  :  — 


t,] 


. 

a.     3 


Were  the  forms  given  above  all  the  forms  from  which  the  student 
aiust  choose  in  writing  words  containing  these  letters,  the  difficulty 

ias  given  forms  having  hooks,  or  circles,  or  loops,  on  one  end  of  the  sign 
->nly,  while  a  full  table  would  contain  forms  in  which  the  hooks,  circles, 
4c.,  appear  both  singly  on  either  end  of  the  character,  and  doubly  on  both 
ends  at  the  same  time. 

If  it  should  be  deemed  sufficient  to  count  the  form  of  contraction  only 
as  it  appears  in  its  simpler  form  on  each  end  of  the  stem  separately,  we 
should  stil  find  more  than  a  thousand  stem-forms  growing  out  of  the  al- 
phabetic signs.  The  design  in  the  text  was,  however,  to  give  the  number 
of  forms  in  their  full  complement  of  initial  and  final  hooks,  circles,  and 
loups,  attacht  as  they  actually  appear  in  the  written  words. 


16  SIXTY  THOUSAND   WORD-FORMS. 

would  not  be  so  great  as  it  really  is;  for,  besides  these  legiti- 
mate outlines,  there  are  eight  others, — 


—  which  ar  not  recommended  for  use,  yet  ar  quite  as  likely  to  be 
chosen  by  the  young  writer,  who  must  choose  between  twenty  pos- 
sible outlines  to  find  the  correct  one. 

There  ar  other  words,  besides  those  given  above,  containing  the 
same  principal  letters,  for  which  word-forms  must  be  provided  from 
among  those  here  given.  So  the  only  thing  that  can  be  done  is  to 
memorize  the  proper  outline  for  the  word,  as  we  lern  to  spell  in  our 
common  orthography,  only  with  greater  variations  from  general 
rules,  and  a  greatly  increast  number  of  exceptional  forms. 

To  acquire  the  Phonographic  orthography  is  an  almost  endles 
labor.  Mr.  Graham  has  attempted  to  fathom  this  gulf,  and  to  lay 
stepping-stones  to  aid  the  student,  lest  he  sink  in  this  Slough  of 
Despond,  and  abandon  the  art  in  despair.  He  has  provided  a  dic- 
tionary, indicating,  by  means  of  type-keys,  as  he  calls  them,  the 
proper  outline  for  sixty  thousand  words  and  sixty  thousand  phrases, 
making  in  all  one  hundred  and  twenty  thousand  *  forms  to  be 

*  It  should  also  be  noticed  that  most  of  these  forms  of  contraction  at 
not  peculi.ir  to  the  reporting  style,  but  that  the  general  principles  of  con- 
traction apply  also  to  the  simplest  style  known  to  Phonography.  The 
style  used  by  reporters  differs  from  the  style  offered  for  general  use  mainly 
in  the  addition  of  a  few  more  irregularly  contracted  forms  for  words  and 
phrases,  and  an  omision  of  the  vowels;,  while  this  immense  f.ibric  of 
regular  contractions  remains  to  be  lerned  by  those  who  use  the  art  even 
in  its  simplest  form.  And  it  is  also  worthy  of  remark  that  the  same  men 
who  Imv  offered  this  complicated  system  to  the  public,  hav,  at  the  same 
time,  complained  long  and  loud  of  the  anomalies  of  our  English  orthog- 
raphy, and  hav  taken  the  lead  in  the  Phonetic  reform.  Yet  our  English 
orthography  contains  only  about  two  hundred  and  .s/r/.y  d  lymphs  and  tri- 
grapJts,  which  ar  used  as  an  extension  to  our  alphabet;  while  the  Phono- 
graphic orthography  contains  modified  stems  numbering,  as  we  hav  seen, 
more  than  three  thumaml.  And  we  may,  1  presume,  say  with  truth  that 


IRREGULAR  AND   CURIUS  DEVICES.  17 

memorized,  These  forms  can  be  of  no  use  to  the  writer  until  ren- 
dered familiar  by  practice  ;  and  a  hard-working  student  can  master 
about  one  thousand  forms  a  month,  or  the  one  hundred  and  twenty 
thousand  in  ten  years,  provided  he  takes  no  vacations,  and  can 
retain  in  memory  such  a  mass  of  details.  This  system  of  word 
and  phrase  forms  may  be  regarded  as  the  first  and  second  stories 
of  the  wonderful  temple  of  modern  Phonography.  Above  these 
rise  other  stories  (or  perhaps  they  should  be  likened  to  towers, 
since  they  ar  formed  of  a  far  less  amount  of  material),  containing 
word  and  phrase  signs  contracted  in  a  more  irregular  way,  for  which 
the  general  principles  will  not  suffice.  Mr.  Graham,  with  his  usual 
thoro'ness,  has  given  about  three  thousand  of  these  irregularly  con- 
tracted forms. 

In  some  of  the  styles  of  Phonography,  forms  still  further  removed 
from  alphabetic  principles  ar  found,  device  within  device  leading 
on  to  wonderful  degrees  of  complexity,  as  where  Mr.  G.,  for  in- 
stance, writes  (,,  which  is  literally  tft  or  tvd,  for  /  hav ;  or  s,  for 
of  all,  and  c-»  for  of  our ;  while  the  former  would  naturally  read 
pit,  and  the  latter  prt.  Or,  if  the  signs  read  of  all  and  of  our 
ar  shorter  than  a  halved  letter,  the  diference  between  them  and  the 
halved  letters  cannot  be  more  than  one  fiftieth  of  an  inch  —  a  dis- 
tance wholly  unappreciable  by  the  eye,  and  impossible  to  be  made 
in  the  hurry  of  reporting. 

It  is  with  no  wish  to  criticise  harshly  the  old  Phonographies  that 
we  hav  detailed  these  dificultits,  that  rise  like  mountains  before 
the  student.  It  is  an  unplesant  task  to  deal  in  what  seems,  when 
stated  in  the  mildest  form,  like  severe  censure.  We  hav  refused 
for  many  years  to  expose  the  enormus  asumptions  of  those  who  hav 
assumed  •*  lead  the  world  in  the  stenographic  arts,  and  actually 
hav  controlled  a  large  share  of  the  public  patronage  in  England  and 
America,  both  as  reporters  and  as  teachers  of  short-hand.  The 

the  diphthongal  and  triphthongal  signs  in  our  common  spelling  can  be 
reduced  to  rule  as  easily  as  the  compound  stems  in  Phonography  of  which 
we  hav  spoken.  Yet  the  Phonographers  hav  one  advantage  in  point  of 
consistency,  if  not  of  simplicity  —  they  never  employ  silent  letters,  or 
combinations  that  hav  no  phonetic  value  whatever,  as  is  the  case  in  our 
long-hand  orthography. 


18  ^CONTRACTIONS  CLASSIFIED. 

fact  that  some  persons  *  hav  succeeded  in  rising  above  all  these  dif- 
ficulties, and  in  using  systems  so  involved  for  the  purposes  of  swift 
writing,  is  more  creditable  to  the  ability  and  perseverance  of  those 
persons  who  hav  succeeded  than  to  the  systems  they  hav  employed. 

THE  CONTRACTIONS  USED  IN  TACHYGRAPHY. 

But  it  remains  for  us  to  inquire  how  far,  and  in  what  way,  thia 
complexity  of  structure  is  avoided  in  Tachygraphy ;  or  how  suffi- 
cient brevity  of  word-forms  is  secured,  for  the  use  of  persons  de- 
sirus  of  securing  full  notes  of  lectures  without  resorting  to  so 
complex  a  system  of  outlines.  To  make  the  reply  to  these  ques- 
tions intelligible,  it  will  be  necessary  to  explain  the  basis  upon 
which  the  system  of  contractions  is  built,  and  the  principles  fol- 
lowed in  applying  the  different  modes  of  shortening  the  word- 
forms.  The  student  of  the  art  will  do  well  to  take  note  of  these 
principles,  as  they  will  enable  him  to  understand  why  one  form  of 
contraction,  in  certain  cases,  is  preferred  to  another,  and  why  some 
ar  rejected  altogether. 

Contractions  may  be  of  several  degrees  of  complexity.  For  the 
sake  of  distinction,  we  will  call  those  forms  that  express  sounds 
accurately  and  naturally  Pure  Phonic  Contractions ;  those  of  the 
second  grade,  Mixed  Phonic ;  and  those  of  the  third  grade,  Steno- 
graphic.f 

*  The  number  of  persons  who  hav  succeeded  in  mastering  Phonogra- 
phy, so  as  to  be  really  expert,  is  much  fewer  than  is  generally  supposed, 
as  was  stated  in  the  Introduction  to  the  Elements  of  Tachygraphy,  page 
22.  We  estimated  at  that  time  (1869)  the  number  of  competent  reporters 
at  five  hundred  persons  in  England  and  America,  and  conccdftl  a  greater 
or  less  degree  of  skill  in  the  art  to  two  thousand  persons  more.  These  fig- 
ures hav  not  yet  been  called  in  question,  altho'  they  hav  been  before  the 
public  nearly  three  years.  We  think  the  estimate  rather  too  large  than 
too  small,  and  that  the  number  is  not  increasing.  There  has  been  cer- 
t  duly  a  prodigious  waste  of  time  and  effort  on  the  part  of  thousands  of 
persons ;  and  yet  this  result  is  quite  as  favorable  as  would  be  naturally  ex- 
pected in  the  use  of  such  a  system  as  we  hav  shown  Phonography  to  be. 

t  This  classification  is  not  designed  to  be  exhaustiv,  but  will  answer 
the  purpose  of  illustration  for  which  it  is  intended. 


PnONIQ  SIGNS  —  L  AND  II  SERIES.  19 


Pure  Phonic  Signs. 

Abbreviations  of  the  first  grade  are  those  given  in  the  seventh 
chapter  of  the  "Elements,"  page  71,  where  signs  ar  provided  for 
the  consonantal  diphthongs  of  the  L  and  R  series,  as  follows  :  — 

rr^<\  j<\  1  vXc-,-  9  ^  ; 

bl  pi  gl  cl   fl     br   pr    gr    cr      dr     tr      fr     thr    shr 

Here  the  L  and  the  R  blend  with  the  preceding  consonant,  and 
unite,  forming  a  compound  sound,  as  in  the  words  play  and  pray. 
Now,  this  form  of  contraction  is  definitely  limited,  both  in  the 
number  of  its  forms  and  the  frequency  of  their  use,  by  the  struc- 
ture of  the  language  written.  There  ar  in  English  only  the  four- 
teen compounds  named  above,  of  which  L  and  R  form  part  in  this 
intimate  union.  But  there  ar  sounds  in  final  syllables,  as  in  the 
last  syllables  of  the  words  people  and  peeper,  that  may  be  classed 
with  these  without  too  much  violation  of  the  principles  of  phonics. 
All  the  signs  given  above  ar  sometimes  used  in  this  manner,  and 
in  addition  to  them  the  following,  which  ar  never  purely  phonic 
signs  :  — 


c_  d.      o 

dl      tl      vl    nl    vr  zhr  thr       nr      zlil     shl 

These,  with  the  fourteen  signs  before  named,  make  twenty-four 
signs  of  the  L  and  R  series.  These  ar  all  the  signs  *  that  can  be 
made  of  this  kind  without  decending  to  the  third  grade  of  contrac- 
tions. The  letters  yl,  hi,  wl,  II,  and  some  others,  which  Mr.  Munson 
unites  into  one  sign,  hav  no  phonic  union  even  of  the  remotest 
kind.  Herein  the  introduction  of  such  signs  does  not  tend  to  ren- 

*  It  might  be  possible  to  add  to  the  signs  given  above  others  to  repre- 
sent si  and  el,  but  these  ar  provided  more  naturally  in  connection  witli 
the  S  series  mentioned  below.  Jr  and  chr  ar  also  provided  with  signs  of 
this  series,  but  they  ar  the  same  as  zhr  and  shr  ,-  and  jl  and  chl  ar  of  but 
little  use. 


20  PHONIC  SIGNS  — S  AND  Z   SERIES. 

der  the  system  uniform,  as  he  seems  to  suppose,  but  introduces  an 
anomalism  into  it ;  for,  having  provided  signs  for  which  he  has  nc 
corresponding  sounds  in  the  language,  he  must  employ  them  in  an 
arbitrary  manner.  It  is  scarcely  possible  in  this  way  to  determine 
when  yl,  for  instance,  shall  be  written  with  the  full  form  or  with  the 
hooked  form,  as  there  ar  no  cases  in  which  the  latter  ar  needed. 
In  endevoring,  therefore,  to  produce  uniformity  by  adding  initial 
hooks  to  all  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  to  represent  I  and  r,  Mr. 
Munson  has  succeeded  only  in  producing  an  external  uniformity  to 
which  there  is  no  corresponding  internal  reality,  and  consequently 
has  produced  confusion  in  the  use  of  all  the  signs  of  this  class. 

Phonic  Signs  of  the  S  Series. 

The  signs  of  this  series,  unlike  those  given  above,  may  represent 
either  the  union  of  s  with  a  following  or  a  preceding  consonant. 
The  only  purely  phonic  signs  of  this  class  ar  — 

P       \        0_      °)        Q^        <J      ^ 

sp     sk        st       sf       gn        si       sw 

j>X      _^      ^     ^    J>  S 

ps    ks         ts       fs    ths       ns       Is      rs 

Connected  with  the  latter  of  these  series  is  the  use  of  the  circle 
to  represent  z  after  hevy  signs,  as  follows  :  — 

k\>  _o  j  ^   r  ^  -3  ^ 

bz    gz       dz    vz    thz       mz        nz         Iz       rz 

These,  in  their  proper"  use,  ar  purely  phonic  signs,  an  \  ar  used  in 
the  First  Style  of  Tachygraphy.  They  number  twenty-five,  and, 
with  the  twenty-four  given  above  as  belonging  to  the  L  and  B 
series,  give  us  forty-nine  (to  which  may  be  added  the  c*^ ,  making 
fifty)  diphthongal  signs.  These  ar  all  the  compound  letters  that 
ar  used  in  the  First  Style  of  Tachygraphy  as  taught  in  the  "  Ele- 
ments ; "  and  their  use  is,  for  the  most  part,  definite  and  natural. 
Theiv  is  a  striking  contrast  between  these  fifty  signs  of  the  first 


PRINCIPLES   OF  CONTRACTION.  "21 

grade  and  the  thirty-five  hundred  used  in  Phonography,  the  larger 
part  of  which  ar  of  the  second  or  third  grade.  And  yet  the  fifty 
signs  given  in  the  First  Style  of  Tachygraphy,  together  with  the 
few  word  and  phrase  signs  used,  furnish  a  style  more  rapid  than 
the  Corresponding  Style"  of  the  old  art,  with  all  its  complexity. 
Only  a  small  rate  of  speed  can  be  gained  in  Phonography  without 
omitting  the  vowels  ;  and  when  the  student  has  omitted  the  vowels, 
lie  must  master  the  whole  system  of  outlines  in  order  to  read  his 
writing  with  any  certainty,  which,  as  we  hav  shown,  is  the  labor  of 
years. 

First  Result. 

We  hav,  then,  as  the  first  result,  a  style  in  Tachygraphy  for 
which  Phonography  affords  no  parallel,  and  for  which  it  can  form 
no  parallel  without  an  entire  change  of  structure  —  a  style  that  can 
be  used  as  freely  and  legibly  as  our  common  script,  and  reduced  to 
practice  as  redily ;  while  it  is  written  three  times  as  rapidly,  and 
with  less  than  one  seventh  of  the  labor.  Such  a  result  is  in  itself 
enuf  to  commend  the  system.  But.  in  achieving  this,  we  hav,  at 
the  same  time,  secured  the  best  basis  upon  which  to  build  the 
briefer  styles  demanded  by  the  note-taker  and  reporter. 

THE  CONTRACTIONS  OF  THE  NOTE-TAKER'S  STYLE. 

In  forming  a  briefer  style  than  that  sketcht  above,  there  ar  sev- 
eral modes  of  abbreviating  the  writing.  The  first  and  most  obvius 
mode  is  that  of  providing  brief  signs  to  represent  words  and  phrases 
of  frequent  occurrence.  There  ar  some  words  that  occur  many 
times  on  every  page  of  writing,  and  a  list  of  one  hundred  words 
may  be  made  that  will  form  a  large  per  centum  of  the  words  em- 
plo\  ed  in  ordinary  writing.  Such  words  ar  —  A,  an,  and,  are,  as, 
at,  be,  by,  come,  did,  do,  done,  for,  from,  go,  had,  lias,  hav,  he,  his, 
how,  I,  if,  in,  is,  it,  on,  one,  so,  some,  that,  the,  then,  there,  they, 
this,  though,  us,  was,  we,  were,  what,  when,  where,  who,  you,  your, 
&c.  By  furnishing  these  words  with  the  briefest  available  signs, 
the  labor  of  writing  is  reduced  in  a  very  simple  and  easy  way. 
This  principle  of  abbreviation  has  been  understood  from  the  erliest 
times,  and  may  be  redily  applied  to  any  language. 


22  PHRASE  AND  PREFIX  SIGNS. 

Another  principle  immediately  connected  with  this,  tho'  not  used 
so  anciently,  is  that  of  providing  brief  signs  for  the  most  frequently 
recurring  phrases,  such  as  have  been,  has  been,  there  is,  it  is,  this  is, 
it  was,  to  be,  to  hav,  to  do,  &c.  Great  advantage  is  gained  by 
uniting  such  phrases  into  one  character,  which  may  be  done  by 
simply  joining  the  word-signs  used  for  the  simple  words. 

These  principles  form  part  of  all  systems  that  hav  any  value  at 
the  present  day. 

Most  of  the  words  of  this  class  ar  provided  with  brief  signs  in 
the  First  Style  of  Tachygraphy ;  and  some  others  become  brief 
enuf  thro'  those  principles  of  contraction  which  ar  of  general  ap- 
plication. A  few,  however,  ar  specially  contracted,  and  from  some 
of  them  numerus  derivatives  ar  formed,  which  ar  written  in  anal- 
ogy with  their  primitivs,  thus  reducing  even  the  word-signs  to 
some  degree  of  regularity.  The  most  frequent  phrases  ar  also  pro- 
vided with  brief  signs,  either  by  simply  uniting  the  word-signs,  or 
by  further  abbreviating  them.  A  skilful  use  of  these  word  and 
phrase  signs,  in  addition  to  the  brief  forms  of  the  First  Style, 
would  give  considerable  speed  to  the  writing,  and  might  be  suffi- 
cient for  some  persons.  Yet  there  ar  many  long  words  in  that  por- 
tion of  our  language  which  is  derived  from  the  Latin  and  the  Greek 
that  may  be  further  abbreviated  to  advantage.  These  words  ar 
built  up  from  a  root  or  stem  word  by  the  addition  of  prefixes  and 
affixes ;  as,  for  example,  inter-communication,  which  may  be  divided 
into  intcr-com-munica-tion.  By  providing  brief  signs  to  represent 
the  prefixes  inter-  and  com-,  and  the  termination  -tion,  we  greatly 
reduce  the  labor  of  writing ;  thus,  3. —  ^^, ».  ,  intercommuni- 
cation. « 

Prefix  Signs. 

The  general  principles  of  contraction  afford  brief  signs  for  most 
of  the  prefixes,  yet  there  ar  a  few  that  ar  provided  with  special  signs. 
Some  of  these,  such  as  com-,  con-,  and  in-,  form  part  of  thousands 
of  words,  which  renders  it  possible  to  effect  a  shortening  in  all 
these  words  by  the  use  of  only  a  few  brief  forms  representing  pre- 
lixes.  So  also  with  the  affixes. 


THE  D  AND  T   SERIES   OF  COMPOUNDS.      23 

Affix  Signs. 

The  terminations  of  words  which  require  any  specinl  devices  for 
contraction  ar  very  few,  and  apply  to  thousands  of  words ;  so  that 
the  use  of  a  dozen  brief  signs  for  affixes,  in  connection  with  the 
prefix  signs  mentioned  above,  abbreviates  the  writing  to  an  extent 
t,hat  is  a  continual  wonder,  even  tho'  so  long  known  and  used.  (See 
Chapters  VII.  and  VIII.) 

We  hav  thus  provided  for  the  representation,  in  a  brief  manner, 
of — 1st,  The  words  of  most  frequent  occurrence;  and,  2d,  For 
words  of  Latin  and  Greek  origin,  composed  largely  of  derivativs 
from  some  common  stem-word.  But  there  is  another  class  of 
words  in  our  language,  and  one  of  great  use  and  importance,  that 
is  not  reacht  in  this  way. 

Common  Saxon  Words. 

We  refer  to  the  great  body  of  Saxon  words  which  form  the  staple 
of  ordinary  intercourse.  They  present  few  markt  features  of  reg- 
ularity, and  cannot  be  shortened  in  so  simple  a  manner  as  those 
composed  of  prefixes  and  affixes.  They  abound  in  consonant  let- 
ters, employing  not  unfrequently  four  or  five  such  letters  in  a  single 
syllable ;  as,  for  instance,  strand,  starts,  plants. 

We  hav  shortened  these  words  materially  by  the  use  of  the  signs 
of  the  L,  R,  and  S  series,  heretofore  explained ;  and  it  may  be 
doubted  whether  we  can  carry  the  process  of  contraction  farther 
without  more  loss  than  gain.  Yet,  theoretically,  wherever  two  con- 
sonants are  frequently  joined  without  an  intervening  vowel,  a  sign 
may  be  used  to  represent  them  in  combination.  Such  combinations 
ar  -rd,  -nd,  -Id,  &c.,  in  hard,  hand,  hold;  -rt,  -It,  and  -nt,  in  hurt, 
hilt,  and  hunt.  And  in  like  manner  r  and  I  may  unite  with  almost 
any  consonant  following  them,  as  in  harsh,  surf,  elf,  elm.  But 
some  of  these  combinations  ar  much  more  important  than  others  ;  for, 
while  f,  m,  and  sh  may  unite  with  a  preceding  I  or  r  only,  the  d  and 
t  may  unite  with  nearly  all  the  consonant  letters  of  the  same  degree 
of  hardness,  as  z  and  s  do  in  the  list  of  final  compounds  of  the  S 
series.  Hence,  by  adopting  one  mode  of  contracting  all  letteia 
which  combine  with  d  or  t,  we  gain  a  multitude  of  brief  forms 


24  USE   OF  COMPOUNDS  RESTRICTED. 

growing  out  of  one  principle.  To  represent  this  union  of  d  and  / 
with  a  preceding  consonant,  the  consonant  which  precedes  is  short- 
end,*  and  the  d  or  t  is  thus  indicated  without  being  written. 

The  other  comhinations  named  hav  never  been  furnished  with 
any  briefer  signs  than  the  alphabet  provides.  There  is,  however, 
another  step  that  maybe  taken  in  the  formation  of  shortened  forms. 
Having  signs  for  the  consonantal  diphthongs  of  the  L,  H,  and  S 
series  (both  initial  and  final),  and  of  the  d  and  t  series  final,  these 
brief  signs  may  be  used  to  represent  the  same  letters  when  not 
united  diphthongally.  For  instance,  the  P  may  be  used  in  the 
words  soap,  soup,  sup,  sap,  sop,  as  well  as  spy ;  the  P  in  the  words 
bill,  bell,  ball,  able,  as  well  as  blow,  blew,  and  blue,  and  so  on  through 
all  the  signs  that  represent  consonants  in  union.  This  practice 
opens  the  way  for  entire  licentiusnes  of  word-forms.  It  substi- 
tutes for  the  alphabetic  signs  others  to  be  used  in  their  place  —  not 
merely  in  certain  well-defined  cases  of  combinations,  but  in  any 
case  where  the  fancy  of  the  writer  may  choose  to  use  them.  Such 
licentiusnes  could  not  be  tolerated,  as  it  would  throw  the  whole 
system  into  confusion.f  And  the  only  escape  from  it,  after  once 

*  This  method  of  representing  d  and  t  when  united  with  a  preceding 
consonant  (and  the  same  form  of  contraction  has  been  largely  used  also 
in  other  cases)  is  an  important  feature  of  all  the  Phonographies,  and  its 
utility  as  a  stenographic  device  cannot  be  doubted.  Yet  it  has  been  se- 
verely criticised  as  wanting  in  dcfiuitnes,  and  requiring  too  much  pre- 
cision in  the  writer.  These  objections  arc  valid  if  applied  to  a  style  for 
general  use,  but  form  no  very  insuperable  objection  against  a  style  for 
reporters,  which  must  avail  itself  of  brief  forms  in  some  manner.  Before 
the  hulf-length  ehar.;cters  are  ahandund,  belter  ones  must  be  provided. 
We  regard  them  as  entirely  satisfactory,  if  limited  in  their  use  to  the 
cases  of  phonic  union  specified,  or  when  extended  in  a  simple  and  natu- 
ral way  to  the  addition  of  a  t  alter  a  light  character,  and  a  d  after  a  hevy 
character;  but  when  a  light  or  hcvy  character  is  allowed  to  indicate 
either  a  d  or  t  at  plesnrc,  and  a  hook  is  added  to  the  sh^rtend  letter  to 
represent  nd  or  nt,  shnd  or  shnt,  vd  or  ft,  the  eoniplexnes  is  greatly  in- 
rreast,  and  the  original  design  seems  to  be  buried  in  its  accessories. 
However  necessary  this  may  be  in  the  most  involved  of  reporting  styles, 
it  certainly  has  no  proper  place  either  in  a  style  for  general  writing,  or  in 
a  .simple  style  for  note-taking. 

*•  The  confusion  actually  resulting  from  this  licentius  use  of  the  con- 


RAPIDITY  OF  WRITING  AND  SPEAKING.      25 

adopting  the  principle,  is  by  assigning,  more  or  less  arbitrarily,  one 
mode  of  contraction  to  one  word,  and  another  mode  to  another, 
and  teaching  the  proper  outlines  individually.  This  method  was 
resorted  to  in  Phonography ;  but  we  hav  preferd,  in  this  style,  to 
use  those  methods  of  contraction  principally  in  their  first  and  legiti- 
mate sphere.  We  hav,  however,  treated  the  circle  as  a  substitute 
for  the  alphabetic  S,  employing  it  with  great  freedom  in  long  words, 
but  restricting  its  use  in  words  of  one  syllable  sufficiently  to  render 
the  outlines  distinctiv. 

The  use  of  the  half-length  characters  of  the  d  and  t  series  is 
also  extended  somewhat  beyond  the  cases  mentioned  on  page  23, 
but  they  ar  employed  with  greater  restriction  than  in  the  old  style. 

The  lengthened  curves  ar  introduced ;  but  their  use  is  confined 
mainly  to  the  prefixes  enter-  and  inter-,  and  to  a  few  words  of  fre- 
quent occurrence.  We  hav  thus  reduced  the  number  of  contracted 
stem-forms  to  about  Jive  hundred,  or  one  seventh  of  the  thirty-five 
hundred  used  in  Phonography,  and,  by  employing  them  in  a  more 
natural  manner,  hav  renderd  those  introduced  far  easier  of  appli- 
cation. 

Sapidity  of  Writing  Secured. 

Having  secured  so  good  a  degree  of  simplicity,  some  persons 
will  desire  to  know  something  concerning  the  rate  of  speed  secured. 
While  the  rate  of  speed  has  been  held  subordinate  to  the  more 
essential  qualities  of  legibility  and  simplicity,  it  has  not  been  over- 
lookt.  Indeed,  in  securing  simple  and  facile  forms,  we  hav,  at 
the  same  time,  secured  forms  most  easily  and  rapidly  written. 
There  will  always  be  great  diversity  of  talent  shown  in  the  ability 
to  write  rapidly  by  persons  using  the  same  style,  but  there  is  quite 
as  much  diversity  in  the 

Rate  of  Public  Speaking. 

The  average  rate  of  public  speaking  has  long  been  regarded  as 
about  one  hundred  and  twenty  words  a  minute.  But  many  good 

tractions  was,  and  still  is,  very  great  among  Phonographers.  A  given 
page  is  often  written  with  very  different  word-forms  by  students  using 
the  same  text-book. 


26  RESULT  OF  THE  SIMPLIFICATION. 

speakers  speak  slower  than  this,  and  quite  as  many  faster  than  this. 
The  slowest  speakers  utter  seventy-five  to  one  hundred  words  a 
minute,  and  the  most  rapid  from  one  hundred  and  sixty  to  two 
hundred  words,  or  even  faster  than  this  for  one  or  two  minutes  at 
a  time.  Yet  rapid  speakers  do  not  always  speak  so  rapidly,  and 
the  slowest  sometimes  accelerate  their  speed  to  an  average  rate. 
The  rate  of  both  speakers  and  writers  is  generally  estimated  for  a 
period  of  only  a  few  minutes  at  a  time.  Estimated  by  the  hour, 
the  speed  diminishes  considerably.  This  style  is  written  at  the 
rate  of  one  hundred  and  twenty  to  one  hundred  and  fifty  words  a 
minute,  and  may  be  carried  beyond  this  rate  of  speed  by  skilful 
men.  Indeed,  it  is  difficult  to  set  a  definit  limit  to  the  power  of 
such  a  style.  Used  with  the  freedom  with  which  we  write  the 
ordinary  script,  its  speed  would  be  at  least  six  times  as  great.  Our 
common  script  is  written  at  the  rate  of  twenty  to  forty  words  a 
minute.  It  will  thus  be  seen  that  we  gain  for  practical  purposes 
more  speed  than  is  gained  in  Phonography  by  any  except  the  few 
professional  writers. 

Second  Result. 

We  hav  thus,  as  a  second  result  of  the  simplification  of  the  sys- 
tem, produced  a  style  adequate  for  taking  full  reports  of  ordinary 
speeches,  sermons,  or  lectures,  while  at  the  same  lime  it  is  very 
accurate  and  legible.  We  hav  gaind  this  result  in  a  style  so 
simple,  that  students  in  all  our  professional  schools  and  colleges 
can  reduce  it  to  practice  without  interrupting  their  other  studies, 
and  in  a  reasonably  short  space  of  time.* 

THE  REPORTING  STYLE. 

We  cannot  treat  here  of  the  contractions  peculiar  to  the  Report- 
ing Style  of  Tachygraphy.  Those  that  devote  their  lives  to  the 
art  can  afford  to  spend  a  longer  time  in  preparing  for  their  work, 
and,  thro'  long  practice,  may  become  skilled  in  a  greater  number 

*  Students  ar  able  to  put  the  First  Style  to  practical  use  with  two  or 
three  months'  study,  and  can  master  the  Second  Style  in  two  months  addi- 
tional, without  interrupting  their  other  pursuits.  By  devoting  their  whole 
time,  '.ney  may  leru  them  sooner  than  this. 


ESSENTIAL   QUALITIES   OF  WRITING.         27 

of  peculiar  and  irregular  word-forms ;  but,  even  among  profes- 
sional reporters,  there  is  a  limit  to  the  degree  of  complexity  that 
can  be  made  practical.  M.  Gouraud  *  has  well  said  :  — 

"  Whoever  has  attempted  to  lern  any  of  the  systems  encum- 
berd  with  these  exceptional  intricacies "  [referring  to  those  used 
in  Phonography]  "  must  hav  experienced  this  unavoidable  conse- 
quence —  viz.,  that,  whenever  an  excess  of  exertion  in  the  memory 
has  been  brought  in  to  aid  the  fingers,  the  progres  of  the  student 
has  always  been  retarded.f  Indeed,  experience  has  often  proved 
that  the  most  lengthy  kind  of  writing  "  [the  writer  doubtles  means 
a  comparativly  extended  style  of  brief  writing]  "  could  sooner  help, 
in  its  fullest  delineation,  to  follow  the  delivery  of  a  voluble  orator, 
than  the  most  condenst  or  abbreviated  system  of  reporting  sten- 
ography." 

We  shall  treat  further  concerning  the  wants  of  professional  re- 
porters in  our  next  volume,  devoted  to  the  Reporting  Style.  But, 
whatever  reporters  as  a  class  may  need  in  a  system  of  brief  writ- 
ing, there  can  be  no  question  that  students,  lawyers,  editors,  and 
literary  men  of  most  classes,  demand  simplicity  and  legibility,  and 
only  so  much  brevity  as  is  consistent  with  these  more  essential 
qualities  of  good  writing. 

*  See  work  entitled  "  Cosmo-phonography,"  by  Francis  F.  Gouraud, 
D.  E.  S.,  New  York,  1850,  page  179. 

t  It  is  on  this  account  that  the  speed  of  writing  does  not  increase  in 
proportion  to  the  brevity  of  the  style.  In  actual  practice,  the  speed  of 
the  writing  may  diminish  as  briefer  forms  ar  introduced ;  and  when  the 
briefer  forms  ar  so  mastered  as  to  add  somewhat  to  the  speed  of  the  writ- 
ing, it  is  always  far  less  than  would  be  anticipated,  for  there  is  always  a 
loss  growing  out  of  the  increased  complexity  to  be  deducted  from  the 
gain  growing  out  of  the  brevity.  Hence  it  is  that  we  increase  the  number 
of  the  brief  forms  of  the  First  Style  four-fold  in  order  to  double  the  speed 
of  the  writing,  and  must  increase  them  in  as  great  a  ratio  to  add  fifty  per 
cent,  of  speed  to  the  style  here  given.  As,  in  ascending  high  mountains, 
the  steepnes  of  the  way  increases  with  each  degree  of  progres,  so,  in 
brief  writing,  it  is  vastly  easier  to  gain  a  speed  of  one  hundred  and  twenty 
to  one  hundred  and  forty  words  a  minute  than  to  increase  this  speed  to 
one  hundred  and  eighty  or  two  hundred  words.  Yet  even  this  highest 
rate  of  speed  is  attainable  in  Tachygraphy,  and  has  been  attained  by  some 
persons. 


28  ACKNOWLEDGMENTS  TO  FORMER  AUTHORS. 

Acknowledgments.  —  It  would  be  unjust  to  close  this  Introduction 
without  repeating  the  acknowledgments  previusly  made  to  those 
who  hav  done  so  much,  in  former  years,  to  develop  and  perfect  the 
art  of  brief  writing.  Their  labors,  however  imperfect,  were  neces- 
sary ;  and,  though  we  must  add  to  their  work  a  little  here,  and 
take  from  it  a  little  there,  yet  it  has  formd  a  basis  without  which 
none  of  the  present  systems  could  hav  been  produced. 

The  author  would  acknowledge  especial  obligations  to  the  distin- 
guish! Inventor  of  Phonography,  Isaac  Pitman,  Esq.,  of  England, 
in  whose  works  he  first  lerned  to  love  the  art  of  swift  writing,  and 
whose  patient  and  long-continued  devotion  to  the  development  of 
the  principles  of  the  science  has  done  so  much  to  enrich  it  with  new 
and  valuable  material.  The  new  letters  were  not  adopted  through 
any  love  of  novelty,  but  only  because  the  art  could  not  be  ren- 
dered practicable  without  them ;  and  it  is  a  source  of  plesure  to 
the  author  of  Tachygraphy  that  he  is  conscius  of  laboring  in  entire 
sympathy  with  all  the  aspirations  and  hopes  awakend  by  the  intro- 
duction of  Phonography  into  this  country,  more  than  a  quarter  of 
a  century  ago.  He  believes  that  these  hopes  will  be  realized  in  the 
introduction  of  Tachygraphy.  Though  changed  in  form  and  dress, 
the  essential  principles'  remain  ;  and  the  art,  in  its  new  form,  em- 
bodies in  a  practical  manner  what  was  foreshadowd  in  the  old. 
Thus  men  labor  as  grace  and  wisdom  ar  given  them  from  above, 
but  God  directs  for  his  own  glory  and  the  good  of  men.  He  is  the 
true  INVENTOR. 


THE    NOTE-TAKER. 


CHAPTER  I 

SHORTENED    WORD-FORMS. 

1.  THE  abbreviations  employed  in  this  style 
of  Tachygraphy  may  be  classed  under  the  fol- 
lowing divisions:    1st,  Word-signs;    2d,  General 
Contractions ;    3d,   Prefixes    and   Affixes ;    4th, 
Phrase-signs. 

WORD-SIGNS. 

2.  Definition.  —  A  word-sign  is  a  Tachygraphic 
word-form  shortened  by  omitting  or  contracting 
some   of  the  -letters    used   in    writing   it   fully. 
Word-signs   are    formed   by  special   and   some- 
times   irregular    modes    of  '  contraction,   which 
apply  only  to  the  words  specified,  or  to  their 
derivatives. 

29 


30  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

The  characters  used  for  word-signs  are,  — 
0,  Letters  of  the  Tachygraphic  alphabet. 
b,  Compound  signs,     c,  Combined  signs.  * 
d,  Contracted  and  Irregular  signs. 

3.  Word-signs   may  be   further  classed   as  — 
A,  Vocal,   B,    Consonantal    signs.      The   purely 
Vocal  signs  are  found  only  in  Class  a. 

Class  b  consists  of  the  secondary  letters  of  the 
L,  R,  and  S  series  of  compounds. 

Class  c  may  contain  either  a  consonant  and  a 
vowel,  or  two  or  more  consonants. 

Class  d  comprises  word-signs  formed,  in  part, 
of  letters  which  do  not  appear  in  the  word  as 
written  in  the  full  form,  or  those  which  employ 
one  or  more  of  the  final  letters  of  the  word. 

REMARK.  —  The  latter  class  is  very  small,  and  forms  an 
exception  to  the  general  principles  which  are  followed 
almost  uniformly  throughout  the  system. 

4.  Word-signs   may   be    further   classed   into 
Primitives  and  Derivatives. 

A  Primitive  word-sign  is  the  simplest  form  in 
which  it  occurs,  as  "J ,  object;  J,  will.  A  Deriv- 
ative word-sign  is  any  modification  of  such 
Primitive  form. 

5.  We  add  a  table  of  the  Primitive  word-signs 
that  are  of  the  most  frequent  occurrence. 


CHAPTER    I. 

TABLE    OF    WORD-SIGNS. 
A.  —  1.  VOCAL  SIGNS. 


31 


n  ye                   -   who              x  all 
3  in                    u   have             "   of 

^/  how 

-  or  i  the 

B.  —  CONSONANTAL    SIGNS. 

2.  Common  Abbreviations. 

c  1    A.B.                    "^  Co. 
c_A.D.                   --D.D. 
c/-A.M.                    "1  DeP- 
"^X  Ace.                      —  i  Do. 

f?  Mr. 

^\_  Math. 

l^x    RS' 

|^"  P.M. 

^1  Chap.                    ^^  Eng. 

/")   Rev. 

3.  In  which  only  Vocals  are  omitted. 

\    Be                           ^_  they 

.^  are 

|     up                          """N  though 
/^~~    may 

*^_s  on,  own 

*j  y°u 

^  he 

US,  SO 


32 


THE    NOTE-TAKER. 


4.  In  which  both  Vocals  and  Consonantals  are  omitted. 


1 

object 

~^\    thing 

f 

subject 

|    number 

1 

principle,  -al 

(^}  neverthelesss 

1 

improve 

^-^—   knowledge 

\ 

perhaps 

^S^-s  language 

•~N 

together 

^X]      represent 

A 

.    Tachygraphy 

^X        remark 

V 

value 

e^      with 

V 

form 

c  —     general 

^> 

Phonography 

r    /°     gentlemen  (an) 

5. 

Irregular  Forms. 

( 

advantage 

^-<^     notwithstanding 

3 

&c. 

f       pleasure 

o 

as 

cA-'  question 

^N 

because 

<  x     when 

/     while 

each 

^—  ^ 

> 

hath 

=  —      which 

_>/       whole   - 

him 

4 

large 

J      will 

CHAPTER    I.  33 


EXPLANATION    OF   THE   TABLE. 

6.  a.  The  first  list  of  word-signs,  composed 
wholly  of  vocal  signs,  are  used  in  forming  com- 
pounds and  phrases,  in  the  same  way  as  the 
vocals  are  used  in  forming  outlines  for  words. 


Examples. 


rS    ye  are  °"Y^  in  them  7  who  are 

\_    have  they     \^     of  these  =—   into 

^  although       \      however,  &c. 

b.  It  should  be  particularly  noticed,  however, 
that  the  sign  for  the  article  the  may  be  written 
either  perpendicularly  or  horizontally,  and  that 
it  never  stands  alone.  All  other  vocal  word-signs, 
may  be  written  either  joined  or  disjoined  ;  the 
tick  for  the  is  always  joined.  It  may  commence 
or  end  a  phrase. 

Examples. 

-c-""    the  way  ^    /""  the  time 

^        the  advantage  1        the  favor 

in  the         .  —  «      to  the 

Q-        as  the  [^         by  the,  &c. 


34  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

7.  a.  The  second  list  of  signs  are  always  written 
independently,  as  they  stand  in  the  table.  They 
are  not  purely  phonic  signs,  but  are  so  suggestiv 
of  the  common  abbreviations,  universally  used, 
as  to  need  no  special  memorizing.  Their  use 
may  be  learned  by  an  examination  of  the  table. 
It  will  be  noticed,  however,  that  such  abbrevia- 
tions as  have  no  phonetic  value  —  as,  for  in- 
stance, Kt.  for  Knight  —  are  omitted  from  the 
table.  It  would  not  do  to  write  \ for  KnigU. 

REMARK.  —  It  will  lie  observed  that  the  sign  for  A.  in 
A.  B.  and  A.  D.  expresses  different  sounds  in  Artis  Bach- 
elor and  Anno  Domini,  and  that  A.M.  maybe  written 
for  Artis  Magister  and  Ante  Meridiem,  as  well  as  for 
Anno  Mundi. 

b.  LIST  No.  3.  —  Words  of  a  single  conso- 
nant letter  need,  for  the  most  part,  a  vowel  to 
make  them  perfectly  legible.  It  would  not  do 
to  confound  such  words  as  any,  no,  now,  nay,  know, 
own,  &c.,  nor  is  it  at  all  necessary.  Any  and  now 
are  written  v — <*  and  ^-^ ;  and  other  words 
which  contain  only  the  consonant  — ',  except  on 
and  own,  add  the  vowel.  In  a  similar  way,  all 
little  words  of  this  class  are  treated.  The  follow- 
ing words,  for  instance,  may  be  written  in  this 
Style  as  they  are  written  in  the  First  Style : 
Bow,  lough,  ape,  ope,  gay,  see,  say,  thee,  aim,  mow, 


CHAPTER   I.  35 

me,  my,  ray,  roiv,  raiv,  ear,  oar,  way,  woe,  nay, 
high,  &c. 

c.  Number  4  contains  contractions  from  which 
many  derivative  forms  spring.  It  is  arranged, 
as  the  preceding  table  is,  in  the  order  of  the 
Tachygraphic  alphabet.  The  signs  derived  from 
these  will  be  given  in  another  chapter. 

8.  The  last  number  contains  anomalous  forms, 
from  the  most  of  which  no  other  forms  are  de- 
rived. 

a.  In  the  sign  for  each,  the  hook  of  the  <= —  is 
omitted. 

b.  The  sign  for  as  is  the  s-circle.     The  com- 
mon abbreviation  &c.  is  written  with  the  halved 
>-x  used  for  and,  and  °) ,  and  reads  and-so-forth. 

c.  The  stems  of  the  letters  Ha  and  Wha  are 
omitted  in  the  words  hath,  whole,  ivhile,  when,  and 
him,  and  the  hook  only  is  written. 

d.  In  the  word-signs  advantage  and  large,  (  is 
used  for  c__ ,  as  being  more  distinctive  and  con- 
venient to  write. 

REMARK.  —  In  memorizing  the  tables,  let  the  student 
write  each  word-sign  over  many  times,  and  repeat  the 
word  as  the  character  is  made.  "When  the  signs  are 
learned  so  that  they  can  be  written  correctly,  they  may  be 
written  from  the  lips  of  a  reader,  repeating  each  sign  and 
each  table  of  signs  many  times,  until  they  can  be  written 
with  great  rapidity  and  skill. 


36  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 


WRITING  EXERCISE  FIRST. 
Short  Sentences  containing  Word-signs. 

Com  unto  me,  all  ye  that  labor!  How  shal  they  giv  who  hav 
not  ?  In  this  rejoice  !  The  way  of  the  rihteus  is  as  a  shining  liht. 
The  day,  the  time,  the  path,  the  goal,  the  glory,  the  ground,  the 
place,  the  praise.  In  the,  on  the,  for  the,  to  the,  tho'  the,  thro'  the, 
hav  the,  all  the.  John  Jones,  A.  B.  A.  D.  1872.  Adam  Smith, 
A.  M.,  in  ace.  with  Samuel  Sampson,  D.  D.  Mr.  William  How- 
land,  Deputy  P.  M.  General,  Washington,  D.  C.  E.  Dow,  B.  A., 
Prof,  of  Mathematics,  Cambridge,  Eng.  Perhaps  the  principal 
object  in  our  meeting  together  is  to  consider  the  subject  in  all  its 
bearings.  Gentlemen  may  remark  the  value  of  Tachygraphy  as 
contrasted  with  Phonography  in  the  expression  of  language,  and 
they  will  form  an  opinion  in  accordance  with  the  facts.  A  knot- 
edge  of  the  principles  of  language  is  of  general  utility.  Notwith- 
standing the  advantages  of  the  mesure,  a  large  number  of  gentle- 
men wer  disposed  to  call  it  in  question.  To  him  that  hath  shal  be 
given,  and  from  him  that  hath  not  shal  be  taken  even  that  which  he 
seemeth  to  hav.  Becaus  I  hav  calld  and  ye  hav  refused,  I  hav 
stretcht  out  my  hands  all  the  day  long,  and  no  man  regarded,  &c. 
It  is  as  each  one  shal  choose.  TJio'  the  whole  jurny  gav  us  plesure 
in  the  main,  we  wer  nevertheles  delihted  when  we  reacht  our  homes. 
They  hav  taken  advantage  of  your  remarks.  A  large  number  of 
persons  wer  present.  Wud  you  be  wise,  Jive  things  observ  with 
care  —  of  whom  you  speak,  to  whom  you  speak,  and  how,  and  when, 
and  where. 


CHAPTER  11. 

THE   USE    OF   THE    CIRCLE. 

9.  The  circle  is  retained  in  the  Note-Taker's 
style  in  all  cases  in  which  it  is  used  in  the  first 
style  of  Tachygraphy. 

The  circle  is  used  in  the  first  style,  — 
a.  In  all  initial  and  final  compounds  contain- 
ing .9,  and  with  the  dot  vocal,  as  in 


I.  With  other  short  and  obscure  vowels,  espe- 
cially in  words  of  more  than  one  or  two  sylla- 
bles. (See  Elements,  pp.  71,  78,  and  79.) 

10.  In  the  Note-Taker's  style,  the  use  of  the 
circle  is  farther  extended,  as  specified  below. 

1.  The  circle  is  used  with  all  single  vowels  in  most  words 
of  more  than  two  consonants,  and  with  a  larger  number 
of  short  words  than  in  the  first  style. 

2.  Words  of  two  consonant  letters,  one  of  which  is  s, 
and  some  words  of  three  consonants,  require  much  limita- 
tion in  the  use  of  the  circle.     Since  the  same  consonant 
skeleton  may  be  vocalized  to  form  a  dozen,  and  in  some 

37 

449602 


38  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

cases  many  more  different,  words,  the  use  of  vocal  signs  is 
necessary  to  secure  definiteness  in  the  writing ;  and  the 
vocal  frequently  precludes  the  use  of  the  circle.  (See  12, 
3,  Rem.  1.) 

3.  Many  words  of  three  consonants,  however,  and  nearly 
all  Avords  of  four  and  more,  are  sufficiently  definite  from 
their  consonant  outline  alone,  and  admit  of  contraction 
with  more  freedom. 

11.  a.  Words  of  two  consonant  letters,  one 
of  which  is  <?,  are  quite  numerous.     The  differ- 
ent words  growing  out  of  a  single  pair  of  conso- 
nant  letters  form,  in  some   cases,   a  group  of 
twenty,  thirty,  or  more  words  which  must  be 
distinguished  either  by  difference  of  outline  or 
by  vocalization.     Hence  it  is  necessary  to  limit 
the  use  of  the  circle  in  such  classes  of  words, 
even  in  the  briefest  style  of  the  art. 

b.  The  use  or  disuse  of  the  circle  in  such  cases 
depends  upon  the  number  of  words  in  the  group, 
and  the  frequency  with  which  any  given  word 
is  employed.  Hence  general  rules  cannot  be 
applied  satisfactorily. 

12.  The  following  specifications  will  aid  the 
student  to  understand  the  use  of  the  circle  in 
words  of  only  two  or  three  consonant  letters. 

1.  With  the  consonant  letters  1-8  and  the  vowels  are 
formed  more  than  thirty  words,  as  follows:  ails,  alas, 


CHAPTER   IT.  39 

alifis,  allays,  alleys,  allies,  alloics,  alloys,  awls,  eels,  Ellas, 
Ellis,  else,  eyeless,  isles,  lace,  lass,  lays,  laics,  lease,  lees, 
less,  Lewis,  lice,  lows,  loose,  lose,  loss,  louse,  oils,  owls,  &c. 

NOTE. — For  key  to  the  proper  forms  of  these  words,  see  Reading- 
Lesson  Third,  4. 

REM.  —  Phonographers  write  /"^  as  the  outline  for  all  of  these 
words,  which  leads  to  great  indefiniteness  in  reading.  Or,  if  the 
disjoined  vowel  is  added,  there  is  a  greater  loss  of  speed  than  in 
writing  the  word  in  the  fullest  form,  as  in  the  first  style  of  the  art. 

2.  This  group  of  words  may  be  taken  as  a  type  of  many 
similar  groups  which  contain  only  two  consonants,  one  of 
which  is  s;  such  as  r-s,  m-s,  p-s,  s-n,  s-l,  s-p,  &c.     Thus  the 
circle  is  used  in  the  words  airs,  errs,  oars,  ours,  ears,  and 
erse;  and  the  full  form  in  the  words  race,  rice,  rouse,  rise, 
arise,  areas,  iris,  houries,  &c.     (Read.  Les.  Third,  5.) 

So,  also,  we  use  the  circle  in  muss  and  mess,  aims  and 
alms,  but  vocalize  amaze-  amuse,  mice,  mouse,  moose;  the 
circle  in  pass,  apes,  opes,  and  the  longer  form  in  pace, 
pause,  pose,  pews,  poise,  paws,  pease,  oppose.  (R.  L. 
Third,  6.) 

3.  Many  other  groups  of  words  are  written  in  analogy 
with  these. 

REM.  1.  —  The  vowel  is  often  omitted  when  the  ^->>  or  s~\  is 

written,  and  in  this  respect  these  outlines  differ  from  the  forms  used 
for  these  words  in  the  first  style.  The  vocal  c  before  x— N  is  almost 
always  omitted,  conforming  to  the  general  rule  that  vocal  signs  are 
omitted  when  they  are  not  easily  joined  ;  and  the  n  before  x-^s  and 
x~s  is  almost  always  written  in  words  of  this  class. 

REM.  2. — Words  belonging  to  such  groups  as  those  mentioned 
above,  if  of  frequent  occurrence,  should  be  written  as  briefly  as  is 
consistent  with  perfect  legibility.  If  the  word  contains  an  initial 
vowel  which  can  be  written,  the  circle  may  be  used  with  the  greater 


40  TIIEf  NOTE-TAKER. 

freedom,  as  in  the  words  allays,  allows.  Still,  even  here  there  must 
be  some  restriction,  for  we  have  also  the  words  alloys,  allies,  and 
alleys  to  be  distinguished  from  them. 

REM.  3.  —  The  words  containing  l-s,  and  similar  groups  which 
end  in  a  vowel,  lazy,  Lucy,  boozy,  fussy,  &c.  have  not  been  given  in 
the  preceding  lists  because  they  all  conform  to  the  general  princi- 
ple which  prescribes  the  use  of  ^-^  and  x~  N  in  all  cases  where  «  is 
the  last  consonant  in  the  word,  and  followed  by  a  vowel. 

13.  In  all  words,  long  as  well  as  short,  the  ^-^ 
or  X-N  is  used  for  s,  — 

a.  Where  this  letter  is  immediately  preceded 
or  followed  by  a  diphthong,  or  by  two  vocals,  as 
in  the  words  disguise,  espouse,  disabuse,  science, 
serious.     (R.  L.  Third,  7.) 

b.  Where  a  vocal  precedes  s  or  sin  the  begin- 
ning of  a  word,  or  follows  them  in  the  end  of  a 
word,  as  in  the  words  essential,  fancy. 

EXCEPTION  1.  —  Where  o  or  x  commences  a  word  fol- 
lowed by  s,  the  circle  is  sometimes  joined  to,  or  written 
within,  the  vocal,  as  in 


ask,    auspicious. 

Exc.  2.  —  A  final  vowel  may  also  be  written  after  the 
circle  in  such  words  as 


\ 


pursue,     prophecy. 


CHAPTER    II.  41 

In  this  case,  however,  when  another  consonant  is  added, 
the  vowel  is  dropped,  as  in 

V 

pursued,     prophecies. 

SPECIFICATION. — The  following  words  of  frequent  occur- 
rence are  written  with  the  circle:  case,  seen,  south,  this, 
use  (noun),  house. 

EEM.  1 . — The  circle  is  not  used  in  scene  or  seine.  It  must  not  be 
supposed  that  when  a  word  is  contracted  irregularly  that  all  words 
pronounced  in  a  similar  manner  follow  the  same  analogy.  One 
word  may  be  contracted  on  account  of  frequent  occurrence,  while 
another  word,  both  spelled  and  pronounced  in  the  same  manner, 
is  written  in  full.  The  word  will,  as  a  noun,  as  in  the  phrase  the 
will  of  God,  is  written  as  in  the  common  style  of  the  art,  while  the 
word-sign^  is  used  only  for  the  auxiliary  will  in  such  phrases  as 
He  will  go.  This  principle  will  be  observed  in  other  instances. 

REM.  2. —  The  use  of  the  circle  in  long  words  is  considerably 
extended.  It  is  restricted  only  by  the  following  principles: — 

a.  Where  a  vowel  follows  s  in  the  end  of  a  word,  or  precedes  it  in 
the  commencement.  To  this  principle  there  are  no  exceptions,  except 
those  noticed  above  in  connection  with  the  vowels  ^  and  /  in  the 
beginning  of  a  word,  and  two  or  three  vowels  in  the  end  of  a  word. 

i.  Where,  the  8  in  the  midst  of  the  word  is  either  preceded  or  fol- 
lowed by  two  vocals  or  a  diphthong,  as,  for  instance,  in  the  last  sylla- 
bles of  the  words  spontaneous,  erroneous,  harmonious,  counterpoise. 
(II.  L.  Fourth,  9.) 

To  this  principle  there  are  some  exceptions,  which  are  mentioned 
below. 

EEM.  3.  —  The  circle  is  used  in  long  words  wherever  it  is  more 
convenient  than  the  full  form,  even  with  the  double  vocals  and 
diphthongs,  if  the  resulting  outline  is  entirely  legible,  and  not 
liable  to  be  confounded  with  any  other  word. 

Examples. — Licentiate,  licentious.  So,  also,  in  the  words  unsound, 
assign,  &c. 


42  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

REM.  4.  —  The  circle  is  used  in  certain  terminations  ending  in  * 
preceded  by  two  vowels,  as,  for  instance,  uous  in  the  words  anibigu- 
om,  impetuous,  tempestuous,  &c.  (R.  L.  Fourth,  9.) 

REM.  5.  —  No  account  is  made  of  silent  vowels.  When  several 
vowels  occur,  only  one  of  which  is  sounded,  the  vowel  is  considered 
as  single. 

The  word  gorgeous,  for  instance,  though  ending  in  a  syllable  which 
contains  three  vowels,  is  pronounced  as  though  there  were  but  one, 
and  is  written  with  the  circle. 

REM.  6.  —  The  above  principles  and  directionswill.it  is  hoped, 
make  the  use  of  the  circle  plain  in  most  cases.  If  pome  cases  still 
occur,  in  which  the  proper  word-form  is  doubtful,  the  student  must 
rely  upon  his  observation  in  reading  Tachygraphy.  or  the  judgment 
of  a  competent  teacher.  The  correction  of  exercises  written  by  the 
pupil,  in  which  words  embodying  these  principles  occur,  is  the  best 
way  of  mastering  them  in  detail. 


THE    CIRCLE    FOR   Z. 

14.  In  addition  to  the  principles  given  i 
Elements  for  the  use  of  the  circle  for  £,  it  may 
be  used, — 

a.  In    long  words   generally,  when  not  pre- 
cluded by  the  principles  before  mentioned;  but 
it  cannot  be  used  when  the  word  begins  with  z. 

SPEC.  1.  a. —  The  circle  is  used  in  such  words  as  deserve, 
observe,  desert,  resort,  &c.,  where  the  sound  of  z  seems  to 
be  a  necessity  of  speech. 

b.  The  long  sign  ^~\  is  used,  however,  in  zeal,  zany, 
etc.    where   the   z   is   initial;   also  in  business,  emblazon, 
unison.,  and  wherever  the  circle  might  be  read  for  s. 

2.  —  Some  cases  of  doubtful  outlines  will  occur;   and 


CHAPTER   II.  43 

some  words  may  be  distinguished  in  writing  that  have 
the  same  consonants  similarly  situated.  The  words  reason, 
risen,  rosin,  raisin,  for  instance,  contain  the  same  conso- 
nant elements,  but  they  may  be  distinguished  as  follows. 

a.  In  the  following  pairs  of  words,  reside  recede,  pre- 
side precede,  and  others  of  this  character,  there  is  a  double 
reason  for  writing  the  former  word  of  the  pair  in  the  full 
form.     These  words  contain  both  the  z  and  the  diphthong 
v  in  connection  with  it ;  and  so  there  is  a  stronger  reason 
for  writing  reside  and  preside  in  full  than  for  writing  recede 
and  precede  in  full.     So,  recede  and  precede  are  written 
with  the  circle,  and  reside  and  preside  with  /•— s. 

b.  Some  persons   may  also  wish   to   distinguish   more 
accurately  between  such  words  as  precede  and  proceed,  and 
to  separate  these  in  outline  from  praised  and  prized.     The 
latter  group  (praised  and  prized)   are  written  with  the 
halved  /^«N,  explained  in  chapter  iv,  and  the  former  (pro- 
ceed and  precede)  may  be  distinguished  by  adding  the  vowel 
if  necessary  to  one  of  the  words. 

c.  In  most   long   words  no   confusion  can  result  from 
freedom  in  the  use  of  the  circle  for  z;  and,  yet,  in  a  few 
cases,   like  president   and  precedent,   perfect   perspicuity 
requires  a  restricted  use  of  the  circle.      Such   instances 
can  be  fully  specified  only  in  a  vocabulary;  but  persons 
who  do  not  require  the  briefest  forms,  and  who  need  great 
accuracy  in  writing,  can  easily  avoid  all  difficulty  by  using 
the  long  x-v  in  all  cases  where  the  circle  might  be  taken 
for  s. 

d.  The    terminations    ism    and    asm    in  words  of  two 
syllables  may  frequently  be  written  with  the  circle  when 


44  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

preceded  by  a  consonant,  and  in  some  cases  when  pre- 
ceded by  a  vowel,  as  in 


theism,   baptism,  methodism,  agrarianism. 

b.  The  circle  is  used  for  z  in  the  following 
words:  does,  these,  was,  use  (verb),  his,  has. 

SPEC.  —  The  word  was  takes  the  x->.  in  some  phrases 
for  convenience,  and  the  full  form  is  quite  as  rapid  as  the 
shorter  form  when  both  are  equally  convenient.  The  form 
"with  the  circle  is  needed  in  such  phrases  as  was  not,  icas 
done,  and  is  quite  convenient  in  was  so  and  was  this.  The 
full  form  is  more  convenient  in  the  phrases  I  was  sure, 
was  present,  and  others  of  this  kind.  (R.  L.  Fourth,  8.) 

<?.  The  circle  is  used  for  z  in  forming  the  plural 
of  nouns  and  third  persons  singular  of  verb*, 
which  are  represented  by  word-signs.  Thus  the 
circle  is  added  to  the  word-signs  for  improve, 
represent, form,  advantage, principle,  <fec.,  making 
improves,  represents,  forms,  advantages,  princi- 
ples, &c. 

SPKC.  —  Where  the  first  form  of  the  verb  ends  in  a 
consonant,  the  circle  will  be  added  to  all  classes  of  words 
in  forming  the  plural  of  the  noun  and  third  person  singular 
of  the  verb  ;  but  where  the  first  form  of  the  word  ends  in 
a  vowel,  there  will  be  some  restriction  of  this  principle. 
Yet  words  of  frequent  occurrence  will  attract  the  briefer 
lonn,  as,  for  instance,  yoes,  days. 


CHAPTER   II.  45 

REii.  1.  —  This  principle  should  not  be  carried  too  far.  There 
would  be  no  advantage  arising  from  writing  such  words  as  ways  or 
weighs  with  the  circle  ;  it  would  lead  to  indefiniteness  with  no  pro- 
portionate gain  in  speed. 

REM.  2.  —  In  the  reporting  style,  a  larger  class  of  words  is  con- 
tracted in  this  way,  and  provision  is  made  for  the  increased  fre- 
quency of  the  use  of  certain  words  in  special  kinds  of  reporting. 
Such  details  must  be  reserved  for  the  treatise  on  that  style. 


THE  DOUBLE    CIRCLE. 

15.  The  circle  is  made  twice  its  usual  size  to 
represent  s-s  with  any  intervening  vowel,  and 
may  be  thickened  to  represent  s-z. 

a.  The  double  circle  is  chiefly  used  to  express 
the  syllables  ses,  sis,  su$,  sez,  and  siz  in  words 
like  the  following:  — 


sustain,  necessary,  senses,  ancestor. 

b.  It  may  also  be  used  in  a  few  cases  where  a 
long  vowel  or  a  diphthong  occurs  between  the 
tf's/  but  with  these  vowels  the  fully-  written 
forms  are  generally  better,  as 


Caesar,  Alsace. 

SPEC.  1.  —  The  double  circle  may  be  used  with  great 
freedom ;  but  it  is  sometimes  more  convenient  to  write 


46  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

the  long  sign  for  one  of  the  s's,  even  where  there  is  no 
rule  to  prevent  the  use  of  the  double  circle,  as  in 


Cicero,      Csesarea,    recess,     races. 

2.  —  The   use   of   the   double   circle    cannot   be    fully 
understood  until  the  student  has  learned  the  use  of  the 
half-length  and  double-length  principles  taught  in  chapters 
iv  and  v.   The  words  system  and  sister,  for  instance,  would 
be  naturally  written  with  the  doable  circle,  but  it  is  thought 
better  to  write  the  former  of  these  words  with  a  shortened 
<—%  and  the  latter  with  a  lengthened  x-^.    (See  Chap.  IV., 
sec.  40,  a,  and  Chap.  V,  sec.  48,  c,  Spec.) 

3,  —  The   rules  already  given   for  the  use  of  the  cir- 
cle will  aid  the  student  in  the  use  of  the  double  circle,  for 
the  presence  of  a  diphthong,  or  two  vowels-  immediately 
before  or  after  the  s's,  precludes  its  use,  since  one  of  the 
s's  must  be  written  with  the  long  sign,  as  in 


society,     apotheosis. 

4.  —  In  some  cases  the  double  circle  is  used  in  a 
derivative  word  when  it  does  not  occur  in  the  primitive 
form,  as,  for  instance, 


accessible,  successive, 
while  the  words  access  and  success  do  not  have  it. 


CHAPTER    II.  47 

5.  —  The  double  circle  may  be  used  in  the  word  Q — 
(assist),  ignoring  the  vowel  which  begins  the  word,  though 
this  form  of  contraction  is  not  allowed  in  many  cases  of 
this  kind. 


S   BEFORE   COMPOUNDS   OF  THE   R-SERIES. 

16.  a.  When  s  precedes  the  compounds  1  1 
—  c_,  the  circle  is  written  on  the  r-lwok 
side,  and  the  r  is  thereby  implied,  as  in  the 
words 

stream,  screen,  spring,  supper,  sadder. 

I.  When  these  forms  occur  in  the  midst  of  a 
word,  as  in  express,  describe,  restrain,  the  hook 
will  appear. 

restrain,  subscribe,  express,  describe,  prosper,  distress. 

c.  There  are  some  cases,  however,  in  which 
the  triple  compounds  $pr,  str,  scr,  &c.  do  not 
join  readily  with  the  preceding  letter;  and  some 
cases  in  which  a  farther  contraction  is  desirable, 
in  order  to  increase  the  ease  and  rapidity  of  the 
writing.  These  cases  are  specified  as  follows:  — 


48  THE   NOTE-TAKEK. 

SPEC.  —  1  .  Where  °\  follows  |  and  |,  and  where  0  —  fol- 
lows |  |  \  and  \,  the  circle  is  properly  written  on  the  right 
side  of  the  |  |  &c.,  as  follows  :  k  t  —  \j  — 

2.  For  the  sake  of  contraction  in  some  words  of  fre- 
quent occurrence  the  r  may  be  omitted,  and  the  circle 
written  on  the  outside  of  the  angle,  as  in 


v- 

extra,     obstruct. 

REM.  1.  —  Whether  this  form  of  contraction  can  be  safely  adopted 
in  any  given  case  or  not  will  depend  partly  upon  the  liability  of 
confounding  the  contracted  form  with  any  other  word  of  similar 
outline,  and  partly  upon  the  frequency  of  the  use  of  the  contracted 
word.  The  words  prescribe  and  prescription,  for  instance,  may  be 
contracted  ;  and  the  words  proscribe  and  proscription  may  be  writ- 
ten more  fully.  Yet  the  usage  would  change  in  different  depart- 
ments of  literary  work,  for  the  words  that  are  of  frequent  occurrence 
in  one  department  of  literature  or  science  may  be  very  infrequent 
in  another. 

3.  In  some  words  where  the  trigraphs  *!  <\  o  —  follow 
the  curved  letters,  the  circle  will  occur  on  the  back  of  the 
curve.  This  use  of  the  circle  is  not  difficult  where  the 
curve  ends  in  the  direction  of  the  added  letter,  as  in 


unstrung. 

But  where  the  added  letter  follows  in  a  different  direction, 
it  is  better  to  write  the  Ions:  ^-N,  as  in 


mainspring,      unscrew. 


CHAPTER  n.  49 

4.  Where  the  circle  occurs  on  the  inside  of  the  curve,  it 
is  not  necessary  that  the  hook  appear;  but  where  it  is  con- 
venient to  make  it,  it  will  add  to  the  perspicuity. 

Examples. 


V 


offspring,      wellspring. 

5.  The  above  principles  will  also  apply  to  cases  where 
rl<\v  and  c —  are  preceded  by  sy  but  the  X-N  may  be  freely 
used  when  convenience  requires  it. 

REM. — In  all  cases  of  difficult  joining  with  these  trigraphs,  where 
the  above  specifications  do  not  apply,  the  fuller  forms  employed  in 
the  common  style  will  be  found  to  be  always  convenient  and  un- 
objectionable. The  shortened  forms  are  not  necessary,  but  are 
employed  merely  for  the  sake  of  securing  greater  brevity ;  so  wher» 
they  do  not  aid  the  writer,  there  is  no  need  that  they  should  be 
employed  to  burden  and  complicate  his  style. 


THE    CIRCLE    BEFORE   /  </  &NV 


17.  a.  In  the  commencement  of  a  word,  the 
circle  is  written  on  the  under  side  of  the  /  for 
<ST,  and  on  the  upper  side  for  sw. 

b.  In  the  midst  of  a  word,  the  hook  of  the  ^ 
must  always  appear;  but  the  sr  may  be  written 
with  the  hook  on  either  side:  — 


50  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 


sir,  sway,    disorder,    dissuade,      Isr,      ysr. 

c.  The  circle  may  be  written  on  the  back  side 
of  the  curve  in  such  combinations  as 


msw,    ssw. 

d.  Before  ^,  the  /—  s  is  most  convenient  in 
such  words  as  $9/^0,  Sahara;  but  the  circle  may 
be  written  in  the  hook  without  especial  incon- 
venience. 

In  the  word,  falsehood,  the  </  is  omitted. 


BEFORE  THE  COMPOUNDS  OF  THE  L-SERIES,  AND 
J  AND  CHA. 


18.  a.  Before  the  compounds  f  f^s'x  and  J 
initial  s-  is  written  by  the  full  sign  ^->,  since  this 
form  is  more  easily  written  than  the  circle;  but 
when  another  consonant  precedes  the  <?,  it  is  fre- 
quently convenient  to  use  the  circle.  Examples:  — 


. 

sickly,  exclaim. 

b.  The  circle  can  be  written  in  the  hook  of 
c_  _9   9  <^  (see  sec-  26,  a);  but  ^—  =— 


CHAPTER   II.  51 

come  under  the  principle  mentioned  in  the  pre- 
ceding paragraph. 

Examples. 

<?—    <s—     c\      r^-i— 
stl,   sdl,  s-shl,  misjudge,  mischief. 

SPEC.  —  In  cases  where  it  is  inconvenient  to  use  the  cir- 
cle before  these  compounds  in  the  midst  of  a  word  without 
some  change  of  form,  the  writer  may  avoid  the  difficulty 
in  the  following  ways :  — 

1.  He  may  use  the  ^->.  This  is  always  allowable,  and 
is  generally  the  best  way  where  the  following  compound 
belongs  to  the  initial  series. 

Examples. 


misplace,  discipline. 

2.  Other  modes  of  overcoming  this  difficulty  are  allow- 
able, a.  The  hook  may  be  omitted,  as  in  ^^  explain; 
or,  b.  The  hook  may  be  written  after  the  circle,  by  means 
of  a  connecting  stroke,  as  in  — ^k^-v  disclose. 

REM.  1.  —  Mr.  Pitman  authorizes  another  mode  of  writing  the 
hooks  of  the  L  and  R  series  after  the  circle  in  such  cases  as  those 
specified  above.  It  is  that  of  making  an  imperfect  hook  where  it 
cannot  be  perfectly  formed.  This  can  be  done  if  the  writer  can 
afford  to  pause  long  enough  to  do  it ;  but  either  of  the  methods 
recommended  above  is  more  consistent  with  speed  in  writing,  and 
more  likely  to  afford  distinctly-legible  word-forms. 

HEM.  2.  —  The  «  is  never  omitted,  except  in  the  case  of  word- 


52  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

signs.    The  circle  is  added  to  word-signs  when  they  take  the  plural 
number,  or  any  other  modification  containing  this  sound. 


VOCALIZATION   OF  WOEDS   CONTAINING  THE   CHICLE 
AND   DOUBLE   CIRCLE. 

19.  When  disjoined  vowels  are  used  in  words 
written  with  the  circle  or  double  circle,  their 
position  must  be  determined  with  reference  to 
the  full-sized  letter  to  which  the  circle  is 
attached:  as,  for  instance,  in  the  example  previ- 
ously given:  Ji-  _o_  ^-  s-^__  /^_ 
The  dot  is  read  after  the  main  stem,  near  which 
it  is  placed,  and  before  the  circle.  But  in  the 
following  words  the  circle  is  read  first,  and  the 
vowel  between  it  and  the  main  stem:  — 


f    ^ 
sup,  sad,  unsatisfied. 

SPEC.  1.  —  So,  we  have  two  cases,  a.  Where  the  circle 
is  on  the  end  of  a  stem,  as  shown  in  the  former  illustra- 
tion. Here  the  vocal  is  written  after  the  stem  that  pre- 
cedes the  circle,  b.  Where  the  circle  is  on  the  first  of 
the  stem.  Here  the  vocal  is  written  before  the  stem 
that  follows  the  circle,  as  in  the  last  illustration.  Both 
cases  are  united  in  the  word  ttntattyled, 

2.  Observe,  also,  that  letters  preceding  or  following  the 
stem  to  be  vocalized  do  not  affect  the  vocalization.  In 


CHAPTER  n.  53 

the  word  unsatisfied,  for  instance,  the  syllable  un,  which 
precedes,  and  the  syllable  fied  which  follows,  do  not  change 
the  position  which  the  vocals  assume  to  the  stem,  satis 
(sts},  which  is  to  be  vocalized. 

REM.  1.  —  It  must  not  be  inferred  that  the  vocal  signs  are  to  be 
frequently  inserted.  They  may  be  omitted  in  most  cases.  Even 
the  words  sup,  sad,  and  unsatisfied,  which  we  have  used  as  illustra- 
tions, are  usually  written  without  the  vowels.  Yet,  it  is  sometimes 
necessary  to  insert  a  disjoined  vocal  for  greater  distinctiveness,  and 
when  used,  it  should  be  used  in  accordance  with  the  principles  here 
given. 

REM.  2.  —  The  general  rules  for  writing  the  circle  between  two 
consonants  are  given  in  the  Elements,  page  71.  These  rules  should 
be  followed. 

The  rule  most  frequently  violated  is  Case  3,  —  "  Between  a  straight 
and  a  curved  line,  the  circle  is  always  on  the  inside  of  the  curie" 
This,  also,  is  illustrated  in  the  word  unsatisfied,  as  given  above. 

20.  Steins  with  which  double  circles  are  con- 
nected are  vocalized  in  the  same  manner  as  those 
which  contain  a  single  circle  ;  but,  iu  addition  to 
this,  the  double  circle  admits,  in  some  cases,  an 
inserted  vowel,  which  is  read  between  the  two 
s's. 

Examples. 


analyses,  cisalpine. 

1.  Since  the  double  circle  primarily  represents  sus,  ses, 
sez,  the  vocals  \  and  •  need  not  be  inserted  ;  and  it  is  sel- 
dom necessary  or  expedient  to  insert  the  o  or  rt.  Even 


54  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

the  words  analysis  and  analyses  will  be  sufficiently  dis- 
tinguished by  shading  or  thickening  the  circle  on  one  side 
to  represent  sez.  The  only  object  of  inserting  the  vocal 
in  such  a  case  would  be  to  designate  the  tact  that  the  e  in 
this  syllable  is  long,  which  in  ordinary  writing  would  be 
unnecessary. 

2.  The  other  vocal  signs,  such  as  x,  c,  or  y ,  may  be 
inserted  in  the  double  circle  in  such  words  as  saucebox, 
exercising.  But  these,  and  all  other  words,  may  be  writ- 
ten more  fully  by  means  of  the  - — »  or  x-~\  and  a  single 
circle,  if  the  writer  chooses  the  longer  form. 

REM. —  Here,  as  in  the  case  above,  a  mode  of  contraction  is  given 
to  meet  a  few  special  cases ;  and  the  student  should  not  press  such 
forms  into  service  on  all  possible  occasions,  but  choose  instead  the 
plainer  form,  when  such  form  is  convenient  for  use. 


CHAPTER   II.  55 


WRITING    EXERCISE   SECOND. 

Apes,  opes,  adds,  odds,  aids,  odes.  Apace,  apiece,  apis. 
Ease,  bass,  boss,  bias.  Case,  kiss,  chaos.  Fuss,  face, 
office.  Pass,  pace,  piece,  peace,  pious. 

Place,  pulse,  bless,  bliss,  blouse.  Dross,  dress,  trace, 
trice,  truce.  Press,  price,  pierce,  purse.  Brace,  Bruce, 
bourse.  Grace,  grass,  grouse.  Crease,  cross,  cress.  Glass, 
gloss,  glassy,  glossy,  dressy,  drossy.  Vase,  vice,  voice. 
Mace,  mass,  muss,  mess,  mice,  mouse,  moose.  Nice,  gneis, 
niece,  noose. 

Lac.e,  lease,  loose,  loss,  less,  lass.  Alas,  Elias,  alias, 
Lewis,  Lucy.  Hace,  racy,  iris,  rice,  ruse.  Chase,  chess, 
choice.  Fleece,  floss. 

Sip,  sup,  sop,  sap,  sick,  suck,  sock,  sack,  sake,  seek,  soak, 
set,  sat,  soot,  sot.  Seed,  said,  sowed,  sawed,  sad,  sods, 
sighed,  sued,  sieve,  save,  salve,  says,  size,  seize,  sues. 

Cease,  sauce,  siss,  cess,  souse,  assess,  recess,  assessing, 
ceasing,  tracing,  gracing,  racing,  pressing. 

/Specify,  spice,  space,  suppose,  supper,  superior,  super- 
fine, superficial,  soporific,  submissive,  substantial,  subsoil, 
suggesting,  succeed,  success,  successful,  unsuccessful.  Sat- 
isfy, satisfied,  unsatisfied,  sudden,  suddenly.  Decency, 
citizen,  citizenship.  Situate,  situated,  settle,  unsettled, 
sadly,  Saturday,  suffice,  suffuse,  sovereign,  sovereignty, 
siiffer,  sufferance,  insufferable,  south,  southern,  seethe, 
seen,  same,  some,  sum,  assume,  sameness,  seeming,  whole- 
some, unseemly.  Soon,  scene,  sane,  sign,  sawn,  sound, 
soicn,  unseen,  unsound.  Sing,  sung,  sang,  singing,  song, 
sing-song,  sink,  sank,  sunk. 


56  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

Seal,  sail,  soul,  soil,  sailing,  soiling,  unsealing,  selling, 
sold,  seldom,  soldier. 

Ask,  acid,  astonish,  asp,  assiduity,  assiduous,  associ- 
ate, assign,  assail,  acerbity,  aspen,  asserted,  assorted. 

BRIEF  SENTENCES  CONTAINING  THE  WORDS  GIVEN  ABOVE. 

If  the  price  of  the  book  you  hav  in  press  suits  my 
purs,  it  is  my  purpos  to  purchas  it.  Messieurs  Brace 
and  Bruce  wer  at  the  Bourse.  In  pious  mood  they  pas 
apace,  and  slowly  pace  in  peace.  He  ads  to  the  ods,  and 
aids  them  with  his  odes.  Tlie  base  boss  has  a  decided 
bias.  In  this  case,  what  is  a  kis  f  Did  he  say  case  or 
chaos  f  In  face  ofthefoss,  with  much  fuss,  he  announced 
his  office.  Bles  the  giver  of  blis.  The  grouse  was  in  the 
gras,  with  grace  in  form  and  f  ether.  Her  glossy  icing 
is  dressy, — I  do  not  say  her  glassy  wing  is  drossy.  This 
mas  of  mice  have  made  a  pretty  mus.  Tlie  loss  of  the  lass 
is  les  on  this  lease  than  on  the  lace  for  her  bridal  arr<ii/. 
Alas  for  Julias,  alias  Lewis  and  Luce!  Too  loose.  Alas 
for  Lucy !  As  he  sowed  the  seed,  he  sighed  (sihd),  and 
sed  hoio  sad  the  sod!  Let  them  cease  to  assess  tiths  on 
sauce  and  souse.  Suppose  we  leave  this  space  for  spice, 
and  specify  some  superior  articles  for  use  at  supper.  They 
sip  and  sup  tJie  sap.  Sorn  persons  assume  wholesom 
authority.  Being  requested  to  sing,  she  sung  a  song,  and 
as  stie  sang,  a  blush  so  soon,  the  sign  of  modesty,  began 
to  suffuse  itself  unseen  over  every  feature.  Let  this  suffice. 

WRITING   EXERCISE   THIRD. 
The  Circle  for  Z,  and  the  Double  Circle. 

His,   has,   does,  these,  use,  was.       Observe,  observing, 


CHAPTER  n.  57 

observer,  reserve,  deserve,  subserve,  discern,  reservoir,  dis- 
solve, resolve,  Methodism,  baptism,  Catholicism.  Reason, 
reasoning,  unreasonably. 

Long  Sign,  /"^s. 

Zinc,  zero,  zany,  zepher,  zeal,  zealous,  zealot,  zealously, 
zone,  zoology,  zion,  zenith,  season,  seasonable,  seasoning, 
business,  emblazon,  risen,  rosin,  rising,  arisen,  arising, 
reside,  Beside.  Praising,  prizing,  pleasing,  supposing, 
enclosing,  disposing.  Theism,  deism,  barbarism,  fanati- 
cism, Armenianism,  agrarianism,  Prcsbyterianism. 

Circle  for  the  Plural  Number. 

Advantages,  advantageous,  principles,  represents,  forms, 
objects,  subjects,  values,  numbers,  remarks,  pleasures. 

Miscellaneous  Phrases. 

Tfiese  are,  these  things,  has  been,  his  time,  his  work,  has 
led,  does  this,  was  it,  was  to,  was  sure,  was  seen,  was  done, 
was  so,  was  present,  was  deceived,  many  days,  many  ways, 
he  goes,  his  days. 

The  Double  Circle. 

Sustenance,  sustaining,  sesquitone,  suspicious,  unsus- 
picious, unsuspiciously,  suspend.  Necessary,  necessarily, 
unnecessarily.  Ancestor,  ancestry,  ancestral.  Glances, 
trances,  prances,  glimpses,  senses,  essences,  excrescences. 

Miscellaneous. 

Mecess,  recesses,  races,  reposes,  imposes,  Ciceronian,  the- 
sis, theses,  antithesis,  antitheses,  hypothesis,  hypotheses, 
synthesis,  syntheses,  apotheosis,  society,  Caesar,  access,  suc- 
cess, accessible,  successful,  successive,  inaccessible,  assist- 
ing, resisting. 

Tri  graphs. 

Strive,  streak,  stratify,  strategy,  sprung,  sprang,  scream. 
/S upper,  sadder,  sucker,  screw,  scribe,  describe,  disagree- 


58  TITE    NOTE-TAKER. 

able,  distress,  disprove,  disapprove,  express,  expressive, 
expressing,  excrescence.  Restrain,  restore,  respire,  prosper, 
prosperous,  unprosperous.  Extraneous,  extra,  prescribe, 
proscribe,  subscribe,  superscribe,  unstrung,  down-stroke, 
mainspring,  shoe-string,  unscrew,  offspring,  wellspring. 
Surround,  survive,  reserve,  disorder,  sway,  persuade,  dis- 
suade. Yes,  sir-  no,  sir.  Sahara,  falsehood.  So-sweet, 
may-sway.  Exclude,  exclaim,  icicle,  sick,  sickly,  suckle. 
Disciplinarian,  misplacing,  explanatory,  unexplained, 
disclosing,  disclaim,  disciple,  gospel.  Expletive,  explicit, 
explode,  explore,  explosive,  expel,  expulsion,  extramundane, 
extra  judicial,  extravagancy,  extreme,  extremely,  extremity, 
extricable,  extrinsic,  extrude. 

Miscellaneous. 

Swiss,  swindle,  sepulcher,  scissors.  Suggestive,  sub- 
stantial, sublime,  submissive,  subscriber,  substratum,  sub- 
stitute, subside,  suffer,  suffering,  suffix,  sufflate,  sulphur, 
sultry,  sun-stroke,  sunrise,  superabound,  superadd,  super- 
fluous, superstratum,  supersede,  supervene,  siqiply,  suppos- 
able,  suppleness,  suppj'ess,  surprise,  sustenance,  suspend, 
satisfy,  statistician,  statesmanship. 

Grasp  the  whole  world  of  reason,  life,  and  sense 
In  one  close  system  of  benevolence: 
Happier,  as  kindlier,  in  whate'er  degree, 
A  hiht  ofblis  is  hiht  of  chanty. 

As  some  taU  difthat  lifts  its  awful  form, 
Sicehfrom  the  vale,  and  midway  leaves  the  storm, 
Tho'  round  its  brest  the  rolling  clouds  are  spred, 
Eternal  sunshine  settles  on  its  hed. 

Deceit  is  the  false  road  to  happines, 

And  all  the  joys  -ice  travel  to  thro'  vice, 

Like  fairy  banquets,  vanish  when  we  touch  them. 


CHAPTER  III. 

EXTENDED  USE   OF  THE   COMPOUNDS  OF  THE  L  AND 
K   SEEIES. 

21.  a.  The  principles  of  the  Common  style  in 
regard  to  the  use  of  the  signs  of  the  L  and  R 
series  of  compounds  are  followed  largely  in  the 
Note-Taker's  style.  The  use  of  these  signs  is, 
however,  in  this  style  extended  somewhat.  The 
omission  of  the  vocals  in  some  words  renders 
the  use  of  the  compound  sign  convenient  where 
it  could  not  be  used  with  the  fully-vocalized 
forms. 

Examples.— feeble, people,  travel,  drivel,  gravel. 
(R.  L.  Sixth,  15.) 

To  these  examples  may  be  added  many  words 
containing  these  sounds,  when  they  occur  in  un- 
accented syllables  in  the  end  of  words  of  more 
than  two  syllables,  as  musical,  poetical,  strate- 
gical, affable,  suicidal,  supernal,  eternal,  ambro- 
sial, <fec.  (R.  L.  Sixth,  15.) 

b.  There  are,  on  the  other  hand,  many  cases 
in  which  the  compound  sign  is  inconvenient. 

59 


60  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

The  full  form  should  be  written  in  these  cases, 
because  it  is  more  convenient. 

Examples.  —  Able,  table,  rebel,  durable,  marble, 
fallible.  (R.  L.  Sixth,  16.) 

c.  The  compound  sign  should  not  be  used 
when  a  full  vowel  occurs  between  the  I  or  r  and 
the  preceding  p,  t,  d,  or  other  consonant  with 
which  they  unite.  A  few  exceptions  are,  how- 
ever, admitted  for  convenience'  sake,  as  in  the 
words 

V    c-     ?     ?      C- 

call,  dear,  full,  sure,  till. 

It  is  not  easy  to  give  a  general  rule  that  will  enable  the 
writer  to  determine  in  every  case  whether  to  use  the  longer 
or  shorter  forms  for  words  of  the  class  treated  of  in  this 
section.  Indeed,  it  is  not  necessary  that  usage  should  be 
entirely  uniform  in  this  respect.  Yet,  as  most  persons  will 
desire  to  secure  all  the  brevity  consistent  with  perfect  legi- 
bility, the  following  suggestions  and  examples  are  added. 

SPEC.  1.  —  In  certain  groups  of  words,  a  distinction  of 
outline  can  be  secured  only  by  the  use  of  vocals  in  some 
of  the  words  of  the  group. 

a.  The  dtr  group  comprises  the  words  debtor,  doubter, 
deter,  daughter,  auditor,  editor,  auditory.      (For  outlines 
see  R.  L.  Sixth,  18,  a.) 

b.  The  ttr  group  comprises  the  words  tatter,  tetter,  titter, 
tighter,  totter,  tutor. 

c.  Ppr. — Peeper,  pepper,  paper,  pauper,  piper. 

d.  Bbl. — Babel,  babble,  Bible,  bubble. 


CIIAPTETJ   IIT.  61 

e.  Ttl. —  Tattle,  tittle,  tottle,  title. 

f.  Fble— Fable,  feeble,  foible,  affable,  effable. 

g.  VI.  —  Evil,  oval,  vale,  vile,  vial,  valley,  volley.      (R. 
L.  Sixth,  18,  b,c,d,e,f,g.) 

EEM.  —  Other  groups  similar  to  the  above  may  be  given  by  the 
teacher,  or  selected  by  the  student.  These  will  suffice  to  illustrate 
the  manner  of  distinguishing  such  words 

2.  When  s  precedes  syllables  in  which  the  I  or  r  series 
of  compounds  may  be  used,  the  writer  will  adopt  one  of 
the  three  following  modes  of  writing  the  words. 

a.  The  circle  may  be  used,  and  the  following  compound 
separated  into  its  elements  as  in  the  words 


vascular,  gospel. 

b.  The  x-x  may  be  used  followed  by  the  hooked  sign, 
as  in 


" 


vesicle,  physical. 

c.  Where  it  can  be  done  conveniently,  the  hook  may 
follow  the  circle,  as  in  the  case  of  initial  compounds 
treated  of  more  specifically  in  the  preceding  chapter. 

^Examples. 


\ 


Bristol,  briskly. 


62  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

REM.  1. —  Examples  under  this  case  are  not  very  numerous;  and 
it  will  always  be  possible  to  substitute  for  these  forms  those  given 
under  case  6.  They  may  be  distinguished,  however,  by  the  careful 
student.  In  these  cases,  a  and  b,  either  the  hook  or  the  circle  must 
be  sacrificed ;  hence  the  question  will  arise,  which  form  of  contrac- 
tion is  most  natural,  most  legible,  or  most  easily  made  ? 

By  referring  to  the  examples  given,  it  will  be  observed  that  the 
words  vascular  and  gospel  do  not  properly  demand  the  hooked  signs. 
Neither  is  the  circle  demanded  by  any  principle  of  the  style.  Since 
both  forms  of  contraction  are  only  tolerated  in  the  examples  men- 
tioned for  convenience,  the  question  resolves  itself  into  this,  —which 
form  is  most  convenient,  the  long  ^-^,  followed  by  the  hooked  letter, 
or  the  circle  as  given  in  the  text  ? 

The  principal  reason  for  preferring  the  circle  here  is  because  the 
resulting  outlines  are  less  angular  than  they  would  be  with  ^->,. 
(For  further  discussion  of  these  principles,  see  the  concluding  chap- 
ter on  Eugraphy.) 

In  the  examples  vesicle  and  physical,  another  principle  enters. 
Though  the  same  advantage  would  result  from  the  use  of  the  circle 
which  we  have  pointed  out  in  the  former  examples,  yet  there  are 
two  reasons  for  using  the  x*-^  and  ^.  .  1st.  The  s  is  followed  by 
a  vowel.  2nd.  The  final  syllable  is  a  true  compound  (see  Elements, 
page  75),  and  admits  the  sign  properly,  while  in  the  case  of  vascular 
and  gospel  the  use  of  the  C ,  f  would  be  irregular. 

We  leave  the  student  to  apply  the  principle  to  other  cases. 

REM.  2. — Cases  in  which  the  hook  may  follow  the  circle  need  no 
special  designation,  for  it  is  always  allowable  to  use  the  circle  and 
added  hooked  sign  when  it  can  be  done  conveniently,  except  in  the 
cases  mentioned  in  specification  1,  where  there  are  other  words 
whicli  might  assume  the  name  outline.  In  these  cases,  the  word 
of  most  frequent  occurrence  is  written  with  the  briefest  outline. 
(R.  L.  Sixth,  19.) 

3.  The  following  words,  and  some  others,  admit  the 
vowel  between  the  stem  and  the  hook  of  the  signs  of  the 
L  and  R  hook  series  of  compounds:  — 

Culture,  with  all  the  derivatives  and  compounds  formed 


CHAPTER    III.  63 

from  it,  such  as  agriculture,  horticulture,  uncultured,  cul- 
prit, pilgrim,  pilgrimage,  philology,  philosophy,  telegraph, 
telegram,  telescope.  (R.  L.  Seventh,  32,  a.) 

4.  It  is  not  necessary  generally  to  vocalize  those  outlines 
which  admit  the  vowel  between  the  hook  and  the  stem; 
but  if,  for  any  reason,  it  is  desired,  they  may  be  vocalized 
in  this  manner:  — 
•  a.  Semicircles  may  be  written  through  the  stem. 

b.  The  dots  may  be  made  into  a  small  circle,  and  placed 
after  the  stern  to  be  vocalized. 

c.  The  dashes  may  be  struck  through  the  stem  when 
they  are  written  in  a  direction  at  an  angle  with  it,  other- 
wise they  may  be  placed  after  it.     (For  examples  see  R. 
L.  Seventh,  32,  b.} 


THE   USE    OF    f    7    FOK   *~7     ^7" 

22.  The  signs  J  and  J  are  used  to  represent 
the  sounds  ofjr  and  clir  in  such  words  as 


-7 

Teacher,  preacher,  danger,  larger. 

This  is  in  analogy  with  the  use  of  (  for  c  —  in 
the  word-signs  for  large  and  advantage.  (See 
table,  Chapter  I.) 

SPEC.  1.  —  This  form  of  contraction  is  not  applied  to 
many  words  in  the  Note-Taker's  style,  but  only  to  a  few- 
words  of  frequent  occurrence.  The  signs  ?  and  'J  must  be 


64  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

preserved  for  their  original  use,  as  representing  the  sounds 
zhr  and  shr  in  all  cases  in  which  these  sounds  occur;  but 
in  cases  where  there  would  be  no  indefiniteness,  the  jr 
and  chr  may  be  so  written. 

2.  The  use  of  a  vowel  with  these  signs  may  be  sufficient 
to  make  the  outline  perfectly  legible,  and  this  will  be  fre- 
quently convenient  with  the  vowels  r\,  n,  ^/,  and  others,  as 
in  the  words  pitcher,  preacher,  teacher,  voucher. 

With  these  words  should  be  contrasted  the  normal  use 
.  of  these  signs  in  such  words  as  measure,  treasure,  pressure, 
&c.  (R.  L.  Sixth,  20.) 


THE   USE    O¥     f)     n    OR   (j      (J    FOR 


23.  a.  The  signs  ^  ^)  may  be  used  for  jl  and 
clil  in  some  words,  as  in 


vigil,  fragile. 

b:  The  signs  (j  '  (J  may  be  used  instead  of 
_J?  J?  when  they  are  more  convenient,  as  in  the 
words 


angelic. 

t^j        t  O 

Sriic.  —  Tlie  following  words  may  be  contracted  in  this 
way :  agile,  agility,  angel,  angelic,  bachelor,flagellate,  frag- 
ile, fragility,  vigil,  vigilance.  (R.  L.  Sixth,  21.) 


CHAPTER    III.  65 


WRITING   EXERCISE   FOURTH. 

Babel,  babble,  bubble,  Papal,  people,  pupil,  pebble. 
Paper,  pattper,  pepper,  piper,  popper. 

Auditor,  auditory,  daughter,  debtor,  doubter,  deter. 
Tatter,  tetter,  titter,  tighter,  totter,  tutor.  Tattle,  title, 
total,  tittle. 

Affable,  fable,  feeble,  foible.  Evil,  oval,  valley,  volley, 
vile,  viol.  Awful,  fail,  fall,  feel,  fell,  Jill,  file,  fool,  fowl, 
fall,  awfully,  folly,  foidly,  fully,  fulfil. 

Audible,  edible,  double,  terrible,  treble,  trouble,  drabble, 
durable.  Travel,  drivel,  trifle,  truffle.  Frivolous,  level, 
leveler,  revel,  revelers,  revelry,  civil,  civilly.  Novel,  novelty, 
cavil,  gravel,  bevel. 

Rider,  reader,  rudder,  writer,  rioter,  wrecker,  recur,  har- 
bor,-harper,  harsher,  maker,  meeker,  seeker,  sicker,  secure, 
looker,  locker,  knocker. 

Able,  unable,  enable,  disable,  ability,  disability,  rebel, 
rabble,  ribaldry,  marble,  fallible,  unavailable.  Journey, 
journal.  New  Hampshire.  CALL,  DEAR,  FULL,  SURE,  TILL, 
until,  surely,  ensure.  Gospel,  expel,  dispel,  fiscal,  vascular, 
vesicle,  physical,  Paschal,  Bristol,  briskly,  musical.  Pas- 
cal, muscular,  vestal,  festal,  mustily,  hastily.  Fragile, 
fragility,  flagellate,  vigil,  vigilance,  frivolous,  leveler, 
revelry,  novelty,  frivolity,  philological.  Phrenological, 
physiological,  philosophical.  Pilgrim,  pilgrimage,  tele- 
scope, telegram.  Delaware. 

Brief  Sentences  comprising  the  above  Words. 

Tlie  daughter  of  an  editor  met  a  debtor.  Auditor,  said 
she,  you  may  be  a  doubter,  but  this  shall  not  deter  me  from 


66  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

appealing  to  a  larger  auditory.  The  tower  of  Babel, 
according  to  the  .Bible,  was  a  great  bubble,  and  ended  in 
babble.  That  pauper  orderd  pepper  and  paper,  and  the 
piper  orderd  a  popper.  That  feeble  but  affable  lady  spoke 
of  the  young  man's  fable  as  a  characteristic  foible.  lie 
fell  like  a  fool:  how  awful  the  fall!  Words  fail  to  give 
full  emphasis  to  the  foul  folly,  and  awfully  he  has  ful- 
filled an  evil  destiny. 

For  ill  can  poetry  expresfutt  meny  a  tone  of  tho't  sublime, 
And  sculpture,  mute  and  motionles,  steals  but  one  glansfrom  time; 
But  by  the  wondrus  actor's  skil  their  wedcd  triumphs  com, — 
Vcrs  ceases  to  be  airy  tho't,  and  sculpture  to  be  dum. 

The  Gift  of  Tnngs. 

When  men  had  bin  taut  to  look  upon  all  men  as  breth- 
ren, then,  and  then  only,  did  the  variety  of  human  speech 
present  itself  as  a  problem  that  calldfor  a  solution  in  the 
eyes  of.tho'tful  observers.  I  therefore  date  the  real  begin- 
in  g  of  the  science  of  language  from  the  day  of  Pentecost. 
After  that  day  of  cloven  tungs,  a  new  light  is  spredinrj 
over  the  earth,  and  objects  rise  into  view  which  had  bin 
hidden  from  the  eyes  of  the  nations  of  antiquity.  Old 
words  assume  a  new  meaning,  old  problems  a  new  inter- 
est, old  sciences  a  new  purpos.  The  comon  origin  of 
mankind,  the  diferences  of  race  and  language,  (he  sus- 
ceptibility of  all  nations  to  the  hihest  mental  culture, — 
these  become  in  the  new  world  in  which  we  live  problems 
of  scientific,  because  of  more  than  scientific,  interest. 

MAX    MUELLEE. 


CHAPTER  in.  67 


THE  PEEFIXES  AB,  AP,  AG,  AC,  AD,  AND  AT  OMITTED. 

24.  a.  In  such  words  as  abbreviate  and  approxi- 
mate the  #5  and  ap  may  be  omitted,  writing  bre- 
viate,  proximate. 

Ex.—    \  abbreviate. 

So  ag  and  #c,  a<#  and  at,  where  followed  by 
gr,  cr,  dr,  and  tr  may  be  omitted. 

Ex. — Address,  attribute,  aggress,  accredit,  writ- 
ten dress,  tribute,  gress,  credit. 

b.  The  prefixes  ac,  af,  and  ag  may  in  like 
manner  be  omitted  in  some  cases  before  cl,fl, 
and  gl,  as  in  acclimate,  afflict,  agglutinate,  writ- 
ten climate,  flict,  glutinate. 

SPEC.  1.  —  The  number  of  words  containing  these  pre- 
fixes is  small,  and  the  student  should  fix  upon  definite 
outlines  for  each. 

Those  omitting  the  prefix  are  abbreviate,  accredit,  ac- 
crue, address,  aggrandize,  aggress,  appreciate,  appropri- 
ate, approximate,  attract,  attribute,  and  their  derivatives.. 
(R.  L.  Seventh,  24,  a.)  Acclimate,  acclivity,  afflatus, 
afflict,  affluence,  agglomerate,  agglutinate,  and  their  deriva- 
tives. (R,.  L.  Seventh,  24,  b.) 

2.  In  a  few  cases  the  prefix  is  written,  and  the  following 
g  or  p  omitted,  as  in  T/^~5i  apprehensive. 

The  words  which  follow  this  mode  are  aggregate,  ag- 


68  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

grieve,  appropriate,  approach,  approve,  apply,  and  their 
derivatives.     (R.  L.  Seventh,  24,  c.) 

REM.  —  Other  forms  of  contraction  not  yet  explained  enter  into 
the  formation  of  the  outlines  of  some  of  the  words  given  in  this 
section ;  and  they  are  on  this  account  omitted  from  the  reading 
lesson  (Lesson  Seventh),  but  they  are  given  in  the  vocabulary. 

3.  In  some  cases,  both  the  prefix  and  the  following  con- 
sonant may  be  written,  as  \. ,  acclaim. 


This  will  be  necessary  only  when  the  contracted  form 
would  be  liable  to  be  confounded  with  the  word  stripped 
of  the  prefix,  and  in  the  case,  for  the  most  part,  of  words 
of  infrequent  occurrence,  such  as  afflux,  appraise,  which 
might  be  confounded  w\\hflux  and  praise.  (R.  L.  Seventh, 
24>.) 

REM.  1.  —  The  examples  given  in  Spec.  2  also  distinguish  the 
words  so  contracted  from  the  root- word,  or  some  other  word  of 
similar  outline.  In  this  way,  approve  is  distinguished  from  prove, 
aggrieve  from  grieve,  and  approach  from  preach. 

REM.  2.  —  It  is  not  necessary  that  all  such  words  should  be  dis- 
tinguished by  difference  of  outline.  In  many  cases  the  word-form 
will  be  rendered  definite  by  the  use  of  the  words  in  a  sentence, 
although  capable  of  two  meanings  when  standing  alone.  This  is  the 
case  when  one  of  the  words  is  a  noun  or  adjective  only,  and  the 
other  a  verb,  as  in  the  case  of  the  words  tribute  and  attribute,  proxi- 
mate and  approximate. 

But  though  both  words  designated  by  a  given  outline  are  of  the 
same  part  of  speech,  there  may  be  still  some  peculiarity  of  use  that 
will  clearly  distinguish  them  in  a  sentence,  as  in  the  case  of  dress 
and  address. 


CHAPTER  in.  69 


THE  PREFIX  AD  BEFORE  V  AND  J. 

25.  a.  Where  the  prefix  ad  is  followed  by  v, 
as  in  the  words  adverb,  advise,  the  —  may  be 
omitted,  and  the  vowel  u  may  be  written  for  ad. 

SPEC.  1.  —  The  word  advantage,  and  all  its  derivatives, 
are  written  with  contracted  forms,  as  given  in  the  tables 
of  word-signs.  (R.  L.  Seventh,  25,  b.) 

2.  The  words  adverse,  adversity,  adverseness,  and  ad- 
versely may  be  written  V~Q,  &c.,  to  distinguish  them  from 
averse  and  its  derivatives.  (R.  L,  Seventh,  26,  a  and  b.) 

b.  The  vocal  u  may  also  be  written  for  ad 
wheii  this  prefix  is  followed  by^',  as  in  the  words 
adjoin,  adjust,  written  ^-t^^  <-*-"  . 

SPEC.  —  In  this  manner  may  be  written  the  words  ad- 
judge, adjure,  adjoin,  adjust,  adjutor,  and  their  deriva- 
tives (R.  L.  Seventh,  27)  and  adject,  adjacent,  adjudicate, 
adjunct,  adjuvant,  and  their  derivatives. 


70  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 


WRITING    EXERCISK   FIFTH. 

Abbreviate,  accrue,  attribute,  address,  aggress,  aggres- 
sor, acclivity,  afflatus,  affluence,  approximation,  agglom- 
eratioti,  aggrieve,  aggrievance,  appropriate,  approach, 
approachable,  approaching,  unapproachable,  aggravate, 
aggravated,  approve,  approvable,  apply,  applicable,  unap- 
plied, afflux,  applause,  appraise,  apprise,  applaud. 

Advance,  advantage,  advise,  adviser,  advisory,  advo- 
cacy, advowson,  adverb,  adversary,  adversative,  adversity, 
advice,  averse,  aversely,  adjacency,  adjoin,  adjudge,  adjure, 
adjurer,  adjust,  adjustable,  adjusting. 

Brief  Sentences  containing  some  of  the  above  "Words. 

Appearances  ar  ofen  deceitful.  They  approov  the  desine, 
and  icil  endevor  to  proov  its  superior  merits.  They  praise 
the  work,  and  appraise  the  value  of  the  labor  at  one  thou- 
sand dollars.  lam  sure  they  wil please  and  gain  applause. 
lie  teas  addrest  as  the  aggressor,  and  was  greatly  ag- 
grievd  by  the  implied  censure.  He  was  averse  to  these 
adverse  mesures.  They  preach  an  approaching  doom. 
We  advise  an  advance. 

Kepler's  Prayer. 

Thou  who  by  tlie  liht  of  nature  hast  kindld  in  us  the 
longing  after  the  liht  of  thy  Grace,  in  order  to  raise  us  to 
the  liht  of  Thy  Glory,  'thanks  to  thee,  Creator  and  Lord, 
that  Thou,  lettest  me  rejoice  in  Thy  works.  Lo,  I hav  don 
the  work  of  my  life  with  that  power  of  intelect  which  Thou 
hast  given.  I  hav  recorded  to  men  the  glory  of  Thy  works 
as  far  as  my  mind  cud  comprehend  their  inftnit  majesty. 
*  *  If,  by  the  wonderful  buty  of  Thy  works,  I  hav  bin 
led  into  boldnes,  if  I  hav  saut  my  own  honor  among  men 
as  I  adcanst  in  the  work  which  was  destind  to  Thine 
honor,  pardon  me  in  kindness  and  charity,  and,  by  Tliy 
Grace,  grant  that  my  teaching  may  be  to  Thy  ylory  and 
the  welfare  of  aU  men.  Praise  ye  the  Lord,  ye  herenly 
harmonies;  and  ye  that  understand  the  new  harmonies, 
praise  tlie  Lord  —  KEPLER'S  HAKMONY  OF  TUE  WORLD. 


CHARTER    III.  71 


BRIEFER   SIGNS   FOR   QUA    AND    GUA. 

26.  a.  A  new  sign  is  made  to  represent  the 
sound  of  qu  in  queen,  (/,  named  qua.  It  resem- 
bles ^/^  but  has  a  larger  hook.  IXdiffers  from 
the  o^  (wlia]  in  that  the  latter  has  a  smaller, 
heavy  hook,  while  the  </  (qua)  has  a  larger, 
light  hook. 

I).  This  sign  is  used  for  qu  quite  generally,  as 
in  the  words 


quench,  qualify. 

c.  The  full  form  is  used  in  some  words  con- 
taining qu  for  the  purpose  of  securing  outlines 
more  easily  vocalized,  or  word-forms  more  con- 
venient, as  in 


equal,  obsequeous. 


SPEC.  1.  —  The  £/  is  used  in  the  following  words:  quiet, 
quality,  quarrel,  quarters,  quarto.  Unqualified,  unquench- 
able, request,  &c. 

SPEC.  2.  —  The  £/  is  used  for  qu  in  all  cases  except  the 
following  :  the  full  form  is  written  — 

a.  Where  the  qu  is  preceded  by  c,  as  in  acquire,  acqui- 
esce. 


72  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

b.  Where  any  vowel  precedes  the  qu  that  is  joined  more 
easily  to  the  \  than  to  the  (/ ,  as  in  equal,  equanimity. 

c.  In   some  cases,  where  the   circle  precedes  the  qu, 
especially  in  the  midst  of  the  word,  as  in  obsequious,  sequel. 

d.  Where  the  q  is  under  accent,  and  separated  from  the 
u  in  pronunciation,  as  in  equity,  requisite.    (R.  L.  Seventh, 
28,  b.) 

REM. — For  other  examples,  see  Writing  Exercise  Sixth. 

27.  The  hook  of  the  </  is  made  heavier,  thus 
C^,to  provide  a  sign  for  gua  in  such  words  as 
languid,  lingual. 

SPEC. — This  sign  is  employed  in  only  a  few  words,  such 
as  sanguine,  linguist,  languish,  with  the  words  derived 
from  them,  and  a  few  others.  (R.  L.  Seventh,  29.) 

REM.  —  The  compound  sounds  dw,  tw,  and  tJiw  are  written  with 
»  as  in  the  first  style  of  the  art. 


CONTRACTED   SIGNS    FOR   HA   AND   WHA. 


28.  a.  The  stem  of  ^  is  dropped  before  f  in 
some  words,  as  in  f  him  or  home. 

b.  The  stem  of  ^/  is  also  dropped  before  J  in 
the  words  whole  and  health,  and  their  deriva- 
tives, and  before  —  ,  ),  ),  and  ^N  in  the  words 

-       )        )     <N 

head,  heavy,  half,  hath, 
and  their  derivatives  and  compounds. 


CHAPTER    III.  73 

SPEC.  1.  —  The  stem  of  the  ^  is  dropped  before  f~  in 
the  word  home  and  its  derivatives  and  compounds,  homely, 
homebred,  &c.,  and  in  the  words  hamper,  human,  humble, 
humility,  humor,  and  their  derivatives.  (R.  L.  Seventh, 
30,  a.) 

SPEC.  2.  —  The  principal  derivatives  from  the  words 
whole,  health,  head,  and  heavy  are  wholly,  wholesome,  un- 
wholesome, wholesale,  healthful,  healthy,  healthiness; 
heady,  headless,  headstone,  heavily,  heavy-laden,  half- 
length.  (R.  L.  Seventh,  30,  b.) 


29.  a.  The  stem  of  ^  is  omitted  before  f 
and  J  in  the  word  £""",  whim,  and  its  deriva- 
tives, and  in  while  and  whelm. 

b.  The  stem  of  «/"  is  also  omitted  before  — 
in  the  word-sign  when,  and  the   <^  is   entirely 
dropped    from   the  words     *)  ,  overwhelm,  and 
lx  ,  elsewhere.  x^~ 

SPEC.  —  Connected  with  whim  are  the  words  whimsical, 
whimsically,  and  ichimper.  With  when  we  have  whence, 
whenever,  whensoever;  and  with  while,  whilst,  whelm,  and 
whelming.  (R.  L.  Seventh,  31.) 


74  THE   NOTE-TAKEK. 


WRITING    EXERCISE    SIXTH. 

Quick,  quiet,  quarrel,  quench,  quill,  quail,  quart,  query, 
quarry,  quintuple,  quadruped,  quaff,  qualify,  quality, 
quandary,  quantity,  quarto,  quartz,  querulous,  quib, 
quickness,  quiesce,  quiescence,  quietism,  quietly,  quietness, 
quietude,  quietus,  quire,  quiz,  quizzical,  quizzing,  quo  ani- 
rao,  quota,  quoth,  quotidian,  quo  warranto. 

Equal,  aqueous,  aquafortis,  equality,  equiform,  equi- 
formity,  equip,  equipage,  equipoise.  Acquire,  acquiring, 
equity,  acquiesce,  aqueduct,  obsequious. 

Lanquid,  lingual,  sanguine,  languish,  linguist.  Him,, 
homely,  hamper,  humor,  humorous,  humorously,  human, 
humble,  humility.  Whole,  wholly,  wholesome,  wholesome- 
ness,  wholesale.  Health,  healthful,  healthy,  healthfulness, 
healthiness.  Whim,  whimsical,  whimper,  whelm,  over- 
whelm, overwhelming,  elsewhere,  while,  whilst.  Heavy, 
heavier,  heavily,  half,  hath. 

Brief  Sentences  containing  some  of  the  above  Words. 

They  wil  quickly  quench  the  fires  of  discord.  They  wil 
acquire  a  quantity  of  queer  quails  quils.  With  quizical 
inquiries  and  querulous  language,  they  accepted  the  equip- 
age. They  acquiesce  obsequiously  in  the  equity  of  this 
iniquitous  mesure.  We  object  to  the  quality  not  to  the 
quantity  of  the  quarts  from  that  quarry.  In  his  linguis- 
tic harang,  he  sed  he  was  sanguin  of  succes.  His  humbl 
home  did  not  hamper  his  genius.  His  humor  is  whole- 
some, tho"1  often  whimsical.  To  him  that  hath  sJial  be 
given.  While  they  wer  assembling  an  overwhelming  force, 
the  veterans  wer  laboring  elseichere  without  a  whimper. 


CHAPTER    III.  75 

Miscellaneous. 

Knolege  dwels 

In  heds  replete  with  tho'ts  of  other  men; 
Wisdom,  in  minds  attentiv  to  their  own. 

Ask  for  what  end  the  hewnly  bodies  shine  f 
Erth  for  whose  use  ?    Man  ansers  '  Tis  for  mine  : 
For  me  kind  Nature  wakes  her  genial  power, 
Suckles  each  herb,  and  spreds  out  every  flower; 
Annual  for  me  the  grape,  the  rose,  renew, 
Thejuce  nectareus,  and  the  bamy  dew; 
For  me  helth  gushes  from  a  thousand  springs; 
For  me  the  mine  a  thousand  tresures  brings, 
Seas  roll  to  waft  me,  suns  to  light  me  rise, — 
My  foot-stool,  erth,  my  canopy,  the  skies. 

To  promote  an  unworthy  person  disgraces  humanity. 
Humility  is  that  low,  sweet  root  from  which  all  hevenly 
virtues  shoot.  He  that  aims  at  the  sun  wil  not  hit  it,  but 
his  arro  wil  fly  hiher  than  if  he  aimed  at  an  object  on  a 
level  with  himself. 


WRITING    EXERCISE    SIXTH. PART    SECOND. 

THE  STREAM  OF  LIFE — Life  bears  us  on  like  the  stream 
of  a  mihty  river.  Our  boat  at  Jirst  glides  down  the  nar- 
row channel,  throo  the  playful  murmurings  of  the  little 
brook,  and  the  windings  of  its  grassy  border.  Tlie  trees 
shed  their  blossoms  over  our  young  heds;  the  flowers  on 
the  brink  seem  to  offer  themselves  to  our  young  hands;  ice 
ar  happy  in  hope;  and  we  grasp  egerly  at  the  buties 
around  us;  but  the  stream  hurries  us  on,  and  stil  our 
hands  are  empty. 

Our  cours  in  youth  and  manhood  is  along  a  wider  and 


76  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

deeper  flood,  and  amid  objects  more  striking  and  gorgeus. 
We  ar  animated  by  the  mooving panorama  of  industry  and 
plesure  which  passes  before  us;  we  ar  excited  by  som  petty 
success,  or  deprest  and  made  miserable  by  some  equally 
petty  failure.  But  our  energy  and  our  dependence  ar 
both  in  vain.  The  stream  bears  us  on;  and  our  joys  and 
our  griefs  ar  alike  left  behind  us.  Whether  ruf  or  smooth, 
the  river  hasens  towards  its  home,  till  the  roaring  of  the 
ocean  is  in  our  ears,  and  the  tossing  of  the  waves  is  beneath 
our  keel.  The  fields  and  hils  disappear  from  before  our 
eyes;  the  floods  ar  lifted  up  around  us;  and  the  erth  looses 
sight  of  us.  We  take  our  last  leav  of  the  erth,  and  of  its 
inhabitants,  and  of  our  further  voyage  there  is  no  witnes 
but  the  Infinite  and  the  Sternal. 

CONTENTED    AT   NO   AGE   IN   LIFK. 

Laid  in  my  quiet  bed,  in  study  as  Twer, 

I  saw  within  my  trvbled  hed  a  heap  oftho'ts  appear; 

And  every  tho't  did  s7iow  so  lively  in  mine  eyes 

That  now  I  sihd,  and  then  I  smiled,  as  cause  oftho'ts  did  rise. 

I  saw  the  little  boy,  in  tho't  how  oft  that  he 

Did  wish  of  Ood  to  scape  the  rod,  a  tall  young  man  to  be. 

The  yung  man  eke,  that  feels  his  bones  with  pains  opprest, 

How  he  wud  be  a  rich  old  man,  to  liv  and  lie  at  rest. 

The  rich  old  man  that  sees  his  end  draw  on  so  sore, 

How  lie  wud  be  a  boy  agen,  to  liv  so  much  the  more. 

Wheratfutt  oft  I  smiled  to  see  Jww  all  these  three, 

From  boy  to  man,  from  man  to  boy,  wud  chop  and  clutnge  degree. 

And  musing  thus,  1  think  the  case  is  very  strange 

That  man  from  welth  to  lie  in  wo  doth  ever  seek  to  change. 

EARL  OF  SURREY,  about  1540. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

HALF-LENGTH    CHAEACTEES. 

30.  a.  In  analogy  with  the  final  syllables  of 
the  s  and  z  series,  as  given  in  the  Elements,  page 
78,  we  have  d  and  t  uniting  with  a  preceding 
consonant,  as  in  the  syllables  ant,  ent,  and,  end. 

These  syllables  are  contracted  by  writing  the 
consonant  sign  that  precedes  the  d  or  t  half  its 
usual  length,  thus  implying  the  d  or  t. 

b.  This  form  of  contraction  properly  applies 
in  all  cases  where  the  sound  of  d  or  t  unites  with 
a  preceding  consonant,  without  any  intervening 
vocal,  as  in  the  words 


act,  art,  apt,  lift. 

SPEC.  —  It  will  be  observed  that  a  silent  vowel  is  often 
written  in  the  ordinary  orthography  between  the  d  or  t 
and  the  preceding  consonant.  As  all  silent  vowels  are  dis- 
regarded in  Tachygraphy,  these  syllables  are  treated  as 
though  no  vowel  occurred,  as  in  the  words  —-/"V  lagged, 
,  received. 


31.  As  in  the  case  of  the  s  and  z  series  of  final 
compounds,  s  united  only  with  light  signs,  and 

77 


78  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

z  only  with  heavy  signs,  so  here  light  signs  only 
are  halved  to  imply  t,  and  hea.vy  signs  to  imply  d. 

SPEC.  1. — In  accordance  with  a  law  of  language  that  is 
nearly  universal,  only  sounds  that  are  similar  in  their 
degree  of  hardness  can  combine  or  blend  together.  The 

o  o 

£,  for  instance,  combines  with  the  letters  p,  k  (or  c},f,  sit, 
and  s;  and  d,  with  b,  g,  v,  zfi,  and  z;  and  since  in  Tachy- 
graphy  light  signs  represent  one  class  of  sounds,  and  heavy 
signs  another,  it  follows  in  practice  that  the  sound  of  t 
combines  only  with  light  signs,  and  the  sound  of  d  only 
^with  heavy  signs,  except  in  the  case  of  the  liquids  men- 
tioned below. 

2.  The  use  of  the  shortened  forms  will  be  understood 
from  the  following  examples,  as  given  in  Reading  Lesson 
Eighth,  34:  — 

Act,  apt,  aft,  left,  lacked,  lagged,  lift,  lived,  hushed, 
breathed,  wreathed,  wished,  ceased,  seized,  sect,  supped, 
saved,  received,  soft,  exist,  diseased,  deceased,  lathed,  las/ted. 

REM. — It  should  be  observed  that  the  verbal  ending  ed  frequently 
sounds  like  t,  and  is  added  by  halving  the  light  signs,  as  in  tho 
words  lathed,  lasJied,  and  others  given  above. 


THE   LIQUIDS. 

32.  a.  The  letters^,  ^,  J,  and  /,  though 
light,  represent  sounds  that  are  variable  in  their 
quality.  They  unite  readily  with  either  light 
or  heavy  sounds,  taking  the  s  or  2,  t  or  J,  into 


CHAPTER    IV.  9 

combination  with  them.  So  these  four  letters 
are  halved  to  represent  both  d  and  t  after  them. 
b.  When  f,  *—  ',  J,  or  /  are  halved  to 
imply  d,  the  halved  letter  is  made  heavy;  but 
when  halved  to  imply  £,  they  remain  light. 

Examples. 


—    ^  V 

aimed,  end,  willed,  card,  ant,  wilt,  cart. 

REM.  —  The  student  of  the  art  should  be  careful  to  limit  this  use 
of  the  liquids  entirely  to  the  four  letters  specified.  The  practice 
of  making  (,  /^-N,  or  )  heavy  to  imply  d  is  an  error. 


ING   AND    OTHER    LETTERS   NOT    SHORTENED. 

33.  a.  The  letter  ^  is  not  shortened.  If  it 
were  halved,  it  would  be  confounded  with  the 
shortened  ^  when  made  heavy  to  imply  d. 

1).  The  letters  •= —  «= — ,  used  according  to  the 
principles  of  the  preceding  sections,  are  not 
halved  to  imply  t  or  d,  as  it  is  easier  in  rapid 
writing  to  lengthen  than  to  shorten  horizontal 
strokes.  Hence,  such  words  as  arclied,  etched, 
edged,  judged,  &c.  are  written  in  full.  (R.  L. 
Eighth,  36.) 

c.  The  letters  —  and  —  do  not  unite  with  a 


80  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

following  d  or  t  without  an  intervening  vocal, 
and  for  this  reason  are  not  halved  to  express 
such  union. 

34.  The  shortened  forms  are  used  where  con- 
venient with  great  freedom,  but  there  are  some 
cases  in  which  they  cannot  be  used,  and  other 
cases  in  which  the  longer  form  is  more  conveni- 
ent and  distinctive.  As  these  principles  are 
important,  they  are  discussed  in  separate  sec- 
tions. 


SHORTENED      LETTERS     JOINED      WITH      FULL-SIZED 
LETTERS. 

35.  When  halved  letters  are  joined  to  full- 
sized  letters,  they  must  form  a  distinct  angle. 
Where  an  angle  cannot  be  formed,  the  letters 
must  be  written  in  full,  as  in 


dealt,  melt. 

SPEC.  —  An  angle  may  be  formed  by  means  of  a  hook, 
vocal  sign,  or  circle,  as  in  the  words  tilt,  band,  pained, 
present,  crescent.  (R.  L.  Eighth,  37.) 

36.  Where  the  diphthong  ow  precedes  nd  and 
ni  in  such  words  as  sound,  mount,  the  v_  —  and 


CHAPTER   IV.  81 

^s —  are  written  without  contraction,  and  the 
vocal  sign  is  omitted. 

Examples. 


bound,     count,         sound. 

SPEC.  1.  —  This  is  in  accordance  with  a  principle  of  the 
science  that  should  be  kept  in  remembrance,  viz.:  that  a 
diphthong  or  two  vocals  demand  the  full  form  of  the  con- 
sonant both  before  and  after  them;  but  it  should  be 
observed  that,  since  the  vowel  does  not  occur  in  these 
cases  between  the  two  characters  united,  but  only  before 
them,  the  necessity  of  using  the  full  form  of  the  consonant 
outline  is  not  imperative. 

2.  Where  the  vowel  is  written,  the  half-length  may  fol- 
low it  freely  ;  but  the  question  will  still  occur  whether  the 
full  form  with  the  vocal  sign  omitted  is  briefer  and  better 
than  the  shortened  form  with  the  vocal.  Generally,  the 
v  is  contracted  before  <*—  ',  and  the  -7  is  omitted,  as  in 
kind,  fined,  signed,  mind,  bind,  found,  mound,  bound. 
(R,  L.  Eighth,  38.) 

37.  Where  a  vowel  follows  the  d  or  t  ill  the 
end  of  a  word,  the  full  sign  is  written,  as  in 


lofty,     hasty,  hardy. 

SPEC.  1.  —  This  rule  may  be  applied  in  the  Note-Taker's 
style  also  to  the  derivatives  of  words  of  this  class,  as  lofty, 


82  THE   NOTE-TAKKIl. 

loftiness,  loftily,  haughty,  haughtier,  haughtily,  haughti- 
ness, hasty,  hastily.     (R.  L.  Eighth,  39.) 

2.  On  the  contrary,  the  derivatives  of  words  ending  in 
a  shortened  letter  generally  retain  the  shortened  letter,  as 
effect,  effective,  restrict,  restrictive,  accept,  acceptable.  (R. 
L.  Eighth,  40.) 

38.  The  half-length  principle  applies  also  to 
many  words  similar  to  those  given  in  the  pre- 
ceding section,  although  not  derived  from  words 
in  which  the  shortened  forms  occur:  such  words 
are 

^V  ^V         \^~ > —  *V 

article,  particle,  opportunity,  practical. 

SPEC.  1.  —  It  is  not  necessary  to  enumerate  the  words 
that  corne  under  this  class.  They  are  numerous  and  varied 
in  form  and  length,  but  they  all  have  a  common  resem- 
blance in  one  respect.  They  all  contain  a  t  or  d  preceded 
immediately  by  another  consonant,  with  which  it  may 
unite,  as  pract  in  the  word  practical,  art  in  article,  and 
port  in  opportunity. 

The  following  will  serve  as  additional  examples:  ordin- 
ary, pertinent,  absurdity,  rectify,  fortify,  fortitude,  sus- 
ceptible. (R.  L.  Eighth,  41.) 

REM. —  In  many  of  these  cases  the  contracted  letters  are  divided 
in  pronunciation  t-o  As  to  stand  in  contiguous  syllables,  as  in  the 
examples  just  given,  where  par-ti-cal  is  written  as  though  pro- 
nounced part-ic-al. 

2.  This  principle  is  further  extended  to  include  words 
in  which  the  d  or  t  is  separated  by  a  vowel  from  the  letter 


CHAPTER   IV.  83 

with  which  it  is  contracted,  as  in  the  words  imperative, 
narrative.  These  words  are  written  by  elision,  as  though 
pronounced  impertive,  nartive,  and  so  resemble  those  given 
in  Spec.  1.  Other  words  of  three  or  more  syllables  omit 
the  unaccented  vowel,  and  admit  of  this  form  of  contrac- 
tion, such  as  operative,  authoritative,  primative,  diminu- 
tive, equitable.  (R.  L.  Eighth,  42.) 

3.  This  principle  is  still  further  extended  to  some  words 
in  which  the  vowel  preceding  the  t  is  accented,  as  in  theo- 
retical, dramatical,  arithmetical,  critical.  (R.  L.  Eighth, 
43.) 

REM.  —  In  long  words,  the  half-length  principle  can  be  applied 
with  much  more  freedom  than  in  short  words.  It  will  not,  how- 
ever, be  necessary  for  the  writer  of  the  Note-Taker's  style  to  burden 
himself  much  with  contractions  of  this  kind.  The  principle  use  of 
these  shortened  forms  outside  of  a  few  words  of  frequent  occurrence 
is  in  cases  where  an  obtuse  angle  or  a  bad  word-form  may  be  avoided 
in  this  way,  as  in  the  words  practical,  article,  opportunity,  &c.,  given 
above. 


EST   AND    STE    CONTRASTED. 

39.  The  diphthong  st  in  the  end  of  syllables 
comes  under  two  modes  of  contraction,  and  may 
be  written  either  with  °—  or  ~. 

a.  The  Q—  is  used  generally  in  cases  where 
the  circle  would  be  used  if  not  followed  by  t, 
as,  for  instance,  the  circle  is  used  in  muss,  less, 
and  class,  so,  the  o_  is  used  in  the  analogous 
words  must,  lest,  and  classed.  But  where  the 


84  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

x— s  is  employed  in  the  primative  word,  the 
added  t  is  indicated  by  making  the  ^  half- 
length,  as  in  cross,  crossed,  trace,  traced.  (R.  L. 
Fourteenth,  106,  a.) 

b.  So,  also,  where  the  st  is  preceded  by  any 
full  vowel  or  diphthong  that  would  require  an 
^,  in  accordance  with  the  rules  for  the  circle, 
the  ~  is  employed,  as  in 

L    ^ 

post,  coast. 

40.  As  the  est  is  contrasted  with  ste  so  <r^ 
(sesf)  is  sometimes  written  where  sus-te  would 
be  an  equally  natural  character. 

a.  The  sest  is  preferred  in  the  words 

<T*  a~^  a-**  <K 

systeni,  exist,  subsist,  possest, 

and  some  other  words. 

b.  The  sus-te  is  used  in  sustain,  exhaust,  incest, 
and  some  other  words. 

SPEC.  1. — The  principal  derivatives  from  the  words  sys- 
tem, exist,  &c.  are  systemize,  systematic,  unsystematic, 
existing,  existence,  existent,  subsisting,  &c.,  which  are  writ- 
ten by  adding  the  terminations  to  the  forms  given  above. 

2.  The  letters  s-st  may  also  be  written  , — ^..    This  form 


CHAPTER    IV.  85 

will  occnr  in  the  words  sowest,  seest,  sawest,  and  wherever 
the  s's  are  separated  by  a  diphthong  or  two  vowel  sounds. 

3.  The  forms  /"~3 —  and  ^——-^- •  will  be  understood 

from,  the  explanations  given  in  Chapter  II,  as  they  come 
under  the  principles  given  for  the  use  of  the  circle. 


EXCEPTIONAL   FORMS. 

41.  a.  The  use  of  the  half-length  principle  is 
extended  in  the  EASY-REPORTING  style  to  cases 
where  a  vowel  occurs  between  the  d  and  t  and 
the  preceding  consonant,  as  in  might,  night. 
A  few  words  of  frequent  occurrence  may  be  so 
contracted  in  this  style.  We  instance  the  fol- 
lowing: might,  right,  not,  what,  quite.  (R.  L. 
Eighth,  44,  a.) 

b.  To  these  may  be  added  the  following  ex- 
ceptional contractions,  which  imply  a  d  by  halv- 
ing a  light  character,  or  vice  versa,  contrary  to 
the  general  rule:   could,  would,  should,  had,  but, 
that,  great.     (R.  L.  Eighth,  44,  b.) 

SPEC.  —  This  list  of  exceptions  should  not  be  extended 
in  case  of  short  words.  The  rule  which  requires  that  t  be 
implied  only  by  shortening  light  signs,  and  d  by  shortening 
heavy  signs,  should  be  steadily  kept  in  view. 

c.  Another  class  of  exceptional  forms  consists 


86  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

of  words  in  which  the  compound  signs  of  the  L 
or  K  series,  used  irregularly  (see  Chapter  III), 
are  shortened  to  imply  a  t  or  d,  as  in  the  words 
?  short,  ^  called. 

SPEC.— The  words  so  contracted  are  short,  shorten,  and 
derivatives,  short-hand,  culture,  cultivate,  and  derivatives. 
(R.  L.  Eighth,  45.) 


CHAPTER   IV.  87 


WRITING    EXERCISE   SEVENTH. 

Apt,  act,  aft,  rift,  sift,  sicift.  Tacked,  lacked,  lapped, 
picked,  hushed,  lagged,  lived.  Ant,  end,  cant,  tend,  wilt, 
willed,  tilt,  tilled,  rent,  rend,  cart,  card,  tempt,  hemmed. 
Except,  expect,  extinct,  left,  bereft,  reflect,  fact,  distant, 
innocent,  dependent,  student,  malignant,  regained,  hand. 
Lost,  traced,  post,  toast,  least,  lowest,  crossed.  Sand, 
sand,  sinned,  bard,  hard,  feared,  soared,  roamed,  stemmed, 
mild,  build,  chilled,  drilled,  scanned,  brand,  grand. 

Use  the  full  forms  In  the  following  Words. 

Arched,  scorched,  gaged,  edged,  etched,  murdered. 

Found,  pound,  round,  fount,  hasty,  mighty,  plenty, 
lofty. 

Bend,  spent,  melt,  dealt,  cold,  mold,  sold.  JZent,  reck- 
oned, second. 

Contract  V  in  the  following  Words. 

Find,  signed,  resigned,  declined,  kind,  bind,  mind,  de- 
signed, refined. 

GOLD. 

Many  hunted,  swet,  and  bled  for  gold, 
Wnikt  all  iht  niht,  and  labor d  all  Hie  day. 
And  what  was  this  allurement,  dost  thou  ask? 
A  dust  dug  from  the  bowels  of  the  erth, 
Which,  being  cast  into  the  fire,  came  out 
A  shining  thing  that  fools  admired,  and  cattd 
A  god;  and  in  detout  and  humble  pliht 
Before  it  neeld,  —  the  greater  to  the  Us; 
And  on  its  altar  sacrif  zed  ease,  peace, 
Truth,  faith,  integrity,  good  condence,  frcnds, 
Love,  charity,  benevolence,  and  all 


88  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

The  sweet  and  tender  sympathies  of  life: 

And,  to  complete  the  horrid  murderus  rite, 

And  signalize  their  folly,  offered  up 

Their  souls,  and  an  eternity  of  Ww, — 

To  gain  them  what? — an  hour  of  dreaming  joy. 

A  feverish  hour  that  hasted  to  be  done, 

And  ended  in  the  bitternet  of  wo. 

ANECDOTE. —  One  day,  when  the  Moon  was  under  an 
eclipse,  she  complained  thus  to  the  Sun  for  the  discontinu- 
ance of  his  favor.  "My  dearest  friend,"  said  she,  "tchy 
do  you  not  shine  upon  me  as  you  used  to  do  f  "  "Do  1 
not  shine  upon  thee  f  "  said  the  Sun.  "I  am  very  sure  I 
intend  to."  "OA,  no,"  replied  the  Moon;  "but  now  I  see 
the  reason;  that  dirty  planet,  the  Earthy  has  got  between 
us" 

WORKING  A  PASSAGE. — An  Irishman  having  applied 
to  work  his  passage  on  a  canal-boat,  and  being  employed 
to  lead  the  horses  on  the  tow-path,  on  arriving  at  the  end 
of  his  journey,  declard  he  wud  sooner  go  on  foot  than 
work  his  passage  in  Amerika. 

Who  friendship  with  a  knave  has  made 
Is  judged  a  partner  in  the  trade  : 
'Tis  thus  that  on  the  choice  offrendt 
Our  good  or  evS  name  depends. 


WRITING   EXERCISE   EIGHTH. 

Must,  most,  mist,  mast,  mused,  amazed,  amused.  Lest, 
lost,  lust,  lowest,  least,  laced.  Rest,  rust,  roast,  roused. 
Zest,  tast,  tacit,  toast,  tyest,  tossed.  Crossed,  crest,  crust, 
creased.  Coast,  kissed,  cast,  cost.  Guest,  ghost,  gust. 
Trust,  tryst,  traced,  truest,  tryest. 


CHAPTER     IV.  89 

Might,  right,  not,  what,  had,  would,  should,  could,  but, 
that. 

Subordinate,  importunity,  opportunity,  article,  particle, 
practical.  Effective,  elective,  ordinary,  operative,  authori- 
tative, primitive,  theoretical,  dramatical,  arithmetical. 
Eclectic,  attractive,  distracting,  restrictive,  destructive, 
critical,  political. 

Short,  shorten,  shorter,  called,  cultivate,  uncultivated, 
culture,  agriculture,  horticulture. 

System,  systemize,  systematic,  unsystematic,  subsisting, 
existing,  existent,  nonexistent.  Exhausted,  exhaustive, 
existences. 

A  cloud  lay  cradled  near  the  setting  sun : 
A  gleam  of  crimson  tinged  its  braided  sno. 
Long  had  I  watcht  the  glory  mooting  on 
O'er  the  sttt  radius  of  the  lake  belo. 
Tranquil  its  spirit  seemd,  and  floated  do: 
E'en  in  its  very  motion  there  was  rest, 
While  every  breth  of  eve  that  chanst  to  No 
Wafted  the  traveler  to  the  buteus  west. 
Emblem,  metho't  of  the  departed  soul. 
To  hooz  white  robe  the  glea~n  of  bliss  is  given, 
And  by  the  breth  of  mercy  made  to  roll 
Riht  onward  to  the  golden  gates  of  heaven, 
Where,  to  the  eye  of  faith,  it  peacful  liez, 
And  telz  to  man  his  glorius  destiniz. 

OSSIAN'S  ADDRESS  TO  THE  MOON.  —  Dauter  of  Ueven, 
fair  art  thoid  The  silens  of  thy  face  iz  plesant!  Thou 
comest  forth  in  lovlines.  The  stars  attend  thy  blu  cours  in 
the  east.  The  clouds  rejois  in  thy  presens,  O  Moon! 
Tliey  brighten  their  dark-brown  sides.  Who  is  like,  to  thee 
in,  the  hevens,  liht  of  the  silent  nihtf  The  stars  in  thy 
presens  turn  away  their  sparkling  eyes.  Whither  dost 


90  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

thou  retire  from  thy  cours  when  the  darknes  of  thy  coun- 
tenans  groezf  Hast  thou  thy  hall  like  Ossianf  Dwelest 
thou  in  the  shado  of  grief  f  JETav  thy  sisters  fallen  from 
Seven?  Ar  they  who  rejoice  with  thee  at  niht  no  more? 
Yes,  they  hav  fallen,  fair  liht,  and  thou  dost  often  retire 
to  mourn,  Hut  thou  thyself  shall  fail  one  niht,  and  leav 
thy  bin  path  in  Seven. 

Where  wast  thou  when  I  laid  the  foundations  of  the 
erth  f  Or  who  laid  the  corner-stone  thereof  when  the 
morning  stars  sang  together,  and  all  the  sons  of  God 
shouted  for  joy  ?  Sast  thou  commanded  the  morning 
since  thy  dayz,  and  causd  the  day-spring  to  know  his  place, 
that  it  miht  take  hold  of  the  ends  of  the  erth,  that  the 
wicked  miht  be  shaken  out  of  it  f  Sast  thou  perceivd  tJie 
bredth  of  the  erth  ?  Declare  if  thou  knowest  it  all!  Where 
is  the  way  where  liht  dwelleth?  and  as  for  darkness, 
where  is  the  place  thereof,  that  thou  shouldxt  take  it  to  the 
bound  thereof,  and  that  thou  shouldst  kno  the  paths  to  the 
house  thereof?  Shoest  thou  it  because  thou  wast  then 
born  ?  or  because  the  number  of  thy  days  is  great? — JOB. 


CHAPTER  V. 

LENGTHENED    CUEVES. 

42.  The  consonant  curves  are  made  twice  their 
usual  length  to  imply  the  addition  of  tr  or  dr  to 
their  own  proper  sounds.  This  contraction 
applies  properly,  in  the  first  instance,  to  cases 
in  which  tr  follows  the  lengthened  letter,  with- 
out an  intervening  vowel,  as  in  the  words 


after,  enter,  filter. 

SPEC. — As  the  letters  ),  (,  x— \,  "^  do  not  unite  with  a 
following  dr  in  this  manner,  this  principle  is  not  applied  to 
them  in  its  first  use,  but  nearly  all  the  light  curves  furnish 
examples,  as  in  the  following  words:  laughter,  rafter,  dis- 
aster, boaster,  foster,  tempter  (temter},  winter,  banter, falter. 
(R.  L.  Ninth,  47.) 

43.  The  doubled  curves  are  farther  used  when 
a  vowel  intervenes  between  the  lengthened  let- 
ter and  the  added  tr  or  dr,  as  in  the  words  / 
letter,  f  latter. 

SPEC.  1. —  This  principle  also  applies  in  practice  only  to 
the  light  curves. 

91 


02  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

Ex. — Fetter,  fitter,  shutter,  shatter,  litter,  loiter,  lighter, 
meter,  matter,  mutter.  (R.  L.  Ninth,  48.) 

2.  The  curves  *)  and  _^?,  and  the  light  curves  of  the 
S-series  initial,  are  doubled  in  the  same  manner  as  the 
simple  letters. 

Ex.  —  Fretter,  fritter,  flatter,  flutter,  slaughter,  center, 
shelter.  (R.  L.  Ninth,  49.) 

44.  The  liquid  curves  - —  and  J,  when  doubled 
to  imply  dr,  are  made  heavy,  as    \ ^  under, 

J  elder. 

SPEC.  1. — The  following  words  will  serve  as  illustrations 
of  the  use  of  these  letters:  sunder,  understand,  under- 
ground, wonder,  thunder,  kinder,  reminder,  wilder,  wilder- 
ness, bewilder.  (R.  L.  Ninth,  50.) 

2.  The  letters  f~  and  '•»-»'  are  not  doubled  to  imply  dr. 

HEM.  —  Tt  will  be  observed  that  the  dr  and  tr.  when  implied  by 
the  double-length  curves,  have  no  vowel  between  the  d  and  r,  or 
the  t  and  r,  but  are  pronounced  as  in  the  final  syllables  of  enter, 
fetter,  and  under.  It  would  not  do,  for  instance,  to  use  the  double- 
length  in  entire,  much  less  in  Ontario.  So,  also,  the  word  lottery, 
having  a  vowel  after  the  r,  is  excluded  from  this  class  of  contracts ; 
but  when  another  consonant  is  added,  as  in  lateral,  the  principle 
will  apply  once  more.  (See  also  45,  c.) 

45.  a.  The  doubled  curves   may  be  vocalized 
in  the  same  manner  as  the  simple  letters,  but  the 
connected  vocals,  if  final,    are   read  before  the 
added  letters,  as  in  the  word  latter,  given  in  sec- 
tion 42. 

b.  When  the  circle  is  added  to  a  lengthened 


CHAPTER    V.  93 

curve,  however,  it  is  read  last  of  all,  as  in      J 
letters,  ^^  matters. 

c.  Other  letters  may  follow  the  lengthened 
curve,  as  in  the  words  latterly,  literal,  elderly, 
flatterer,  flattering,  wondering.  (R.  L.  Ninth,  51.) 


DR   AND    TR   FOLLOWED    BY   A   VOWEL. 

46.  When  a  vowel  follows  the  dr  and  tr,  as  in 
the  words  entry,  sundry,  &c.,  the  compounds  of 
the  R  series  are  employed,  as  in  the  common 
style.     This  forms  a  convenient  distinction  be- 
tween the  forms  of  such  words  as  enter  and  entry, 
winter   and    ivintry,  sunder   and   sundry,   and 
others.     (R.  L.  Ninth,  52.     See  also  44,  Rem.) 

47.  Since  many  of  the  words  which  imply  the 
tr  and  dr  are  such  as  might  with  propriety  imply 
the  t  and  d  by  means  of  the  half-length  charac- 
ters, there  is  sometimes  a  conflict  in  the  use  of 
these  two  modes  of  contraction.     Thus  the  forms 
/J  rend-er  and  ^^ — "  render  are  equally  cor- 
rect.    The  first  form,  however,  is  appropiate  to 
the  noun  render  (one  who  rends),  as  derived 
from  x"" '  rend,  and  the  second  form  to  the  verb 
render. 


94  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

SPEC.  1.  —  It  will  not  be  necessary  to  enter  minutely  into 
distinctions  of  this  kind.  As  a  general  rule,  the  double- 
length  form  will  take  the  precedence  of  the  half-length 
Avith  the  added  r,  on  account  of  its  greater  brevity,  where 
the  use  of  either  form  is  admissible. 

2.  The  half-length  takes  the  precedence  of  the  double- 
length  principle  erf  contraction  :  — 

a.  In  derivative  words  in  which  er  is  added  to  a  word- 
form  which  ends  in  a  halved  letter,  as  in  the  case  ofrend-er, 
given  above.      Other  examples  are  soft,  softer;   round, 
rounder;  haunt,  haunter. 

b.  So,  also,  in  some  cases  where  the  preceding  nd  is 
uncontracted,  as  in  round,  rounder.     (R.  L.  Ninth,  53.) 

3.  The  choice  between  these  modes  of  contraction  gives 
opportunity  for  distinction  of  words,  as  <^  ---  "  hunter, 

haunter.     But,  on  the  other  hand,  we  write 


1  __ 


bind,  binder,  bindery,  found,   founder,  foundry. 

4.  The  st  "in  counter  is  contracted,  thus  V^_^.  This 
form  is  retained  in  encounter,  and  all  derivatives  and  com- 
pounds, such  as  countersign,  counter-work,  &c.  (R.  L. 
Ninth,  54.) 


THE    SHORTENED    x~x    AND    THE    CIRCLE. 

48.  The  trigraph  str  is  written  in  several  ways, 
some  of  which  have  been  explained  in  Chapter 
II.  These  letters  come  under  the  lengthening 


CHAPTEE   V.  95 

principle  only  where  preceded  by  a  vowel,  and 
when  no  vowel  follows  them.  Where  either  the 
st  or  tr  form  an  initial  compound,  the  signs  of 
the  s  or  r  series  of  compounds  must  be  used. 

Where  the  st  forms  a  final  compound,  four 
constructions  are  possible:  a  °~j,  b  a—,  c  -~  ', 
rf'^X. 

a.  The  use  of  the  circle  is  restricted  here  in 
accordance  with  the  principles  taught  in  Chap- 
ter II,  sections  9  to  13.     As  we  use  the  circle  in 
pest,  so  we  use  it  in  pester  and  fester;  so,  also, 
in  lustre,  bluster,  &c.     ('R.  L.  Ninth,  55,  a.) 

b.  The  o—  is  used  in  muster,  duster,  jester,  set- 
ter, but  the is  used  in  suitor.      (R.  L. 

Ninth,  55,  I.) 

c.  Where  r  is  added  to  a  word  in  which  the 
•—  is   used,  <• — -^  is  substituted  for  it.      As  we 
write  post   {^,  coast  ^^,   so  we  write 
poster,  ^^ — ^  coaster.      The  use  of  the 

will  be  determined  by  nearly  the  same  consid- 
erations as  are  mentioned  in  Chapter  IV,  section 
40,  in  regard  to  the  ^-^. 

SPEC. — Ester  s~~^  is  used  in  such  words  as  sister, 
cloister,  blister,  foster,  Zoroaster,  Lancaster,  moister.  (R. 
L.  Ninth,  55,  c.) 

d.  The  form  _X   is  seldom  used. 


96  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 


ANGLES    WITH    LENGTHENED    CURVES. 

49.  Lengthened  curves  cannot  unite  with  other 
consonants  without  an  angle.  This  is  in  accord- 
ance with  a  principle  everywhere  observed. 
When  two  consonant  letters  unite  without  an 
angle,  they  are  understood  to  be  of  the  same 
length. 

SPEC.  1. — The  reason  of  this  rule  will  be  easily  under- 
stood. The  length  of  a  letter  cannot  be  determined  unless 
its  commencement  and  end  are  known. 

2.  The  intervention  of  a  vocal  sign,  or  hook,  or  circle  is 
sufficient  to  separate  letters  of  different  lengths.  Some 
examples  of  this  kind  have  already  been  given,  as  kinder, 
binder  (so,  also,  the  half-length",  bind  and  kind),  banter, 
counter  (and  count),  disaster,  Zoroaster.  (R.  L.  Ninth, 
47,  50,  54,  and  55.) 


EN   AND    ING   TREBLED. 

50.  The  letter  > —  is  made  three  times  its  usual 
length  to  imply  the  sounds  of  thr  in  the  words 

^- ^    another,    ^~, --  neither.      This   sign 

should  be  made  light  throughout,  and  will  thus 
be  distinguished  from  the  forms  given  in  the 
next  section. 


CHAPTER    V.  97 

SPEC.  1. — This  principle,  merely  introduced  in  this  style, 
is  extended  in  the  reporting  style  to  some  other  curves, 
and  forms  a  convenient  way  of  writing  many  phrases  end- 
ing with  the  words  there  and  their.  (See  Chapter  IX, 
98.) 

2.  The  trebled  N— ^  may  also  be  used  in  the  word 
'  1^/^ —  anthropology,  and  its  derivatives. 

51.  The  letter  ^^  may  be  made  three  times 
its  usual  length,  to  imply  the  addition  of  gr,  m 
the  words 


longer,        linger,      anger. 

SPEC.  1.  —  This  character  should  be  made  fully  three 
times  the  length  of  N^,  to  distinguish  it  clearly  from  the 
double-length  -» ,  implying  ndr. 

2.  This  principle  may  be  applied  to  a  few  other  words, 
such  vs  finger,  stronger,  hunger.  (R.  L.  Ninth,  56.) 

The  full  form  must  be  used  where  a  vowel  follows  the 
gr,  as  in  the  words  l/>*-J\  angry,  c. — ><— 'N,  hungry. 


98  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 


WRITING   EXERCISE   NINTH. 

After,  rafter,  laughter,  alter,  falter,  filter,  Easter.  Elder, 
-wilder,  wilderness,  under,  render,  tender,  ponder,  under- 
standing. Enter,  entertain,  intersperse.  Counter,  encounter. 
Alexander.  Matter,  mutter,  letter,  latter,  fetter,  shatter,  dia- 
meter, flutter,  fritter,  splendor. 

Winter,  wintry,  enter,  entry,  sunder,  sundry,  meander, 
Ly  sander.  Rend-er,  render,  defender.  Lottery  ^literary. 
Fester,  pester,  master,  luster,  illiterate.  Sister,  disaster, 
boaster,  jester,  haunter,  hunter,  binder,  bindery,  founder, 
foundry.  Neither,  another,  anger,  linger,  longer,  finger. 
Angry,  hunger,  hungry,  stronger.  Anthropology,  anthro- 
pological, misanthropy,  anthropomorphic,  anthropoid. 

Ask  mother  erth  why  oaks  wer  made 

Taller  and  stronger  than  the  weeds  they  shade. 

The  'excentric1  man  is  generally  the  pioneer  of  man- 
kind, cutting  his  way  the  first  into  gloomy  depths  of  unex- 
plored sience,  overcoming  difficulties  that  wud  check  meaner 
spirits,  and  then  holding  up  the  liht  of  his  knolege  to 
guide  thousands  who,  but  for  him,  wud  be  wandering  about 
in  all  the  uncertainty  of  ignorance,  or  be  held  in  the  fetters 
of  some  selfish  policy  which  they  had  not  of  themselves  the 
ability  to  thro  off. 

Everything  in  the  universe,  both  of  mind  and  matter, 
exists  in  reference  to  certain  fixt  principles,  which  are  calld 
laws  of  order,  orig mating  in  the  great  First  Cause,  and 
thence  emanating  thro'out  all  creation. 

The  grand  degrees  of  all  existences  ar  what  is  natural, 
human,  Divine.  The  three  grand  divisions  of  all  natural 


B.  0.  BAr^ER 
LAWY 


00 

CHAPTER  V.  99 

things  ar  erths,  waters,  and  atmospheres.  The  three  king- 
doms of  nature  ar  the  mineral,  the  vegetable,  and  the  ani- 
mal. The  three  divisions  of  the  animal  kingdom  are 
into  those  that  creep  and  walk  on  the  erth,  those  that  swim, 
and  those  that  fly.  Each  of  these  divisions  is  divided  in- 
to trines,  according  to  which  all  things  exist  and  subsist. 

ANECDOTE.  —  "How  do  you  know,"  said  a  traveler  to  a 
poor,  wandering  Arab  of  the  desert,  '•''that  there  is  a 
God?"  "In  the  same  manner,"  he  replied,  '•'•that  I  trace 
the  footsteps  of  an  animal,  —  by  the  prints  it  leavs  upon 
the  sand." 

HI  fares  the  land,  to  hasening  ills  a  prey, 
Where  welth  accumulates  and  men  decay. 

Princes  or  lords  may  flurisJi  or  may  fade: 

A  breth  can  make  them,  and  a  breth  has  made; 

But  a  bold  pesantry,  their  country's  pride, 
When  once  destroyed,  can  never  be  supplied. 

WRITING    EXERCISE   TENTH. 

Tfie.  favorit  idea  of  a  genius  among  us  is  of  one  icho 
never  studies,  or  who  studies  nobody  can  tel  when,  —  at 
midniht,  or  at  od  times  and  intervals,  —  and  now  and 
then  strikes  out,  at  a  heat,  as  the  phrase  is,  som  wonderful 
production.  This  is  a  character  that  has  figured  largely 
in  the  history  of  our  literature,  in  the  persons  of  our 
Fieldings,  our  Savages,  and  our  Steeles,  —  loos  felloes 
about  town,  or  loungers  in  the  country,  who  slept  in  ale- 
houses, and  wrote  in  bar-rooms,  —  who  took  up  the  pen  as 
a  magician?s  wand  to  supply  their  wants,  and  when  the 
presure  of  necessity  was  releced,  resorted  again  to  their 
carousals. 


100  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 


the  truth  is,  as  I  shal  take  the  liberty  to  state  it, 
that  genius  wil  study:  it  is  that  in  the  mind  which  wll 
study.  Study,  says  Cicero,  is  the  voluntary  and  vigorus 
application  of  the  mind  to  any  subject.  Such  study,  such 
intense  mental  action,  and  nothing  else,  is  genius.  V>r/iat 
tho  the  m.iht  of  genius  appears  in  one  decisiv  bio,  struc  in 
som  moment  of  hi  debate,  or  at  the  crisis  of  a  nations 
peril?  That  mihty  energy,  tho  it  may  hav  heavd  in  the 
brest  of  a  Demosthenes,  was  once  a  feebl  infant's  tho't. 
A  mother's  eye  watchd  over  its  dawning-  a  father's  care 
yarded  its  erly  groth.  It  soon  trod  with  youthful  steps 
the  halls  of  learning,  and  found  other  fathers  to  wake  and 
to  watch  for  it,  —  even  as  it  finds  them  here.  It  went  on; 
but  silence  was  upon  its  path;  and  the  deep  struglings  of 
the  inward  soul  markt  its  pr  ogres,  and  the  cherishing 
powers  of  nature  silently  minister  to  it.  Tlie  elements 
around  breathed  upon  it,  and  ltucht  it  to  finer  issues? 
The  golden  ray  of  heven  fel  upon  it,  and  ripend  its  ex- 
panding faculties.  The  slo  revolutions  of  years  sloly 
aded  to  its  collected  tresures  and  energies,  til,  in  its  hour 
of  glory,  it  stood  forth  embodid  in  the  form  of  living, 
commanding,  irresistible  eloquence.  The  world  wonders 
at  the  manifestation,  and  says  '  strange,  strange,  that  it 
shud  com  thus  unso't,  unpremeditated,  unprepared.'  Hut 
the  truth  is  ther  is  no  more  miracl  in  it  than  ther  is  in  the 
towering  of  the  eminent  forest  tree,  or  in  the  fioing  of  the 
mihty  and  irresistible  river,  or  in  the  welth  and  the  wav- 
ing of  the  boundles  harvest.  —  OKVILLE  DEWEY. 


CHAPTER  VI 

PREFIXES. 

52.  The  preceding  principles  of  contraction 
apply  largely  to  all  classes  of  words,  and  to  all 
parts  of  words.      In  plain   and  simple  Saxon 
speech,  they  will  give  great  power  to  the  writer. 
But  we  have  a  large  class  of  words  in  the  lan- 
guage that  are  longer,  and  composed  of  distinct 
parts, —  a  root  or  primitive  form,  with  numerous 
derivatives,  formed  by  the  addition  of  prefixes 
or  affixes.     Thus,  from  the  root  form  we  have 
the  derivatives  inform,  deform,  reform,  misform, 
misinform,  formed,  forming,  former,  formal, 
formalist,  formation,  information,  reformation, 
&c.,  to  the  number  of  nearly  a  hundred  in  all. 
(R.  L.  Tenth,  58.) 

53.  Now  it  is  not  necessary  to  contract  many 
of  the  particles  used  as  prefixes  and  affixes,  as 
many  of  them  are  sufficiently  brief  when  written 
by  the  principles  already  given.      Yet,  some  of 
them  occur  with  greater  frequency,  and  it  has 
been  found  to  be  convenient  to  furnish  them 
with  briefer  special  signs. 

101 


102  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

a.  They  may  be  divided  into  two  general 
classes.  The  first  class  is  prefixed  to  the  main 
body  of  the  word,  and  are  called  prefixes  or 
prefix  signs.  The  second  class  forms  endings  of 
words,  and  are  called  affixes,  or  affix  signs. 


SIMPLE   PREFIX    SIGNS. 

54.   Prefix   signs   are  either  simple   or  com- 
pound.  The  simple  prefixes  are  the  following :  — 


vicon,          / 

^~>  magm, 

<^  witbj 

'-(corn, 
x»  contra,     ^ 

•^   magna, 

2  —  intro, 

r«  Jim, 

/    selfj 

c  —  »  trans. 

CON    AND    COM. 

55.  The  prefixes  con  and  com  are  represented 
by  the  same  signs. 

SPEC. — The  use  of  the  same  sign  for  con  and  com  can- 
not produce  confusion,  since  these  prefixes  are  mere  varia- 
tions of  the  same  prefix,  and  never  conflict  in  actual  use. 
To  illustrate, — we  have  the  word  comprise,  but  we  cannot 
have  the  word  comprise,  because  the  letter  n  never  pre- 
cedes the  letter  p.  So  we  have  the  word  continue,  but  we 


CHAPTER    VI.  103 

cannot  have  such  a  word  as  continue,  because  the  letter 
m  cannot  precede  the  letter  t.  So,  in  all  cases  where  con 
occurs,  com  cannot  be  used,  and  vice  versa. 

56.  We  have  two  signs  for  these  prefixes,  — 
the  first;  a  light  stroke  in  the  'direction  of  \,  and 
one-third  the  length  of  this  letter;  the  second, 
a  stroke  of  the  same  length  in  the  direction  of 
the  /.  They  are  joined  in  the  outline,  as  will 
be  seen  in  the  following  examples:  — 

O     <*-       v-       ^        \       I 

console,  concede,  consider,  conduce,  compress,  comply. 

SPEC.  1.  a.  —  The  sign  \  is  used  for  con  and  com  in  the 
following  words,  and  in  many  others  given  in  Writing 
Exercise  11:  comprise,  compress,  comprehend,  complain, 
conclude,  conglomerate,  construct.  (R.  L.  Tenth,  59.) 

b.  The  sign  \  is  used  for  con  and  com  in  all  words  in 
which  these  prefixes  are  followed  by 


11  fj 

' 


and  some  other  characters. 

c.  Use  v  also  for  con  and  com  in  the  following  words:  — 

f  ? 

\>»/  ^T  —  v  __  '  \^  *  ^^_  s 

command,  commit,  commission,  commissioner,  commander. 


104  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

2.  The  second  form,  /,  struck  downward,  is  used  for  con 
and  com  in  the  following  words:  connect,  concur,  concave, 
conduce,  condense,  continue,  confess,  converge,  convex,  con- 
ceive, consult  (R.  L.  Tenth,  60),  and  in  all  words  in  which 
these  prefixes  are  followed  by  \   -__  )  \     °)     )• 

3.  This  sign  is  struck  upward  in  the  following  words:  — 


common,  commingle,  concede,  constitute,  commend,  communion, 

and  in  all  words  in  which  con  or  com  are  followed  by 
s — "   s — -    *^_^>    ~        o ,  such  as  commonplace,  com- 
municate, commendable,  constitute,  commentator. 

4.  The  following  words  are  exceptional :  -^ •*•  con- 
comitant, v — t___^  uncommon,  ^ "  ^  intercommuni- 
cate. 

REM.  1. — It  should  be  observed  — 

a.  That  the  sign  is  used  for  con  and  com  in  all  cases  in  which 
it  can  conveniently  be  used,  so  that  this  form  always  takes  the 
precedence  when  it  can  be  employed. 

b.  That  the  second  form,  /,  is  struck  downward  whenever  it  can 
be  joined  easily  in  this  direction,  and  that  the  downward  form  is 
preferred  to  the  upward. 

c.  That  the  upward  form  is  used  for  convenience,  and  only  in  a 
few  words. 

REM.  2.  —  The  prefixes  con  and  com  are  of  greater  use  than 
all  the  other  prefixes  given  in  the  table,  since  they  are  used  in 
thousands  of  words,  many  of  which  are  of  frequent  occurrence. 
They  also  occur  connected  with  other  prefixes,  and  form  the  basis 
of  nearly  all  the  compound  prefixes  which  are  treated  of  in  the  end 
of  this  chapter. 


CHAPTER    VI.  105 


COX    AND    COM    RADICAL. 

57.  In  some  words  con  and  com  form  the  root, 
or  part  of  the  root,  of  the  word,  as  in  the  words 
conical  from  cone,  and  comical  from  the  Latin 
comicus,  allied  to  the  Greek  komos.  Such  words 
should  be  written  in  full. 

SPEC.  — Words  in  which  con  and  com  are  radical  gener- 
ally contain  a  single  n  or  ra  followed  by  a  vowel.  The  fol- 
lowing are  the  principal  words  of  this  class.  Coma,  comb, 
come,  comet,  comic,  comity.  Con  (to  fix  in  the  mind): 
conch,  cone,  Congo,  cony,  and  their  derivatives.  (R.  L. 
Tenth,  62.) 

RESI. — Words  in  which  com  is  followed  by  a  root  commencing  in 
m  in  most  cases  drop  the  m  of  the  root.  Thus  com-ence,  corn-union, 
com-ute,  for  commence,  communion,  commute.  The  word  comity  is 
written  in  full,  while  the  word  committee  loses  both  ra's. 

REM.  2.  —  The  word  connect  and  its  derivatives  lose  both  n's  in 
the  same  manner,  but  connive,  connatural,  and  other  words  in  which 
con  is  followed  by  n  in  the  root,  retain  the  second  n. 


106  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

WRITING    EXERCISE    ELEVENTH. 
In  the  following  "Words,  use  the  sign  \  for  Con  and  Com. 

Comprise,  compress,  comprehend,  complain,  conclude, 
conglomerate,  construct  (R.  L.  Tenth,  59),  contribute,  con- 
tract, consecrate,  consider,  conspicuous,  consecutive,  con- 
sequential, consult,  concert,  consummate,  consist.  Com- 
bine, compose,  conscious,  conjure  (zhr),  contrive,  control, 
console,  concise,  concision,  concession,  noncommital,  com- 
mercial, conquest,  conclave,  concrete,  congress,  confront, 
converse,  command,  commanding,  commander,  commit, 
committee,  commission,  commissioner. 

In  the  following  Words,  use  the  /,  written  downwards. 

Connecting,  concurring,  concord,  concave,  concavity, 
conducing,  condensing,  condign,  condemn,  contain,  con- 
taminate, continue,  converge,  converse',  conversing,  con- 
vince, convene,  confine,  confide,  confound,  confessing,  con- 
fidant, convex,  convict,  conceive,  conciliate,  consult,  con- 
sulting. 

Use  the  /  npward  in  the  following  Words. 

Common,  commonplace,  common  sense,  community, 
communicate,  commend,  commendatory,  commending, 
commendable,  commingle,  concede,  conceding,  constitute, 
constituted,  constituent,  constabulary. 

Miscellaneous. 

Concomitant,  uncommon,  commodore,  comfort,  con- 
quer, conquerer,  unconquered,  unconquerable,  commemo- 
rate, commensurate,  comment,  commodious,  commodity, 
community,  compact,  compreJiensive,  commute,  compute, 
comparative,  comparatively,  compatible,  compatibly,  com- 
patriot, compound,  compensate,  competent,  compliance, 


CHAPTER   VI.  107 

component,  comport,  compressible,  compromise,  compel, 
compulsive,  comrade.  Conceal,  concentrative,  concessive, 
conclave,  conclusive,  concord,  concrete,  concupiscence,  con- 
current, confessor,  confirm,  conform,  conservative,  consid- 
erable, consociate,  consistent,  consolatory. 

Every  evil  that  we  conquer  is  a  benefactor.  The  Sand- 
wich Ilander  believd  that  the  strength  and  valor  of  the 
enemy  he  killd  passd  into  himself.  Spiritually  it  is  so 
with  us,  for  we  gain  strength  from  every  temptation  we 
succesfully  resist.  In  matters  of  great  concern,  and  which 
must  be  done,  ther  is  no  surer  evidence  of  a  weak  mind 
than  irresolution.  To  be  always  intending  to  liv  a  new 
life,  and  never  to  set  about  it,  this  is  the  folly  of  follies. 

BUTT. —  The  hih  and  divine  buty  which  can  be  lovd 
without  effeminacy  is  that  ichich  is  found  in  combination 
with  a  human  will,  and  never  separate.  Buty  is  the  mark 
God  sets  upon  virtue.  Every  heroic  act  is  also  decent,  and 
causes  the  place  and  the  by-standers  to  shine.  We  ar  taut 
by  great  action  that  the  univers  is  the  property  of  every 
individual  in  it.  Every  rational  creature  has  all  nature 
for  his  dowry  and  estate.  It  is  his,  if  he  wil.  He  may 
divest  himself  of  it;  he  may  creep  into  a  corner,  and  abdi- 
cate his  kingdom,  as  most  men  do, —  but  he  is  entitled  to 
the  world  by  his  constitution.  In  proportion  to  his  tho?t 
and  will,  he  takes  up  the  world  into  himself. 

"A.II  those  things  for  ichich  men  plow,  bild,  or  sail  obey 
virtue,"  said  an  ancient  historian.  "The  winds  and 
waves,'1''  said  Gibbon,  "ar  always  on  the  side  of  the  ablest 
navigators."  So  are  the  sun  and  moon,  and  all  the  stars 
of  heven. — EMEESON. 


108  THE  NOTE-TAKER. 


CONTRA. 

58.  The  prefix  contra  is  used  only  in  a  few 
words,  and  they  follow  the  analogy  of  M— \  con- 
tradict, ^)  contravene. 

SPEC. — The  following  words  have  the  prefix  <o :  contra- 
band, contradict,  contradistinguish,  contrary,  contravene, 
contraversion,  and  their  derivatives.  (R.  L.  Tenth,  68.) 


IN   AND   IM. 

59.  Of  the  two  forms  given  in  the  table  for 
the  prefixes  in  and  im,  the  former  is  used  wher- 
ever convenient,  as  in 


L? 

income,   index,  impulse. 

The  latter  is  used  mainly  before  f~    IIP 
,  as  in 


1         T 

immortal,     inbred,  impress,  imply,     incline,     impart. 

SPEC.  1.  —  Use  the  ?  in  imbue,  impugn,  inexcusable,  in- 
exact, indomitable,  ineffable,  invest,  inestimable,  innocent, 
ineradicable,  inartificial.  (R.  L.  Tenth,  64,  a.) 


CHAPTER     VI.  109 

2.  Use  the  n  in  imbrue,  imprint,  implead,  ingress,  in- 
crease, inclose,  immense.  (R.  L.  Tenth,  64,  b.) 

BEM.  1. —  The  prefixes  in  and  im  are  mere  variations  of  the  same 
original  particle,  varied  by  the  laws  of  euphony,  as  in  the  case  of 
con  and  com,  before  noticed.  Hence  they  can  never  conflict,  only 
one  form  of  the  prefix  being  possible  in  any  given  case.  The  im 
almost  always  precedes  6,  p,  and  m;  and  in  precedes  other  conso- 
nants. For  this  reason  there  is  no  need  of  distinguishing  between 
im  and  in  in  writing  words  containing  these  prefixes. 

RKM.  2. — There  are  a  few  cases  in  which  the  prefix  in  precedes  b, 
as  in  inbred,  inborn,  inbreathe;  but  these  words  do  not  take  the  pre- 
fix im :  we  have  no  such  words  as  imbreathe  or  imborn. 

60.  Neither  <->  nor  s  can  be  used  before  (,  (, 
e/%  ^ ',  «^,  c/,  •=—  c— ,  C-_,  c —  When  either 
of  these  letters  follows  the  prefixes  'in  or  im,  a 
change  of  construction  is  necessary. 

a.  The   use  of  the  compounds  c/,  c    T  c 
is  avoided,  the  full  forms  \^   ~~~)     -7  beino- 

'  -*^  ^/  O 

used  in  their  stead. 

b.  The  compounds  j?,  ^ ,  O  are  used  wherever 
convenient,  in  place  of  the  simple  letters,  as  in 

OO  0?  fVJ 

injure,  insure,  initial. 

c.  Before  ^  and  (/,  the  prefix  is  written  in 
full,  and  also  before  (,  (,  c__,  c —  when  the  com- 
pound forms  J  ']  cannot  be  used. 

SPEC.  1. — Under  the  principle  mentioned  in  section  60, 


110  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

a,  we  have  such  words  as  iniquity,  inquiry,  indelible,  in- 
tolerant, and  many  others.     (R.  L.  Tenth,  65,  «.) 

2.  Under  section  60,  b,  we  have  only  a  few  words:  in- 
jure,  injured,  injury,  insure,  insured,  insurance,  and  initial. 
(It.  L.  Tenth,  65,  b.)  Under  c  we  have  such  words  as 
inherent,  inherit,  inhabit,  inweave,  ingenuous,  injudicious, 
inject,  initiate,  insatiable.  (R.  L.  Tenth,  65,  c.) 

REM.  —  Some  of  the  words  mentioned  above  are  farther  contracted 
in  the  reporting  style. 

61.  a.  When  the   prefix   in  or  im  precedes 

t\^  ^f.  o  _  ,  the  circle  may  be  written  on  the 
-hook  side,  as  in 


.     .     . 

inspire,  insect,   institute. 

SPEC.  1.  —  This  principle  applies  to  the  words  insupport- 
able, inspect,  insecure,  instead,  install,  instate.  Compare, 
however,  with  these  the  words  instruct,  instrument.  (R. 
L.  Tenth,  66,  a.) 

2.  The  same  principle  may  be  also  applied  to  the  signs 
P,  \  ^  and  u  —  in  such  words  as  insubordinate,  insignia, 
incidental,  and  some  others.  (R.  L.  Tenth,  66,  b.). 

b.  The  circle  is  also  written  in  the  prefix  <•>  and  }  when 
followed  by  the  curves  ),  ),  /*-s,  ^-^,  (^  ,  ^^,  J,  and  the 
/  ,  as  in  the  words  inseverity,  insufferable,  insist,  insin- 
cerity, insult,  insurmountable.  (R.  L.  Tenth,  66,  c.) 

G2.  a.  In  some  words  commencing  with  im, 
these  letters  are  radical  and  should  not  be  writ- 


CHAPTETl    VI.  Ill 

ten  with   the  prefix.      Such  words  are  image, 
imitate,  and  their  derivatives. 

b.  The  prefix  in,  on  the  contrary,  is  followed  by 
a  vowel,  and  the  prefix  sign  may,  if  necessary,  be 
attached  to  the  vowel  that  commences  the  root. 

SPEC.  1. — Where  the  prefix  in  is  followed  by  a  vowel, 
the  vowel  may  be  omitted  before  most  of  the  consonants, 
as  in  the  words  inaccurate,  inanimate,  inarticulate,  inele- 
gant, inexpedient,  inordinate.  (R.  L.,  sec.  68,  a.) 

2.  But  where  the  in  precedes  the  b,  p,  or  m,  with  an 
intervening  vowel,  the  vowel  should  be  written,  to  enable 
the  reader  to  distinguish  at  a  glance  between  in  and  im, 
—  for  he  expects  im  to  precede  |,  j,  and  /",  and  would 
read  \J  ,  impel  sooner  than  ^nappli — . 

This  principle  applies  to  such  words  as  inapplicable, 
inapposite,  inebriate,  inoperative,  inopportune,  inimical, 
inimitable.  (R.  L.,  sec.  68,  b.) 

63.  a.  When  the  prefix  im  is  followed  by  m, 
as  in  immaterial,  the  m  of  the  root  is  always 
retained. 

b.  The  same  principle  applies  to  the  prefix  in. 
When  followed  by  n  in  the  root,  the  second  n  is 
written. 

Ex. — Immature,  immeasurable,  immediate,  immense, 
immigrate,  innocent,  innocuous,  innovate,  innumerable. 
(R.  L.,  69.) 


112  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 


INTRA,  INTRI,  INTRO,  ETC. 

64.  The  hook  of  the  c —  is  dropped  after  in 
in  the  prefix  introj  and  the  use  of  this  mode  of 
contraction  is  extended  to  many  words  com- 
mencing with  intra,  intrans,  intre,  and  intri,  as 
in  the  following 

Examples. 


intransitive,  introduce,  intrigue,  intrepid,  intrude. 

SPEC.  —  The  principal  words  that  are  so  contracted  in 
the  Note-Taker's  style  are  intractable,  intrench,  intricate, 
intrinsic,  intromit,  introspective,  introvert,  intrust,  with 
the  examples  given  above,  and  the  words  derived  from 
them.  (R,  L.,  sec.  70.) 


MAGNI   AND     MAGNA. 

65.  These  prefix  signs  apply  to  only  a  few 
words.  Magni  is  written  upward,  magna,  down- 
ward, as  in  /^^magnificent,  £y  magnanimous. 


SPEC.  —  The  remaining  words  commencing  with  this  pre- 
fix are  magnanimity,  magna-charta,  magnify,  magnijic, 
magnitude,  with  their  immediate  derivatives.  (R.  L.,  71.) 


CHAPTER   VI.  113 


SELF,  WITH,  AND    TRANS. 

66.  a.  The  prefix  ^)  (self)  may  be  written 
either  upward  or  downward,  as  in  oX.  selfish, 
J_f-^^  self-admiring.  The  direction  in  which 
this  prefix  is  written  is  determined  by  the  same 
principles  that  apply  to  the  use  of  the  upward 
and  downward  forms  of  J  in  other  cases.  (See 
Elements  of  Tachyg.,  Chap.  X.) 

SPEC.  —  This  prefix  occurs  in  the  words  self-abhorrence, 
self-conceit,  self-denial,  self-esteem,  self-evident,  self  inter- 
est, selfish,  self-love,  self-possession,  self-same,  self-will,  and 
a  few  others.  (R.  L.,  sec.  72.) 


b.  The  prefix  ^  (loitli)  admits  of  no  varia- 
tion, but  is  used  as  in  the  word  ^      withdraw, 

c.  Trans  (  =—  **).    The  circle  in  which  this  prefix 
ends  may  be  written  on  either  side  of  the  stem, 
following  the  rules  that  determine  the  proper 
use  of  the  circle  in  other  cases. 


transgress,   transact,  translucent. 

SPEC.  1. — Intrans  loses  the  hook  as  shown  above  in  sec- 
tion 64. 

2.  When  the  trans  is  followed  by  a  root  commencing  in 
s,  as  in  transcend,  only  one  s  is  written.  The  trans  in  this 


114  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

case  loses  its  s  in  pronunciation,  and  sometimes  in  ou*-  com- 
mon orthography,  as  when  we  write  ^raw-scribe  for  trans- 
scribe,  but  these  words  are  written  as  though  pronounced 
trans-end,  trans-cribe. 

3.  Other  words  containing  this  prefix  are  transform, 
transfer,  transfuse,  tramhip,  transition,  translate,  trans- 
migrate, transplant,  transport,  transverse,  and  a  few  others 
with  derivatives.  (R.  L.,  sec.  73.) 

EXCEP.  1.  —  Transient  and  its  derivatives  drop  the  «,  as  it  is 
dropped  in  speech. 
2.  Transit  is  written  <^~ai___ 


CHAPTER    VI.  115 


WRITING    EXERCISE   TWELFTH. 

Contra. —  Contradict,  contradictions ,  contradicting ',  con- 
tradistinguish, contravene. 

Im. — Imbecile,  imbitter,  imbosom,  imbrue,  imbue,  im- 
maculate^ immature,  immeasurable,  immediate,  immemo- 
rial, immense,  immigrant,  imminent,  immoderate,  immod- 
est, immoral,  immortal,  immovable,  immutable,  impair, 
impartial,  impart,  impassable,  impeach,  impel,  impercepti- 
ble, imperfect,  impertinent,  imperative,  impious,  implaca- 
ble, implant,  implead,  implicit,  implore,  imply,  import, 
importance,  important,  impost,  impressible,  imprudent, 
impugn,  impunity. 

In. — Inaccessible,  inaccurate,  inactive,  inadequate,  in- 
admissible, inalienable,  inalterable,  inapplicable,  inappro- 
priate, inarticulate,  inaudible,  inaugural,  inauspicious, 
inborn,  inbreathe,  inbred,  incapable,  incapacitate,  incisive, 
incline,  inclose,  income,  incorporeal,  incorrect,  incrust,  in- 
credible, increase,  incredulous,  incredulity,  inculpate,  in- 
curable, indebted,  indecent,  indefatigable,  indelible,  inde- 
fensible, indelicate,  indestructible,  indicate,  indictable,  in- 
discriminate, indisposed,  indissoluble,  indolent,  induce, 
indwell,  inebriate,  ineffable,  inequality,  inert,  inertness, 
inestimable,  inevitable,  inexcusable,  inexpedient,  inexpressi- 
ble, inextinguishable,  inextricable,  infallible,  infamous,  in- 
fatuate, infect,  infer,  inferior,  inflame,  infest,  inflict, 
influence,  inform,  infract,  ingrate,  inimitable,  iniquity, 
initial,  innocence,  innovate,  innumerable,  inofficious,  in- 
operative, inordinate,  inquire,  inroad,  insatiable,  inscribe, 
inscrutable,  inseparable,  insolvency,  inspire,  insult,  insure, 
insurmountable,  intellect,  intemperate,  intend,  intimate, 


116  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

intimidate,  intuitive,  invalid,  invariable,  inventive,  investi- 
gate, invent,  invincible,  involuntary,  invulnerable. 

Incendiary,  incense,  instruct,  inspect,  insect,  inspire,  in- 
spirit, institute,  insubordinate,  instantaneous,  incentive. 

NOTE.  —  The  prefix  is  not  used  in  the  words  incessant 
and  incest. 

Magn»-1,  SeH  With,  Intra-1-o,  Trans. 

Magnify,  magnificent,  magnificence,  magnitude,  mag- 
nanimous, magnanimity. 

Self-denial,  self-denying,  selfish,  self -admiring,  self-con- 
ceit, celf-conscious,  self-esteem,  self-evident,  self-interest, 
selfishness,  self -same,  self-will. 

Withdraw,  withstand,  withhold,  within,  without.  Here- 
with, therewith,  wherewithal. 

Introduce,  intromit,  introcession,  intrinsic,  intrinsically, 
intrench,  intrepid,  intricacy,  intrigue,  introvert,  intrude, 
intrusive,  intransitive,  intransmissible,  intransmutable. 

Transact,  transatlantic,  transcend,  transcendent,  trans- 
cendentalism, transcribe,  transcript,  transept,  transfer,  trans- 
form, transfuse,  transgress,  transitive,  translate,  translu- 
cent, transmigration,  transmissible,  transmit,  transmute, 
transparent,  transplant,  transport,  transpose,  transverse. 

OBEY  ORDERS. — A  brave  veteran  officer,  reconnoitering 
a  battery  which  was  considered  impregnable,  and  which  it 
was  necessary  to  storm,  laconically  answered  the,  engineers, 
who  were  endeavoring  to  dissuade  him  from  the  attempt, 
"  Gentlemen,  you  may  think  and  say  what  you  please;  all 
I  know  is  that  the  American  flag  must  be  hoisted  on  tfie 
ramparts  tomorrow  morning,  for  I  have  the  order  in  my 
pocket.n 


CHAPTER   VI.  117 


67.  Compound  prefixes  consist  of  the  simple 
prefixes  already  given  and  a  preceding  particle. 
Most  of  them  are  compounds  of  com  or  con,  with 
a  preceding  de,  dis,  in,  mis,  or  un.  The  most 
important  forms  are  given  in  the  following 
table :  — 

COMPOUND  PEEFIX   SIGNS. 


miscon, 

s^9  rein, 

recon, 

^  uncon, 
uncom, 

irrecon, 

°        circum. 

recog, 

^ 

decora, 

discom, 
""^  discon, 

incora, 
*      incon, 

68.  The  use  of  those  compound  prefixes  which 
end  in  com  or  con  is  analogous  to  that  of  the 
simple  forms  in  similar  cases.  The  following 
cases,  however,  deserve  notice. 

a.  The  stroke  for  con  or  com  in  the  compound 
prefixes  may  assume  any  of  the  variations  as- 
sumed by  the  simple  prefixes  so  far  as  conveni- 
ent. 

SPEC. — Such  variations  occur  in  the  words  discontinue, 
inconstant,  inconsistant,  uncontaminated.  (R.  L.,  sec.  74.) 


118  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

b.  The  /  in  the  prefix  recom  may  be  struck 
downward  in  the  words  /_,     recommend, 
recommence,  and  their  derivatives. 

69.  a.  Circum  (treated  as  though  spelled  cir- 
coni)  is  contracted  in  some  words  by  omittiug 
the  cum,  as  in  ^ — °  circumstance. 

b.  As  circum  is  classed  with  the  con  and  com 
prefixes,  so  also  may  incum  and  recum  be  writ- 
ten as  though  spelled  incom  and  recom,  as  in 
the  words  incumbent,  recumbent,  encumber.     (B.. 
L.,  sec.  75.) 

c.  Recog  is  used  only  in  the  word   recognize 
and  its  derivatives. 

YO.  There  are  other  modifications  and  com- 
binations not  given  in  the  table  arising  out  of 
the  union  of  prefix  signs  that  will  be  easily 
understood. 

SPEC.  1. — Rein  and  reim  admit  of  a  freedom  in  the  use 
of  the  -3  the  same  as  explained  in  case  of  the  simple  pre- 
fixes. 

Ex.  — Reimburse,  reimprint,  reinforce,  reinhabit,  rein- 
sert, reinsure,  reinstall.  (R.  L.,  sec.  76.) 

2. — Accom  may  be  written  with  or  without  the  com,  as 
in 


1  *— 

accomplish,   accompany,  accommodate. 


CHAPTER    VI.  119 

3.  Other  compounds  that  occur  in  a  few  words  are  un- 
contra  in  \incontradicted,  unselfin  unselfish,  immagni  in 
unmagnified,  untrans  in  untranslated;  misin,  mistrans  in 
(^y-~  misinformed,  /^2_  mistranslated;  unaccom  in 
unaccommodated,  unaccompanied.  (R.  L.,  sec.  77.) 


120  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 


WRITING    EXERCISE  THIRTEENTH. 

Decompose,  discompose,  discontinue,  inconstancy,  mis- 
conceive, misconstrue,  reconcile,  reconstruct,  irreconcilable, 
recognize,  reinvest,  unconscious,  unconcerned,  circumfer- 
ence, circumstances,  circumcise,  circumnavigate.  Incon- 
gruous, incomplete,  incumbent,  incombustible,  incompati- 
ble, recommence,  recommend,  unconstrained,  unconstitu- 
tional, disconnected,  uncontroverted,  uncontradicted.  Ac- 
companied, unaccompanied,  accomplished,  unaccomplished, 
selfishly,  unselfishly,  unmagnified,  misinformed,  misinter- 
preted, misconstrued,  uncircumcised,  unrecognized. 

Reinvest,  reimburse,  reimprint,  reinfect,  reinhabit,  rein- 
sert, reinsure,  reinvigorate.  Encumber,  incumbent,  recum- 
bent, inconstant,  inconsistent,  uncontaminated. 

MODERN  REPUBLICS. — Where  ar  the  republics  of  modern 
times,  which  clustered  round  immortal  Italy  ?  Venice  and 
Genoa  exist  but  in  name.  We  stand  the  latest,  and,  if  ice 
fail,  probably  the  last  experiment  of  self-government  by 
the  peeple.  We  have  begun  it  under  circumstances  of  the 
most  auspicius  nature.  We  ar  in  the  vigor  of  youth. 
Our  constitutions  hav  never  bin  enfeebled  by  the  vices  or 
luxuries  of  the  old  world.  Such  as  we  ar,  we  hav  bin  from 
the  beginning,— simple,  hardy,  intelligent,  accustomd  to 
self-government,  and  self-respect.  The  Atlantic  rolls  be- 
tween us  and  any  formidable  foe.  Within  our  own  terri- 
tory, stretching  throo  many  degrees  of  latitude  and  longi- 
tude, we  hav  the  choice  of  many  products,  and  timmj 
means  of  independence.  Alredy  has  t/ie  age  caut  the  spirit 
of  our  institutions.  It  has  infused  itself  into  the  life- 
blood  of  Europe,  and  warmed  the  sunny  plains  of  France 


CHAPTER    VI.  121 

and  the  lolands  of  Holland.  It  has  tucht  the  philosophy 
of  Germany,  and  the  North,  and,  moving  onward  to  the 
South,  has  opened  to  Greece  the  lessons  of  her  better  days. 
Can  it  be  that  America  under  such  circumstances  can 
betray  herself?  that  she  is  to  be  aded  to  the  catalog  of 
republics  the  inscription  upon  ichose  ruins  is  ''They  were, 
but  they  are  not?  Forbid  it,  my  countrymen :  forbid  it 
Ifeven  !  —  STORY. 


•WRITING   EXERCISE  FOURTEENTH. 

EFFECTS  OF  SUCCESS. — If  you  icud  revenge  yourself  on 
those  hoo  hav  slihted  you,  be  successful.  It  is  a  bitter 
satire  on  their  icant  of  judgment  to  sho  that  you  can  do 
without  them.  This  is  a  wound  to  the  self-love  of  proud, 
inflated  peeple ;  and  you  must  reckon  on  tJieir  hatred,  as 
they  wil  never  forgiv  you. 

RAISING  RENT.  —  '•'•Sir,  I  intend  to  raise  your  rent," 
sed  a  land- holder  to  one  of  his  tenants,  to  which  he  replied, 
—  "I  am  very  much  obliged  to  you,  for  I  cannot  raise  it 
myself" 

PRINCIPAL  AND  INTEREST. — A  detor,  when  asJct  to  pay 
his  creditor,  observd  to  him  that  it  was  not  his  interest  to 
pay  the  principal,  nor  his  principle  to  pay  the  interest. 

VARIETIES. —  To  promote  an  unworthy  person  disgraces 
humanity.  The  human  mind  is  a  mirror  of  the  incompre- 
hensible Deity.  The  reason  that  many  persons  want  their 
desires  is  because  their  desires  want  reason.  Haj)py  ar 
the  miseries  that  end  in  joy,  and  blessed  ar  the  joys  that 
hav  no  end. 

BOUNDARIES  OF  KNOLEGE. — Human  reason  very  prop- 


122  THE  NOTE-TAKER. 

erly  refuses  to  giv  its  assent  to  any  thing  without  evidence 
oj  its  truth.  Yet  the  powers  of  reason  ar  limited  on  all 
subjects  of  inquiry.  The  astronomer  finds  a  difficulty  in 
getting  from  the  solar  system,  to  a  clear  idea  of  the  outly- 
ing univers;  the  chemist  in  proceeding  from  matter  to  its 
mysterious  essence;  and  the  physiologist  in  advancing 
from  the  body  to  the  soul.  These  three  kingdoms  of  knol- 
ege  border  on  other  kingdoms  unknown  to  natural  sience. 
Our  minds  ar  so  constituted  that,  after  having  traverst 
the  material  creation,  and  perceivd,  sientificatty,  the  very 
boundaries  of  matter,  where  it  is  adjoined  to  spirit,  it  can 
elevate  itself  by  power  constantly  given  by  God  to  the 
lower  boundaries  of  spirit  life,  and  from  thence  ascend, 
step  by  step,  to  a  knolege  oftfie  great  I  Am,  whom  to  kno 
ari/itt  and  to  love  supremely,  is  the  hihest  good  of  man. 


CHAPTER   VII. 

AFFIXES. 

71.  The  class  of  words  introduced  in  the  last 
chapter,  which  consist  of  a  root-word  varied  by 
means  of  prefixes,  are  farther  modified  by  annex- 
ing particles,  called  affixes  or  suffixes. 

The  terminations  ing,  ed,  ous,  ment  in  the 
words  knowing,  wretched,  righteous,  fragment 
are  familiar  examples. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  provide  special  signs  for 
all  of  these  terminations,  as  most  of  them  are 
sufficiently  brief  when  written  in  accordance 
with  the  general  principles  of  the  art.  Yet,  con- 
tracted modes  of  writing  some  of  them  have 
been  adopted,  and  are  found  to  be  very  useful. 

72.  The  following  table  contains  the  most 
important  of  these  signs.      Like   the  prefixes, 
they  may  be  either  simple  or  compound. 

123 


124  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 


TABLE    OF   AFFIX    SIGNS. 
SIMPLE.  COMPOUND. 

"~  ment,  3     mental, 

C   cient,  <^J    ular, 

J>self,  cJ    ularly, 

°)  soever>  ^      nation, 

ulation, 

tional, 


J  ure,  (y-  tionality, 

^  ural,  ual, 

fication. 


MENT,  jrENTAL,  MENTARY. 

73.  a.  The  affix  me/itf  is  a  half-length  f .  In 
forming  mental,  a  small  hook  is  added,  which 
may  be  considered  a  relic  of  the  n  hook  more 
freely  used  in  the  reporting  style.  These  signs 
may  be  written  either  upward  or  downward,  as 
^"  is  written  in  other  cases,  following  the  laws 


CHAPTER   VII.  125 

already  given  to  govern  the  direction  of  this 
letter.  (See  Elements,  p.  91.) 

Ex.  —  Detriment,  detrimental,  ornament,  orna- 
mental, sentiment,  sentimental,  monument,  embar- 
rassment, sacrament,  raiment.  (R.  L.,  sec.  79.) 

1}.  We  have  also  the  terminations  mentary  and 
mentality,  as  in  elementary,  'mentality,  written 


c.  The  plural  is  formed  by  adding  the  circle, 
as  L  elements. 


74.  a.  This  affix,  spelled  in  several  ways,  is 
written  with  the  halved  (  and  n  hook.  We 
have,  also,  ciently  written  in  analogy  with  men- 
tal. These  terminations  are  of  frequent  occur- 
rence. 

Ex. — Ancient,  anciently -<-^J,  tr 'ancient, patient, 
proficient,  sufficient,  sufficiently.  (R.  L.,  sec.  80.) 

b.  In  a  similar  manner  are  formed  the  termina- 
tions •*  dent  and  J7  dental,  *->  gent  and  gently  J?, 
and   others,  as   in  "\-,   accident,  ^7   accidental, 
v^*>  urgent,  ^?  urgently. 

c.  This  form  of  contraction  may  also  be  ap- 


126  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

plied  in  such  words  as  constant,  constantly,  in- 
stant, instantly,  intent,  intently.    (R.  L.,  sec.  81.) 

REM.  —  The  forms  6  and  £>_/,  and  others  of  this  class,  are  regu- 
larly formed,  in  accordance  with  principles  developed  in  the  report- 
ing style.  While  the  (  is  halved  to  imply  t,  a  hook  is  added  to 
represent  the  n,  which  is  read  before  the  implied  t.  This  method 
of  contraction  is  too  much  involved  to  be  used  indiscriminately  in 
this  style,  but  it  may  be  applied  safely  in  the  case  of  a  few  termina- 
tions, as  explained  in  this  section. 


SOEVER. 

75.  The  use  of  this  affix  is  uniform,  and  will 
he  easily  understood  from  the  following  exam- 
ples:— 

S      5      ~^)     1       1 

whensoever,  howsoever,  wheresoever,  whosoever,  whosesoever. 


SELF   AND    WITH. 

76.  The  signs  for  these  affixes  are  the  same  as 
the  signs  for  the  corresponding  prefixes,  given 
in  Chapter  VI. 

Self  may  be  written  in  either  direction,  as  in 
^7  himself,  ^-^  his  own  self.  The  plural  is 
formed  by  adding  the  circle,  as  •*£)  ourselves. 


CHAPTER  VII.  127 

Ex. — Herewith,  wherewithal,  themselves,  her- 
self, whatsoever.     (R.  L.,  sec.  82.) 


WARD. 

77.  The  sign  for  this  affix  is  formed  by  mak- 
ing the  latter  part  of  the  stem  of  e/'  heavy, 
thus  c-^-. 

Ex. — — <^  onward,  \^  forward.  The  word 
toward  is  written  irregularly,  thus  «-. 


URE. 

78.  This  affix  is  of  very  frequent  use,  and 
applies  to  nearly  all  words  ending  in  the  sounds 
yr,  whether  written  ure,  ier,  ior,  iar,  or  eur,  as 


LJ        ^          v 

nature,    pannier,    culture,     cultured, 


grandeur,  familiar,  peculiar,    pictures. 


URAL,  URALLY,  UAL,  AND  UALLY. 

79.  These  affixes  belong  to  only  a  very  few 
words,  and  no  confusion  can  result  from  the  use 


128  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

of  the  same  form  for  ural  and  ual.  The  form 
of  this  affix  is  a  large  hooked  ^J,  implying  the 
J,  in  analogy  with  the  large  hook  on  the  —  '. 
The  forms  urally  and  ually  add  the  tick,  in 
analogy  with  the  words  any  and  many. 

Examples. 


natural,  naturally,  gradual,  gradually. 

80.  a.  The  affix  sign  for  ular  is  double  length, 
and  the  adverbial  form  adds  an^/,  thus:  ^<^J 
regular,  ^^J~^  regularly. 

b.  Some  words  ending  in  ular  do  not  have  the 
sound  of  ^/,  and  are  written  without  this  affix. 
Such  words  are  angular,  circular. 

Mis-eel.  Ex.  —  Mutual,  spiritual,  scriptural, 
secular,  vernacular,  angular,  circular.  (R.  L., 
sec.  83.) 


UATION    ATO)   ULATION. 

81.  a.  These  are  written  with  large  final 
hooks,  the  former  on  a  single -length,  the  latter 
on  a  double-length,  letter. 

Ex. —  <^9  graduation,  ^J}  congratulation. 


CHAPTER  VII.  129 

b.  The  use  of  these  forms  is  much  more  fre- 
quent than  those  given  in  section  80,  and  their 
use  is  limited  only  in  such  words  as  osculation, 
where  the  sound  of  fj  is  not  distinctly  heard. 

Ex. — Situation,  emulation,  modulation,  stipu- 
lation, attenuation,  extenuation.  (R.  L.,  sec.  84.) 


TIONAL    AND    TIONALLY. 

82.  a.  The  terminations  tional  and  tionally 
are  contracted  into  slil,  written  (j  as  given  in 
the  table  of  affixes,  or  with  O,  as  in 

-v    ^v~       \          \ 

<          \  2 

national,  nationality,  professional,  professionally. 

b.  In  words  where  the  <9  in  sional  has  the 
sound  of  zli,  the  heavy  signs  (j  and  ^  are  used, 
as  in  r~^j  occasional,  1  provisional. 

3 

FICATION. 

83.  This  termination  is  written  fshn.     The 
large  hook  is  used  for  slin,  as  in  the  terminations 
nation  and  ulation,  given  above,  thus  "-^  sancti- 
fioation. 


130  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

Ex. — Sensational,  traditional,  rational,  notion- 
al, justification,  rectification.     (R.  L.,  sec.  85.) 


THE   SHN   HOOK. 

84.  a.  A  large  final  hook  may  be  used  for  the 
termination  shn  (spelled  tion,  sion,  tian,  dan, 
<fec.)  on  most  of  the  consonants. 

b.  This  hook  is  written  on  the  right  side  of 
|  |  \\,  on  the  upper  side  of  —  ,  —  ,  and  /,  and  on 
the  inside  of  the  curves. 

Examples. 


1  I  . 

objection,  option,     section,  addition,  confession, 

u 

revision,  proposition,  omission,  recognition,  coalition. 

SPEC.  1.  —  The  shn  hook  is  used  — 

a.  Where  no  vowel  precedes  the  termination,  as  in  the 
words  —  —  ^_?  tension,  f~  ^  mention,  """"£,  deception,  and 
other  words  given  above. 

b.  Where  the  shn  is  preceded  by  the  vowels  a,  e,  or  i 
(o  .  or  o),  as  in  the  words  (j  passion,        c\^  discretion, 

rendition,  /^  mission. 


CHAPTER  VH.  131 

Ad.  Ex,  —  Extortion,  emersion,  contortion,  conception, 
connection,  discretionary,  missionary,  visionary,  diction- 
ary. (R.  L.,  sec.  86.) 

2.  Some  words,  in  which  the  letters  \  or  |  precede  the 
termination  shn,  drop  the  \  or  |  before  taking  the  hook, 
as  <O  sanction,  ^_D  instruction,  ^  (2  redemption. 

a.  The  \  is  dropped  in  a  few  words  only  in  this  style, 
and  in  these  it  is  preceded  by  —  or  s_x.      They  are  in- 
struction, destruction,  destructive,  sanction.     (R.  L.,  sec. 
87.) 

b.  The  |  is  dropped  after  f  in  all  such  words  as  con- 
sumption, assumption,  presumption,  redemption.     (R.  L., 
sec.  88.) 

REM.  —  It  will  be  observed  that  the  p  in  words  in  which  it  is 
dropped  forms  no  radical  part  of  the  word,  but  is  inserted  in  our 
common  orthography  because  the  sound  is  necessary  to  the  easy 
pronunciation  of  the  word,  —  that  is,  when  the  sound  (  follows  f  ^ 
without  an  intervening  vowel,  the  sound  of  p  is  inserted  mechanic- 
ally in  passing  from  the  f~  to  the  (  .  But  this  sound  is  not  needed 
in  the  writing,  because  it  will  be  easily  inferred. 

85.  A  large  class  of  words  end  in  the  termina- 

tions ation,  otion,  and  ution.     These  are  con- 

tracted in  the  reporting  style  by  writing  the 

c  ,  s  ,  -,  and  A  for  ation,  otion,  and  ution,  omitting 

the         as  in  the  words 


negation,  approbation,  dissipation,  emanation,  emotion,  allusion. 

SPEC.  1.  —  This  mode  of  contraction  is  not  entirely  in 
harmony  with  the  principles  of  this  style,  and  should  be 


132  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

used  sparingly,  if  at  all.  Especially  should  short  words, 
such  as  nation,  notion,  motion  be  written  in  full. 

2.  There  are  some  other  words  which  end  in  shn  which 
should  be  written  in  full  :  these  are  — 

a.  Those  in  which  the  termination  shn  is  not  an  affix, 
but  part  of  the  original  word,  as  in 


-  .      ocean,        Prussian,      Grecian. 

b.  Some  words  ending  in  cession,  as  £  cession  and 
session,  /^?°  secession. 

REM.  1.  —  The  method  of  writing  the  affixes  given  in  this  chapter 
enables  the  writer  to  distinguish  between  many  words  which  would 
be  written  with  the  same  outlines  if  all  words  ending  in  shn  were 
written  with  the  same  mode  of  contraction,  as  is  the  case  in  phono- 
graphy. This  mode*  of  writing  gives,  for  instance,  the  same  form 
to  the  words  motion,  mission,  emotion  and  emission,  dissipation  and 
deception,  dissolution  and  desolation,  elision,  illusion,  elation,  lotion, 
and  allusion,  and  many  others,  except  as  some  more  or  less  arbitrary 
distinctions  are  employed. 

REM.  2.  —  It  is  not  easy  to  determine  to  how  great  an  extent  the 
termination  shn  may  be  omitted  with  advantage  in  this  style.  It 
may  be  of  use  to  certain  persons,  in  case  of  words  of  frequent  occur- 
rence, to  omit  it,  while  for  other  persons  it  may  be  unsafe.  This 
termination  is  added  so  easily  that,  in  most  kinds  of  writing,  the 
speed  of  writing  gained  by  its  omission  in  the  cases  mentioned 
would  be  very  small  indeed. 

*  The  Phonographic. 


CHAPTER   VII.  133 

WRITING   EXERCISE   FIFTEENTH. 

Fragment,  figment,  impediment,  raiment,  ornament, 
movement,  achievement,  reinstatement,  ailment,  ointment, 
basement,  abasement,  casement,  element,  filament,  detri- 
ment, sentiment,  sacrament,  monument,  nutriment,  instru- 
ment. 

Detrimental,  sacramental,  instrumental,  fundamental, 
ornamental,  elemental,  alimentary,  elementary,  instrument- 
ality. 

Ancient,  patient,  transient,  proficient,  deficient,  efficient, 
sufficient,  anciently,  patiently,  transiently,  quotient. 

Accident,  accidental,  regent,  urgent,  urgently,  gentle, 
gently,  extent,  instant,  instantly,  resident,  residents,  in- 
stants. 

Himself,  herself,  itself,  our  self,  ourselves,  yourselves. 

Whosoever,  whensoever,  wheresoever,  howsoever,  whose- 
soever, whatsoever.  Wherewith,  herewith,  therewith.  In- 
ward, outward,  rearward,  forward,  backward,  onward, 
heavenward.  Rewarder,  inwardly,  outwardly,  rewarding, 
forwarding. 

Figure,  nature,  stature,  torture,  verdure,  moisture,  vest- 
ure, pasture,  posture,  mixture,  fixture.  Natures,  mixtures. 
Figured,  natured.  Natural,  structural,  scriptural.  Natu- 
rally. 

Familiar,  familiarly,  familiarity.  Pannier,  soldier, 
soldierly,  grandeur. 

Adventures,  adventurous,  culture,  cultured,  sculptured, 
peculiar,  peculiarly. 

Gradual,  gradually,  effectual,  effectually,  spiritual,  spir- 
itually, annual,  annually,  habitual,  eventual. 

Oracular,  vernacular,  particular,  ocular,  ocularly,  jocu- 


134  THE    NOTE-TAKEK. 

/ 

lar,  jocularly,  titular,  globular,  regular,  irregular,  un- 
popular, secular,  secularly,  secularize.  Graduation,  con- 
gratulation, tribulation,  speculation,  regulation,  modula- 
tion, population,  stipulation,  accentuation,  fluctuation, 
stimulation,  emulation,  situation,  evacuation,  attenuation, 
extenuation,  perpetuation,  expostulation,  matriculation. 

Notional,  rational,  sensational,  traditional,  emotional, 
professional,  provisional,  professionally,  provisionally, 
occasional,  occasionally,  nationality,  sensuality. 

Mortification,  justification,  sanctification,  edification, 
fructification,  rectification,  ratification. 

A  BURLESQUE  EDITORIAL.  —  We  have  found  thus  early 
in  our  editorial  life  that  the  founding  of  anew  periodical, 
and  the  preparation  of  the  second  number  for  tJie  press, 
is  quite  a  C-rious  undertaking. 

Countless  have  been  the  caucuses,  conventions,  councils, 
confederations,  convocations,  collections,  conversations, 
concertings,  cogitations,  conferences,  contrivings,  combina- 
tions, and  concatinations,  considered  called  for  in  com- 
posing, concocting,  collecting,  compiling,  combining,  con- 
centrating, condensing,  and  copying  the  copious  contents 
of  our  columns;  cautiously  clearing  from  chaff,  clarify- 
ing from  coarseness,  and  carving  from  clumsiness,  the 
contributions  and  communications;  considering  ourselves 
caterers  to  a  capricious  crowd,  comprising  censorious, 
cynical,  crabbed,  crusty,  captious,  cringing,  canting,  carp- 
ing, cavilling,  contemptible  critics;  courteous,  candid,  care- 
ful, considerate,  compassionate  contemporaries;  cheerful, 
civil  correspondents,  and  cool,  calculating,  competent  con- 
tributors. Completely  comprehending  our  conseqinMicc, 
confident  of  the  countenance  and  commendation  of  the 


CHAPTER     VII.  135 

charitable  as  a  compensation  for  our  complicated  cares,  we 
have  carefully  compiled  a,  congruous  collection  of  choice 
contributions,  concise,  creditable  communications  and  cap- 
ital conundrums  and  charades,  calculated  to  convince 
critics,  cavillers,  and  cotemporaries  of  our  care  for  their 
comfort,  and  consideration  for  their  convenience.  Con- 
demning controversy,  calumny,  contention,  and  cumbrous 
or  careless  communications,  we  have  confidently  cast  our- 
selves upon  the  consideration  of  the  crowd. 

WRITING   EXERCISE    SIXTEENTH. 

Confession,  profession,  passion,  vision,  division,  revis- 
ion. Position,  opposition,  imposition,  proposition,  dis- 
position. Precision,  decision,  excision,  circumcision. 

Mission,  omission,  commission,  remission,  redemption, 
exemption,  preemption,  distention,  extention,  ascension, 
mention,  tension,  dissension,  pension.  Recognition,  amu- 
nition,  coalition,  comprehension.  Ambition,  prohibition, 
option,  adoption,  deception,  passion,  inception,  reception, 
action,  auction,  section,  attraction,  fraction,  friction,  affec- 
tion, inflection,  infliction,  affliction,  retraction,  dissection. 
Addition,  edition,  condition,  perdition,  tradition,  super- 
stition. 

Instruction  (omit  the  \  in  this  and  the  following  words), 
destruction,  construction,  rejection,  dejection,  conjunction, 
sanction,  destruction. 

Contortion,  extortion,  cohesion,  adhesion,  derision,  col- 
lision, collusion.  Missionary,  commissioner,  dictionary, 
auctioneer,  electioneer,  elocutionist,  abolitionism,  abolition- 
ist. Grecian,  Prussian,  Russian,  Titian,  ocean.  Cession, 
secession,  intercession,  precession,  misprision,  elysian. 


136  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

Argumentation,  ornamentation.  Passionate,  fashion- 
able, unfassioned,  unimpassioned. 

EDUCATION. — Education  means  the  development,  perfec- 
tion, and  proper  use  of  the  body  and  mind.  It  relates  to 
the  training  and  guardianship  of  youth Jrom  infancy  to 
mature  age;  to  the  influencing  of  the  character,  not  only 
of  individuals  but  of  nations.  The  highest  powers  and 
noblest  sentiments  of  our  nature  might  remain  forever 
dormant  were  they  not  developed  and  matured  by  the  in- 
struction and  example  of  the  wise  and  good.  In  a  still 
wider  sense,  education  may  mean  the  whole  training  of 
the  thoughts  and  affections  by  inward  reflection  and  out- 
ward events  and  actions,  by^intercourse  with  men,  ^by  the 
spirits  of  the  just  made  perfect?  by  instruction  from  the 
word  of  God,  and  the  training  of  the  whole  man  for  life 
and  immortality. — ANON. 

ANALOGY. — As  in  the  succession  of  tJie  seasons  each,  by 
the  invariable  laws  of  nature,  affects  the  productions  of 
what  is  next  to  come,  so,  in  human  life,  every  period  of 
our  age  influences  the  happiness  of  that  which  is  to  follow. 
Virtuous  youth  generally  brings  forward  accomplished 
and  flourishing  manhood,  and  such  manhood  passes  off 
without  uneasiness  into  respectable  and  tranquil  old  age. 
When  nature  is  turned  out  of  its  regular  course,  disorder 
takes  place  in  the  moral  world  just  as  in  the  world  of  out- 
ward life.  If  the  spring  put  forth  no  blossoms,  in  sum.mer 
there  will  be  no  beauty,  and  in  the  autumn  no  fruit.  If 
youth  be  trifled  away  without  improvement,  manhood  will 
be  contemptible,  and  old  age  miserable.  If  the  beginnings 
of  life  have  been  inanity,  its  latter  end  can  be  no  other  than 
vexation  of  spirit.  —  ANON. 


CHAPTER  VIE. 

MISCELLANEOUS   CONTEACTIONS. 

86.  In  analogy  with  the  affix  ward,  the  stem 
of  the  c^  and  <S  may  be  thickened  near  the 
end  to  imply  rd ,  as  in  the  words 

^    <f  ^ ' 

word,  heard,  harden. 

SPEC.  —  This  principle  applies  to  only  a  few  words;  and 
only  in  cases  analogous  to  those  given. 

Ex. — Warden,  hard,  harder,  unheard.    (R.  L,,  sec.  91.) 

87.  a.  The  letter  r  unites  more  or  less  closely 
with  all  pure  consonants  in  such  words  as  ark, 
arm,  o?'b,  earn,  furl.     This  union  of  r  with  a  fol- 
lowing consonant  is  indicated  by  special  signs, 
where  followed  by  d,  t,  -9,  or  z,  by  means  of  half- 
length  characters,  and  the  circle. 

Two  other  cases  of  such  union  are  followed 
with  brief  signs,  as  follows:  — 

b.  Where  I  follows  r  without  an  intervening 
vowel,  as  in  curl,  furl,  the  rl  may  be  written  by 
making  the  Upward  /  heavy,  thus  /• 

137 


138  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

SPEC.  —  The  heavy  Ha  is  used  in  such  words  as  moral, 
furl,  relish,  religious.  (R.  L.,  sec.  92.) 

6'.  When  n  unites  with  a  preceding  r,  as  in 
earn,  it  may  be  written  by  means  of  a  final  hook 
on  either  side  of  the  ^X"  or  /,  as  in  [^  burn,  ~^ 
turn. 

SPEC.  1.  —  There  are  many  words  in  which  this  form  of 
contraction  may  be  used,  and  among  them  the  following : 
spurn,  stern,  adjourn,  mourn,  sworn.  (R.  L.,  sec.  93.) 

2.  This  hook  cannot  be  used  when  the  n  is  followed  by  a 
vowel,  as  in  the  word  journey. 

3.  The  n  hook  may  be  used  on  the  "^  V^  f  and  </  in 
writing  the  words  ^  then,  \.  than,  /°  men,  and   f^> 
one. 

HEM.  —  The  use  of  the  n  hook  is  extended  in  the  reporting  style 
to  other  letters,  and  to  cases  where  a  vowel  occurs  before  the  n. 

88.  The  final  syllables  ance,  ence,  ans,  and  ens 
are  represented  in  some  cases  by  writing  the  cir- 
cle on  the  left  or  under  side  of  a  straight  sign, 
as  in 

^ — o  "3 — o  a" 

condense,  instance,  circumstance. 

SPEC.  1. — This  form  of  contraction  may  be  applied  as  in 
the  words  expense,  eloquence,  interference,  confidence,  and 
many  other  words.  (R.  L.,  sec.  94.) 

2.  This  form  of  contraction  is  more  useful  after  the  up- 


CHAPTER  vm.  139 


strokes  ^x^,  c/'  ,  cS'  •>  an<^  C/  •>  an<^  the  horizontals  —  , 
—  ,  c  —  ,  and  c  —  ,  than  after  the  |,  |,  \,  \,  for  the  ^^  joins 
so  easily  with  the  latter  group  of  signs  that  less  is  gained 
by  the  contraction  ;  yet  it  is  used  on  |  in  such  words  aa 
ea^ercse,  where  it  is  more  convenient  to  write  the  second 
circle  on  the  left,  because  the  first  circle  occurs  on  the  right 
side  of  the  |  .  For  a  similar  reason,  it  will  be  found  con- 
venient at  times  on  |,  \,  \;  but  nothing  will  be  gained 
by  endeavoring  to  press  this  termination  into  use  in  all 
possible  cases.  Such  words  as  encumbrance,  remembrance, 
are  best  written 


3.  After  a  half-length  character,  this  termination  must 
be  written  in  full,  as  in  °\>      acceptance. 

4.  The  word  once  is  written  cx^0,  in  analogy  with  the 
termination  ance. 

REM.  1.  —  The  words  >TJ>  existence  and  Vb  consistence  drop  the 
n  without  any  direct  reference  to  the  principle  stated  in  the  pre- 
ceding section,  but  merely  because  it  cannot  be  easily  joined  in 
these  cases. 

89.  a.  A  large  final  hook  is  used  on  the  left 
and  under  side  of  the  straight  signs  in  the 
reporting  style  to  express  the  sounds  of  /"or  v, 
generally  in  connection  with  the  vocals  n  and  °. 
This  form  of  contraction  is  employed  in  the 
Note-Taker's  style  to  provide  briefer  outlines  for 
the  words  differ  and  its  derivatives, — difference, 
different,  indifferent,  &c.  (K.  L.,  sec.  95.) 

b.  This  hook  may  also  be  employed  in  writing 
the  words  give,  forgive,  and  their  derivatives 


140  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

given,  forgiven,  giving,  and  forgiving;  and  in 
the  words  J  objective  and  J1  subjective;  but  the 
^  is  used  for  the  termination  ively  in  objectively, 
subjectively,  and  elsewhere.  (R.  L.,  sees.  96, 106.) 


DERIVATIVE    WORD  -  SIGNS. 

90.  Derivatives  formed  from  the  words  which 
are  represented  by  word-signs,  as  given  on  page 
82,  follow  the  principles  already  given  for  writ- 
ing affixes  so  far  as  they  can  be  applied.  The 
following  specifications  will  sufficiently  illustrate* 
their  use. 

SPEC.  1.  —  The  plural  of  nouns  and  third  singular  of 
verbs  is  formed  by  adding  the  circle  to  the  word-sign. 

Ex.. —  Objects,  principles,  improves,  values,  forms,  things, 
generals.  (R.  L.,  sec.  97.) 

2.  The  termination  able,  as  in  other  cases,  is  written 
either   P    or  \^/ ,  as  in  objectionable,  improvable,  remark- 
able, pleasurable,  questionable.     (R.  L.,  98.) 

3.  The  ly  is  added  by  J,  written  either  upward  or 
downward,    as  .generally,    gentlemanly,   advantageously, 
largely,  wholly.     (R.  L.,  sec.  99.) 

4.  a.  The  words  form  and  question  shorten  the  final  let- 
ter in  adding  the  ed;  but  the  —  is  added  in  the  words 
objected,  subjected,  improved,  valued,  acknowledged,   and 
represented.     (R.  L.,  sec.  100.) 


CHAPTER  VIII.  141 

b.  The  termination  ed  is  omitted  in  writing  the  words 

O 

numbered,  remarked,  and  advantaged. 

5.  The  termination  ing  is  written  as  in  other  cases,  by 
adding  x_x  to  the  word -signs,  as  in  numbering,  objecting, 
improving,  enlarging.  (R.  L.,  sec.  101.) 

a.  The  terminations  less,  ic,  &c.  are  formed  regularly, 
as   in   numberless,   phonographic,    tachy 'graphic,   whilst, 
whence,  generalissimo.     (R.  L.,  sec.  102.) 

7.  a.  The  prefixes  used  in  forming  other  derivatives 
from  the  word-signs  given  in  the  table  need  no  special 
explanation.  Their  use  will  be  understood  from  the  follow- 
ing examples,  as  given  in  Reading  Lesson  Thirteenth,  sec- 
tion 103:  unobjectionable,  unprincipled,  unvalued,  un- 
numbered, unrepresented,  disadvantage,  anything,  nothing. 

b.  From  the  vocal  word-signs  we  have  the  following: 
altogether,  although,  also,  always,  whom,  whose,  whoever. 
(R.  L.,  sec.  104.) 


CONTRACTED   WORDS. 

91.  A  few  words  not  given  in  the  table  of 
word-signs  are  abbreviated  by  omitting  a  por- 
tion of  the  outline  independently  of  the  general 
rules  of  contraction.  Those  most  employed  in 
the  Note-Taker's  style  are  the  following:  — 


already,  almighty,        difficult,  signify,  significant, 


142  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 


practice,  practicable,  respect,    outrage,       useful, 
with  their  derivatives. 

SPEC.  1.  —  The  principal  derivatives  formed  from  the 
contracted  words  given  in  this  section  are  difficulty,  signifi- 
cance, insignificant,  impracticable,  respectful,  respectively, 
outrageous,  usefully.  (R.  L.,  sec.  107.) 

2.  To  these  contracts  may  be  added  eternal,  internal, 
external,  and  fraternal,  which  omit  the  /,  and  children, 
which  omits  the  J.  (R.  L.,  sec.  108.) 


COMPOUND    WORDS. 

92.  Compound  words  are  written  in  analogy 
with  their  primatives,  and,  so  far  as  possible, 
joined  into  one  outline.  In  cases  where  the 
compound  is  too  long  to  be  joined  into  one  out- 
line, the  parts  may  be  connected  by  an  ordinary 
hyphen. 

SPEC.  —  Compound  words  are  so  numerous,  and  of  such 
a  varied  character,  that  they  cannot  be  treated  of  exhaust- 
ively here;  yet,  as  they  follow  in  all  respects  the  same 
principles  as  simple  words,  they  do  not  need  special  atten- 
tion. The  following  examples  furnish  illustrations  of  the 
manner  in  which  they  are  written :  self-knowledge,  brute- 
mindedness,  ever-deepening,  forever-enduring,  never-rest- 
ing, fellow-workmen,  body-guard,  life-essence,  life-purpose, 
God-given.  (R.  L.,  sec.  109.) 


CIIAPTEE    VIII.  143 


WRITING   EXERCISE    SEVENTEENTH. 

Warding,  rewarding,  harden,  harder,  heard,  unheard. 

Marl,  carl,  girl,  furl,  moral,  relish,  religious,  religions. 
Morn,  corn,  bom,  scorn,  burn,  turn,  worn,  mourn,  bourne, 
return,  adjourn,  unlearn,  sworn,  concern,  then,  than,  one, 
once,  condense,  eloquence,  circumstance,  interference,  infer- 
ence, conference,  instance,  confidence,  providence,  residence, 
expense,  recompense,  encumbrance,  remembrance,  accept- 
ance. 

Deference,  diferent,  indiferent,  diferently,  indiferently. 
Given,  giving,  forgiven,  forgiving.  Objective,  subjective. 
Objects,  subjects,  principles,  improves,  values,  forms,  things, 
numbers,  languages,  represents,  remarks,  generals,  advant- 
ages, enlarges,  pleasures,  questions. 

Conformable,  remarkable,  valuable,  questionable,  objec- 
tionable, improvable,  pleasurable. 

Objectively,  subjectively,  instructively,  distinctively.  Prin- 
cipally, uniformly,  remarkably,  generally,  gentlemanly, 
unqestionably,  wholly,  largely. 

Formed,  informed,  deformed,  questioned,  unquestioned, 
objected,  subjected,  unprincipled,  improved,  valued,  acknowl- 
edged, represented,  outgeneraled,  numbered,  unnumbered, 
remarked. 

Objecting,  subjecting,  improving,  valuing,  forming,  re- 
forming, informing,  numbering,  acknowledging,  repre- 
senting, remarking,  questioning,  willing. 

NATIONAL  CHARACTER.  —  The  loss  of  a  firm  national 
character,  or  the  degradation  of  a  nation's  honor,  is  the 
inevitable  prelude  to  her  destruction.  Behold  the  once 
proud  fabric  of  the  Roman  empire,  an  empire  carrying 


144  THE   NOTE-TAKEE. 

its  arts  and  arms  into  every  part  of  the  eastern  continent. 
"Where  is  her  splendor,  her  welth,  her  power,  her  glory  f 
Extinguisht  forever.  Her  moldering  temples,  the  morn- 
ful  vestiges  of  her  former  grandeur,  afford  a  shelter  to  her 
muttering  monks.  Where  ar  her  statesmen,  her  sages,  her 
philosophers,  her  orators,  her  generals  f  Go  to  their  soli- 
tary tombs,  and  inquire.  She  lost  her  national  character, 
and  her  destruction  followed.  Citizens  will  lose  their  res- 
pect and  confidence  in  our  government  if  it  does  not  extend 
over  them  the  shield  of  an  honorable  national  character. 
Corruption  will  creep  in,  and  sharpen  party  animosity. 
Ambitius  leaders  will  seize  upon  the  favorable  moment. 
The  mad  enthusiasm  for  revolution  will  call  into  action 
the  irritated  spirit  of  our  nation,  and  civil  war  must  fol- 
low. The  swords  of  our  countrymen  may  yet  glitter  on 
our  mountains:  their  blood  may  yet  crimson  our  plains. 

Such  the  warning  voice  of  all  antiquity,  the  example  of 
all  republics,  proclaim  may  be  our  fate. — MAXCY. 


WRITING   EXERCISE   EIGHTEENTH. 

"Wilful,  wilfully,  formality,  numberless,  phonographic, 
tac/ty  graphic,  generalissimo,  whence,  whilst,  largest,  ad- 
vantageous. 

Unobjectionable,  unsubjected,  unprincipled,  unimproved, 
uniform,  uniformity,  unacknowledged,  unrepresented,  un- 
gentlemanly.  Disadvantageously.  Anything,  nothing. 
Altogetlier,  also,  although,  always,  whoever,  whose,  whom, 
however.  Give,  given,  giver,  giving,  forgiven,  unf or  given, 
forgiveness.  Difficulties,  signify,  significant,  insignifi- 
cancy. Practicable,  impracticable,  unpracticed,  respect, 


CHAPTER    VTTT.  145 

respectful,  respectfully,  respectively,  irrespective.    Outrage, 
outrageous,  useful,  usefully,  usefulness. 

Well-being,  well-wisher,  many-sided,  word-forms,  ever- 
enduring,  never-ending,  heavy-laden, fellow-citizens,  fellow~ 
countrymen,  pleasure- seeker,  never-to-be-forgotten. 

LABOR.  —  Labor  is  life;  from  the  inmost  hart  of  the 
worker  rises  Ids  God-given  force,  the  sacred  celestial  life- 
essence,  breathed  into  him  by  Almighty  God.  Doubt  of 
whatever  kind  can  be  ended  by  action  only.  Older  than 
all  preached  gospels  was  this  unpreacht,  inarticulate,  but 
ineradicable,  forever-enduring  gospel — work,  and  therein 
hav  well-being.  All  true  work  is  sacred.  In  all  true  work, 
wer  it  but  true  hand-labor,  ther  is  somthing  of  divinenes. 
Labor  wide  as  the  world  has  its  summit  in  heven. 

Who  art  thou  that  complainest  of  thy  life  of  toil?  Com- 
plain not.  Look  tip,  my  wearied  brother;  see  thy  fellow- 
workmen  there  in  God^s  eternity;  surviving  there,  they 
alone  surviving,  —  sacred  bands  of  the  immortals.  Even 
in  the  weak  human  memory  they  survive  so  long,  as  saints 
and  heroes, —  they  alone  surviving, — peopling  alone  the 
immesured  solitudes  of  time.  To  thee  Heven,  tho  severe,  is 
not  unkind.  Heven  is  kind  as  a  noble  mother,  —  as  that 
Spartan  mother,  saying,  ichile  she  gave  her  son  his  shield, 
'•'"With  it,  my  son,  or  upon  it."  Thou,  too,  shalt  return 
home  in  honor,  —  in  honor  to  thy  far-distant  home.  Doubt 
it  not,  if,  in  the  battle,  thou  but  keep  thy  shield.  —  THOMAS 
CARLYLE. 

OUR  COUNTRY'S  FUTURE.  —  Unborn  ages  and  visions 
of  glory  crowd  upon  my  soul,  the  realization  of  all  which, 
however,  is  in  the  hands  and  good  plesure  of  Almihty 
God;  but,  under  his  divine  blesing,  it  icill  be  dependent 


146  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

on  the  character  and  the  virtues  of  ourselves  and  our 
posterity.  If  classical  history  has  bin  found  to  be,  is  now, 
and  shal  continue  to  be,  the  concomitant  of  free  institu- 
tions, and  of  popular  eloquence,  what  afield  is  opening  to 
us  for  another  Ileroditus,  another  Thucidides,  and  another 
Livy.  And  let  me  say,  gentlemen,  that  if  we  and  our 
posterity  shal  be  true  to -the  Christian  religion,  —  if  we 
and  they  shal  liv  always  in  the  fear  of  God,  and  shal 
respect  his  commandments,  —  if  we  and  they  shall  main- 
tain just  moral  sentiments,  and  such  conscientius  convic- 
tions of  duty  as  shal  controll  the  hart  and  life,  —  we  may 
hav  the  hihest  hopes  of  the  future  fortunes  of  our  country; 
and  if  we  maintain  those  institutions  of  government,  and 
that  political  union,  exceeding  all  praise  as  much  as  it  does 
all  former  examples  of  political  associations,  we  may  be 
sure  of  one  thing, — that  while  our  country  furnishes  materi- 
als for  a  thousand  masters  of  the  historic  art,  it  will  afford 
no  topic  for  a  Gibbon,  —  it  will  hav  no  Decline  and  Fall. 
It  will  go  on  prospering,  and  to  prosper.  Hut  if  we  and 
our  posterity  reject  religius  instruction  and  authority,  vio- 
late the  rules  of  eternal  justice,  trifle  with  the  injunctions 
of  morality,  and  recklesly  destroy  the  political  constitu- 
tion which  holds  us  together,  no  man  can  tel  how  sudden 
a  catastrophe  may  overwhelm  us  that  shal  bury  all  our 
glory  in  profound  obscurity.  Shud  that  catastrophe  hap- 
pen, let  it  have  no  history.  Let  the  horrible  narrativ  never 
be  written.  Let  its  fate  be  like  the  lost  books  of  Livy,  which 
no  human  eye  shall  ever  read;  or  the  missing  Pleiad,  of 
which  no  man  can  ever  kno  more  than  that  it  is  lost,  and 
lost  forever.  —  DANIEL  WEBSTER. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

PHEASE    SIGNS. 

93.  a.  The  general  principles  determining  the 
use  of  phrase-signs  are  the  same  as  those  given 
in  the  first  style  of  the  art.     The  student  will 
do  well  to  review  Chapter  IX  of  the  Elements 
as  an  introduction  to  this  chapter. 

The  phrases  of  the  Note-Taker's  style  differ 
from  those  in  the  simpler  style  principally  in 
the  brevity  of  the  word-forms  of  which  they  are 
composed. 

1).  A  large  number  of  very  valuable  phrase- 
signs  may  be  made  by  joining  the  simple  word- 
signs  together,  as  explained  on  page  83. 

SPEC.  —  Other  phrases  may  be  formed  in  a  similar  way, 
like  the  following :  of-the,  of-all,  all-of,  of-that,  of-which^ 
of-tJiese,  of-thiS)  oj-some,  of -many,  in-no,  in-some.  (R.  L., 
sec.  110.)  See,  also,  the  phrase-signs  given  in  Table  A,  at 
the  end  of  this  chapter. 

94.  The  use  of  the  word-signs  joined  in  phrases 
is  guided  by  the  same  principles  as  those  already 
given  for  the  joining  of  letters  into  word-forms. 
Yet,  the  following  specifications  may  aid  the 

147 


148  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

writer  in  some  cases  of  doubt  in  securing  good 
forms  for  phrases. 

SPEC.  1.  a. — The  word-sign  :>,  in,  is  written  n  before  f , 
as  in-me,  in-my,  in-many.  (R.  L.,  sec.  111.) 

b.  The  word  tVi  may  be  written  in  full  more  easily  than 
by  the  word-sign  in  cases  where  the  *+~s  is  needed  for  a 
connecting  stroke,  as  in  in-a,  in-one,  in-what.  (R.  L.,  sec. 
120.) 

2.  The  word-sign  u,  have,  may  either  begin  or  end  a 
phrase,  or  stand  between  other  signs,  as  have-I,  I-have, 
have-they,  they-have,  I-have-not,  we-have-seen.     But  it  will 
be  well  to  avoid  using  the  ^  for  have  before  Y  as  it  would 
be   possible   in   that   case   to   read   it  ad.      Hence,  such 
phrases  as  I-have-ventured  should  be  divided  into  I-have 
ventured;  but  the  phrase  I-have-advised,  where  the  have 
precedes  the  ad,  may  be  used.     (R.  L.,  sec.,  Ill,  ft  and  c.) 

3.  The  word-sign  s ,  all,  though  generally  struck  down- 
ward, may  be  struck  upward  wherever  the  upward  form  is 
more  convenient.    The  upward  form  will  be  preferred  gen- 
erally before  |,  |,  '  (con  and  com),  ^-^,  1 .,  (/,  </ ',  c — , 

c — ,  as  in  the  phrases  all-persons,  all-conditions,  all-nations, 
all-senses,  all-works,  all-hearts,  aU-ages.     (R.  L.,  sec.  112.) 

4.  a.  The  word-sign  /,  of,  is  written  upward  generally 
in  phrases,  but  may  be  written  downward  when  necessary 
to  form  a  convenient  angle,  as  in  of-these,  of-recent-times, 
of -commendation,  of -sufficient,  of-them,  of-the-same.     (R. 
L.,  sec.  113.) 

b.  When  of  precedes  a  word  commencing  with  the  vowel 
^  (o),  as  in  the  phrase  of -opportunities,  the  vowel  is  dis- 
placed by  the  word-sign  and  omitted,  as  in  in-the-midst, 
of -opportunities,  for -usefulness  >  (R.  L.,  sec.  114.)  But  in 


CHAPTER  IX.  149 

some  cases  of  this  kind  the  /,  of,  may  be  added  to  the 
preceding  word. 

5.  The  tick  for  the  takes  the  place  of  the  initial  vowel 
/  (o)  in  such  phrases  as  the-opposition,  the- occurrence,  the- 
obstacles;  but  if  it  is  desired  to  retain  the  vowel,  the  tick 
may  be  added  to  the  preceding  word,  as  in  on  the  occur- 
rence of  this  festival.     (R.  L.,  sec.  119.) 

6.  The  word  us  may  be  written  by  the  circle  in  phrases 
where  the  , — .  is  inconvenient,  as  It-will-afford-us-much' 
pleasure;  they-will-send-us-supplies /  of-us,  some-of-us.    (R. 
L.,  sec.  114,  #.) 

7.  It  is  better  to  preserve  the  word-sign  Vo  they,  in  its 
proper  form,  and  to  change  other  words  to  conform  to  it 
when  necessary,  as  in  the  phrases  they-are,  they-may,  they- 
may-be.     The  word  them  may  be  written  like  they-may  if 
unavoidable;  but  it  will  be  generally  easy  to  retain  its 
proper  form,  as  in  let-them,  set-tliem,  for-them,  hear-them. 
(R.  L.,  sec.  115.) 

8.  The  word-sign  ~*^,  though,  is  invariable :  so,  also,  are 
the  signs  -  who,  ^  how,  «— ^  on  and  own,  and  g^  we. 

Ex. —  Though-they,  thouyh-these,  though-this,  though  we, 
who  is,  how-is,  on-us,  their-own,  we-know.  (R.  L.,  sec. 
116.) 

9.  The  word-sign  /^,  may,  is  written  either  upward  or 
downward.     It  is  sometimes  made  heavy  to  represent  the 
phrase  may-be.      The  words  you  and  he  are  sometimes 
written  with  other  signs  than  those  given  in  the  table. 
(See  sec.  96.) 

10.  The  word-sign  ,/,  are,  may  be  written  either  upward 
or  downward,  as  are-they,  they-are,  are-we,  we-are,  who-are. 
(R.  L.,  sec.  117.) 

11.  The  word-sign  ^J,  will,  may  be  written  either  up- 


150  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

ward   or  downward,  as  in  they- will,  who -will,  we -will- 
endeavor.     (R.  L.,  sec.  118.) 

95.  The  word-sign  <•>  may  be  written  for  you 
whenever  this  word  follows  )  or  ),  or  precedes 
(^ ,  as  in  the  phrases  if-you,  love-yon,  you-may, 
you-musti,  if-you-mu*t.  (R.  L.,  sec.  121.) 

SPEC.  —  Since  these  phrases  do  not  distinguish  between 
ye  and  you,  wherever  it  is  thought  sufficiently  important 
to  make  this  distinction,  the  ^/  must  be  used  for  you,  as 
in  the  first  style.  But  the  distinction  will  be  obvious 
enough  in  most  cases  from  the  sense  of  the  writing. 

/96.  The  tick  for  A  may  be  used  for  he  in  many 
phrases,  and  the  sign  ^""  may  be  used  for  he-may. 

Ex. — He-is,  he-thinks,  he-sees,  he-lives,  he-saves, 
he-may-be.  (R.  L.,  sec.  122,  #.) 

This  tick  and  hook  may  also  be  used  in  the 
midst  of  a  phrase,  as  in  if -lie-was,  for-he-may,  if- 
lie-will,  ivheii-he-is.  (R.  L.,  sec.  122,  #.) 

SPEC.  1.  —  The  use  of  the  tick  for  he  is  considerably 
extended  in  the  reporting  style,  but  it  will  be  better  to 
limit  it  in  this  style  to  phrases  of  frequent  occurrence,  and 
where  its  use  is  not  liable  to  be  confounded  with  the  con 
and  com,  or  the  word-sign  ',  of. 

The  con  and  com  occur  frequently  before  — ,  — ,  ),  and 
),  hence  it  will  be  well  generally  to  avoid  the  use  of  the 
tick  for  he  before  these  letters.  Yet  the  phrases  he-did 
and  he-did-not  are  used. 


CHAPTER  IX.  151 

2.  The  tick  for  he  will  be  distinguished  from  the  word- 
sign  / ,  of,  in  many  cases,  because  it  is  struck  downward, 
while  the  /,  of,  is  struck  upward;  but  before  c^S  and 
<^  the  ^,  he,  is  struck  upward,  and  may  be  mistaken  for 
of.  So,  also,  in  a  few  other  cases  the  signs  for  of  and  he 
may  be  confounded.  Yet  no  real  difficulty  need  result 
from  this,  for  only  in  very  rare  cases  will  the  phrases  them- 
selves be  indeterminate,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  following 
examples:  he-had,  of-what,  he-was,  of-wisdom,  ij -he-should, 
many-of-them,  he-seems.  (R.  L.,  sec.  123.) 

97.  a.  The  circle  for  as  may  be  made  twice 
its  usual  size  in  such  phrases  as  as-some-suppose, 
as-specified. 

b.  The  s~*.  may  be  halved  for  the  phrase  as-it, 
and  trebled  in  the  phrases  as-there-is  and  as- 
there-may-be.  (R.  L.,  sec.  124,  a.) 

SPEC.  —  The  following  phrases  may  be  used  with  the 
halved  or  trebled  /-^\:  as-it-is,  as-it-was,  as-it-were,  as-there- 
are,  as-there-were,  who-is-there,  and  some  others.  (R.  L., 
sec.  124,  b.) 

98.  a.   The  word-signs  ^->  so,  ~*\  though,  f 

may,  < -  when,  J  while,  and  J  will  may  be 

trebled  to  add  the  expletive  there,  as  in  the 
phrases   so-there-is,   though-there-is,  may-there-be, 
wh en-there-is,  while-there-is,  will-there-be.     (R.  L., 
sec.  125.) 

b.  In  analogy  with  these  lengthened  signs,  the 


152  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

s_x  of  the  termination  ing  mny  be  trebled  to  add 
the  pronoun  their  as  in  the  phrases  desiring-their, 
loving-their,  giving-tlieir.  (R.  L.,  sec.  126.) 

SPKC. — A  few  other  cases  of  lengthened  curves  will  be 
found  in  Table  E.  The  student  should  observe  that  the 
^-/  only  is  lengthened  to  add  their,  while  the  other  length- 
ened curves,  except  ^ ,  add  there  only.  The  ^  is  length- 
ened to  add  there  and  other. 

REM.  1. — Phonograpliere  add  there,  their,  and  other  indiscriminately 
by  means  of  lengthened  curves.  Whatever  may  be  the  advantage 
of  tliis  in  the  reporting  style,  the  demands  of  the  Note-Taker's  style 
will,  it  is  believed,  be  best  served  by  the  limitations  given  above. 

REM.  2.  —  The  use  of  the  trebled  s«x  to  represent  ngr  in  the 
words  anger,  linger,  &c.  (see  sec.  51)  will  not  interfere  with  its  use 
in  the  phrases  mentioned  iu  this  section. 


SHORTENED    PHRASES, 

99.  As  some  word-forms  are  contracted  by 
means  of  the  general  principles  of  contraction, 
and  others  by  the  omission  of  one  or  more  radical 
letters,  so  phrase-signs  may  be  contracted  regu- 
larly, as  in  the  preceding  sections,  by  the  use  of 
shortened  or  lengthened  characters,  <fec.,  or  more 
or  less  irregularly  by  means  of  omissions  or 
elisions.  These  omissions  cannot  be  classified  in 
this  style,  for  they  are  purposely  limited  to  a 


CHAPTER    IX.  153 

few  phrases  of  frequent  occurrence,  and  can  be 
best  learned  from  the  tables  which  follow. 

SPEC.  1.  —  The  vowel  u  is  used  for  at  in  the  phrases 
at-all-events,  at-first,  at-last,  al-large,  at-length,  at-once. 
(R.  L-,  sec.  127  and  Table  B.) 

This  contracted  form  for  at  should  be  strictly  limited,  as 
otherwise  it  might  be  confounded  with  have  or  ad. 

2.  The  word  and  is  omitted  in  the  phrases  for-ever-and 
ever  and  more-and-more. 

3.  The  word  the  is  omitted  in  the  phrase-signs  for-the- 
most-part,  in-the-name-of,  in-the-first-place,  in-the-last-place. 
(R.  L.,  sec.  128.) 

4.  The  phrases  far-instance,  from-time-to-time,  in-connec- 
tion-with,  in-proportion-to,  more-than,  on-either-hand,  as- 
much-as,  and  others  found  in  Tables  B  and  C,  represent 
each  some  mode  of  shortening  adapted  to  these  special 
cases  alone.     (R.  L.,  sec.  129.) 

100.  The  words  became,  can,  for,  from,  has, 
his,  I,  it,  much,  not,  only,  or,  when,  will,  and  your 
may  also  be  contracted  in  certain  phrases,  as 
given  in  Table  D. 

SPEC.  1.  —  The  signs  for  cannot  and  could-not  use  the  n 
hook  on  the  halved  \.  These  forms  may  be  employed  in 
longer  phrases  in  which  these  words  occur,  as  I-cannot-do, 
he-could-not-be,  we-cannot-think,  they-could-not-do.  (R. 
L.,  sec.  130.) 

2.  The  word  it  is  added  to  the  signs  for  if,  because, 
when,  and  while  by  shortening  the  ) ,  s~*>,  — ',  and  J. 


154  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

So,  also,  its  is  implied  by  adding  the  circle  to  the  short- 
ened form. 

3.  The  v  drops  its  second  stroke  in  I-may,  I-am,  and 
so  also  in  I-must-be,  I-mean,  1-meant.    (R.  L.,  sec.  131,  a.) 

HEM. — The  V  does  not  drop  its  first  stroke  in  phrases.  The  "  is 
used  for  he  or  of  instead  of  /  in  the  commencement  of  phrases. 
Phonographers  should  take  a  note  of  this,  as  the  first  stroke  of  the 
v  has  been  dropped  in  that  system. 

4.  a.  The  words  his  and  has  are  contracted  into  the  cir- 
cle, or  into  a  circle  and  tick,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  phrases 
in-his,  of-his,  he-has,  it-has-been,  and  others.     (Table  D.) 

b.  Generally  the  tick  is  struck  up  in  has  and  down  in 
his;  but  the  construction  of  the  phrase  may  make  it  neces- 
sary in  some  cases  to  reverse  this  direction. 

c.  The  following  examples  will  sufficiently  illustrate  the 
use  of  his  and  has  in  phrases :  with-his,  to-his,  on-his,  it- 
has,  it-has-not,  has-had,  has-been,  has-not,  has-done,  he- 
lms-had.    (R.  L.,  sec.  131,  ft.) 

5.  The  use  or  omission  of  the  f  and  /  in  phrases  con- 
taining the  words  from  and  for  need  not  be  definitely 
limited.     But  where  the  use  of  these  letters  is  not  neces- 
sary either  for  convenience  of  joining  or  for  distinguishing 
the  phrases,  they  may  be  omitted. 

13x. — For-this,  for-these,  for-us,  from-us,  for-me,  from- 
me,  from-which,  for-many-reasons.  (R.  L.,  sec.  131,  c.) 

6.  The  use  of  n  for  it,  as  given  in  the  phrase  it-has-been, 
should  be  limited  in  this  style  to  the  cases  following.     The 
r>  may  be  used  for  it  in  the  commencement  of  a  phrase  — 

a.  Whenever  it  is  followed  by  has,  written  <~P,  it-has. 
J2c.  —  It-has-not,  it-has-done,  it-has-come,  &c.     (R.  L., 
sec.  132,  a.) 


CHAPTER   IX.  155 

b.  When  followed  by  had,  written  r^,  it-had,  as  in  the 
phrases  it-had-been,  it-had-not.     (R.  L.,  sec.  132,  b.) 

c.  When  followed  by  is,  may,  must,  might,  as  in  the 
phrases  it-is,  it-is-not,  it-may-seem,  it-must-be,  it-might-be. 

d.  In  the  phrases  it-ought-to-be,  it-ought-not-to-be.     (R. 
L.,  sec.  132,  c  and  d.) 

7.  The  phrases  it-will  and  you-will  are  written  with  the 
large-hook  signs  c     and  cJ     The  former  of  these  signs 
is  used  also  in  word-forms,  and  the  latter  is  used  in  the 
terminations  ual  and  ually.     These  phrases  are  used  freely 
in  all  connections,  as  in  it-will-do,  as-it-w ill-be,  I-hope-it- 
vrill,  as-you-will,  for-you-will,  where-you-witt.     (R.  L.,  sec. 
133.) 

8.  The  letter  ^  is  written  for  your,  as  well  as  you, 
without  danger  of  confusion. 

Ex.  —  Your-own,  your-own-selves,  yourself,  your-duty; 
but  the  /"  may  be  added  when  necessary  for  joining,  as 
in  your-pleasure,  your-friends.  (R.  L.,  sec.  134.) 

101.  a.  The  phrases  at-it,  at-wldcli,  by-it,  by- 
which,  do-it  (or  done-ify,  have-it  (or  have-to),  in-it, 
may-it,  of -it,  on-it,  to-it,  with-it,  within-it,  without- 
it,  as  given  in  Table  E  and  R.  L.,  135,  need  little 
comment.  After  — ,  ^,  /^,  and  '  (of)  the  it  is 
written  in  full.  This  is  merely  for  convenience, 
as  it  is  difficult  to  add  —  to  these  letters  with- 
out some  connecting  stroke. 

b.  The  words  at,  in,  and  out,  when  they  follow 
a  verb,  as  in  the  phrases  laugh-at,  come-in,  &c., 


156  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

may  unite  with  either  the  preceding  or  following 
word  as  may  be  more  convenient. 

Ex. — Laugh-at,  loolc-at,  come-in,  go-in,  go-out, 
set-out,  they -laughed,  at  him,  let-us-go,  into-(tlie-) 
house.  (R  L.,  sec.  136.) 

102.  a.  In  the  tables  which  follow  examples 
are  given  of  the  principal  forms  of  contracted 
phrases  which  are  explained  in  the  preceding 
sections.  They  should  be  thoroughly  mastered 
by  the  student,  and  the  additional  examples 
given  in  the  reading  lessons  added  to  them. 
When  this  is  done,  the  student  will  be  prepared 
to  apply  the  same  principles  to  the  phrases  given 
in  the  writing  lessons. 

SPEC. — It  is  expected  that  the  student  will  learn  to  form 
phrases  for  himself  freely  wherever  it  is  convenient  to  do 
so.  But  in  doing  this  he  will  do  well  to  bear  in  mind  the 
following  general  directions. 

a.  He  should  form  shortened  and  irregular  phrases  only 
in  accordance  with  the  models  given  in  the  tables  and  the 
reading  lessons;   and  most  persons  will  find  those  given 
quite  sufficient  for  their  use  without  adding  to  this  class 
of  signs. 

b.  Of  the  regular  and  simple  phrases,  which  consist  of 
joining  two  or  more  words  without  any  change  in  the 
words  joined,  new  ones  may  be  made  at  convenience,  but 
they  should  not  be  too  long.      Simplicity  is  essential  to 
speed.     Most  phrases  should  consist  of  only  two  words,  but 


CHAPTER  IX.  157 

if  they  are  very  short,  three  words  may  be  joined  into  a 
phrase. 

c.  The  particles,  —  prepositions,  conjunctions,  pronouns, 
and  adverbs,  —  with  the  auxiliary  verbs,  form  the  closest 
connection  in  sense  with  one  another  and  with  other  words, 
arid  should  generally  be  joined  to  the  words  to  which  they 
belong.  Such  are  the  following  words :  and,  as,  but,  by, 
for,  from,  if,  in,  of,  on,  or,  to,  tinder,  unto,  with,  without. 
All,  each,  he,  her,  his,  I,  it,  its,  many,  me,  my,  one,  .our, 
she,  some,  such,  their,  they,  these,  this,  those.  Am,  are, 
art,  be,  been,  can,  could,  did,  do,  done,  had,  has,  have,  is, 
may,  might,  must,  shall,  should,  were,  will,  would.  Never, 
no,  not,  same,  still,  than,  then,  until,  and  some  other  words. 

REM.  1.  —  Most  of  the  words  given  in  this  list  have  been  intro- 
duced previously  in  connection  with  the  principles  of  contraction 
which  are  applied  to  phrases.  The  writer  must  be  familiar  with 
them  as  written  separately,  and  as  modified  in  the  shortened 
phrases. 

REM.  2.  —  The  use  of  phrases  in  the  Reading  Lessons  should  be 
carefully  studied.  The  selection  from  the  first  chapter  of  Job,  given 
at  the  close  of  the  illustrations  of  shortened  phrases,  on  page  15, 
will  afford  a  good  model  for  imitation  in  regard  to  the  length  of 
phrases  for  general  use. 

REM.  3.  —  In  studying  the  following  tables,  the  student  should 
refer  to  the  explanation  of  the  principles  given  in  the  preceding  sec- 
tions. These  forms  should  be  rendered  so  familiar  as  to  be  written 
with  the  greatest  rapidity,  and  with  a  fair  degree  of  accuracy. 


158 


THE    NOTE-TAKER. 


SIMPLE   PHRASE-SIGNS. — TABLE   A. 


*•    in  the, 
^  in  this, 

^  •     of  that, 
x  —      of  which, 

"S    in  that, 

-y         of  all, 

3—  -un  no, 

-7         of  the, 

tf~  in  some, 

>^~      of  some, 

rf    in  me, 
_J7  who  will, 

'-—  -<     of  any, 
^^^     how  is, 

-^  who  is, 

^        how  could, 

•^  who  would, 

/         how  sure, 

s   who  had, 

^^x^'    we  are, 

u/  have  we, 

^^-    are  we, 

^r   have  I, 

^^^^^were  we, 

\_  have  they, 

^^^"we  were, 

t-    all  of, 

^^~    with  some, 

^    all  the, 

<x^^~^    with  us. 

CHAPTER  IX. 


159 


BRIEF   PHRASE-SIGNS.  —  TABLE   B. 


as  it  were, 
at  all  events, 
at  first, 
at  last, 
at  length, 
at  once, 
by  chance, 
by  no  means, 
forever, 

forever  and  ever, 
for  instance, 

for  the  purpose  of, 
for  the  most  part, 
'from  time  to  time,    /O 
in  accordance  with,  f~*\ 
in  connection  with,    /^\ 


in  consequence  of, 
in  proportion  to, 
in  respect  to, 

in  reference  to, 
"in  the  mean  time, 

in  the  name  of, 
in  the  first  place, 
in  the  last  place, 
in  the  second  place, 
less  than, 

let  us, 

more  and  more, 

more  frequently, 
more  or  less, 
more  than, 
must  be, 


1GO 


THE   NOTE-TAKER. 
TABLE    B CONTINUED. 


no  more, 
now  and  then, 
once  more, 
on  account  of, 
on  no  account^ 
on  one  account, 
on  either  hand, 
on  the  other  hand 


V  or  >.     the  other, 

«-"    L —      with  respect  to, 


with  reference  to, 
western  States, 

eastern  States, 
southern  States, 
U.S., 
U.S.  of  Am. 


SPECIAL   PHRASES. TABLE   C. 

<*"~^as  is,  •  °\  f  f 

)r  as  far  as, 

x~b  is  as,  ^->.  i 

(*         as  much  as, 

G  as  a, 

3  as  in, 

/^  as  it, 

o as  to, 

")  as  if, 


as  some  .say, 

is  there, 
there  is, 


one  or  two, 
two  or  three. 


CHAPTER  IX. 


TABLE   D. 

••*       cannot, 

^~  I  am,  I  may, 

>»        could  not, 

3      in  his, 

)        for  this, 

^      of  his, 

V^  for  he  is, 

>^      he  has, 

\*s~**  for  he  was, 

V^  /|fc>he  has, 

*—>     for  it  is, 

'      it  has  been, 

l_4_o  for  its  own  sake, 

^^~}iow  much, 

2—      from  it, 

<L<^  the  only  way, 

5        if  it  is, 

~*y^  this  or  that, 

N-a   ^  because  it  is, 

A^'^    right  or  wrong, 

<-*       when  it  is, 

i     it  will  be, 

J       while  it  is, 

<M|     you  will  be, 

I     if  you, 

rv^-    you  are, 

~*\/"  though  you  may, 

,-^7  yours  truly. 

EEM.  —  For  the  explanation  of  the  phrases  in  this  Table  see  sec- 
tions 99  and  100. 


162  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

TABLE  E. 

as  there  are,         » — •  at  it, 

as  there  is  not,     k_    by  it, 

if  there  are, 

if  there  is,        "~3~   do  it,  done  it, 
v  if  there  is  not, 
in  another,  have  lfc> 

in  neither,  ^      in  it, 

S/  in  their,  P~     may  it, 

"X    V        though  there  are,^-     of  it, 

V7    <t/the  other  way,  ' 

on  it, 

when  there  are, 

while  there  are, to  lfc> 

will  there  be,       ^  with  it 
doing  their, 

,  i    .  c/"1—  within  it, 

giving  their, 

i  ,,    •        </-*-  without  it, 

knowing  their, 

are  such,  °>       in  you, 

of  such,  "^    in  your, 

with  such,  -^     let  there  be. 


CHAPTER  IX.  163 


WRITING   EXERCISE  NINETEENTH. 

The  phrases  are  separated  by  commas.    "Words  not  separated  by  commas  or  peri- 
ods are  to  be  joined. 

In  me,  in  my,  in  this,  in  that,  in  them,  in  their,  in  those, 
in  this  case,  in  those  days,  in  such  a  way,  in  some  way. 

Who  can,  who  could,  who  will,  who  would,  who  shall, 
who  should,  who  have,  who  have  been,  who  had  been,  who 
may  be. 

Have  they,  have  you,  have  we,  have  I,  have  been,  have 
not,  have  not  been. 

All  of,  all  the,  all  of  the,  all  men,  all  times. 

Of  this,  if  that,  of  which,  of  me,  of  no,  of  any,  of  some, 
of  the,  of  their,  of  all,  of  which  it  is. 

How  far,  how  soon,  how  is,  how  is  it,  how  could,  how 
can,  how  easy,  how  sure,  how  strange. 

We  have,  we  woidd,  we  can,  we  could,  we  shall,  we  should, 
we  are,  we  were.  Were  we,  were  you,  were  they,  were  this. 
With  it,  with  that,  with  this,  with  which,  with  some,  with 
me,  with  him,  with  us,  with  words,  with  God. 

They  were,  they  shall,  they  shall  be,  they  shall  have,  they 
know,  they  wish.  Though  this,  though  some,  though  cer- 
tain. 

May  we,  may  they,  may  you,  may  have,  may  I,  may 
not,  may  not  be,  may  have  been. 

On  this,  on  that,  on  this  account,  on  that  account,  on  no 
account,  on  one  account,  on  my  account,  on  me,  on  some^ 
on  which,  on  all. 

Are  we,  are  you,  are  they,  are  they  sure,  are  not. 

You  have,  you  shall,  you  know,  you  need  not,  you  can, 
you  could,  you  can  be,  you  have  been.  He  can,  he  shall, 
he  knows,  /ie  loves,  tie  lives. 


1G4  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

IMMORTALITY  OF  THE  SOUL.  —  Among  many  excellent 
arguments  for  the  immortality  of  the  soul,  ther  is  one 
drawn  from  the  perpetual  progress  of  the  soul  to  its  perfec- 
tion, without  a  possibility  of  ever  arriving  at  it. 

How  can  it  ever  enter  into  the  tho'ts  of  man  that  the 
soul,  which  is  capable  of  such  immense  perfections,  and  of 
receiving  new  improvements  to  all  eternity,  shall  fall  away 
into  nothing  almost  as  soon  as  it  is  created?  Are  such 
abilities  made  to  no  purpose?  A  brute  arrives  at  a  point 
of  perfection  that  Jie  can  never  pas;  in  a  few  years  he  has 
all  the  endowments  he  is  capable  of;  and  wer  he  to  liv  ten 
thousand  more,  wud  be  the  same  thing  he  is  at  present. 
But  a  man  can  never  hav  taken  in  his  full  mesure  of 
knolege.  He  has  not  time  to  subdue  his  passions,  establish 
his  soul  in  virtue,  and  come  up  to  the  perfection  of  his 
nature,  before  he  is  hurried  off  the  stage. 

Wud  an  infinitely  wise  being  make  such  glorius  creatures 
for  so  mean  a  purpose  ?  Can  he  delite  in  the  production 
of  such  abortiv  intelligences,  such  short-lived  reasonable 
beings  ?  Wud  he  giv  us  talents  that  are  not  to  be  exerted, 
and  capacities  that  are  never  to  be  gratified? 

How  can  we  find  that  wisdom  which  shines  throo  all  his 
works  in  the  formation  of  man  without  looking  on  this 
icorld  as  only  a  nursery  for  the  next,  and  believing  that 
the  several  generations  of  rational  creatures  which  rise  up 
and  disappear  in  such  quick  successions  ar  only  to  receiv 
their  first  rudiments  of  existence  here,  and  afterwards  to 
be  transplanted  into  a  more  frendly  climate,  where  they 
may  spred  andfiurish  to  all  eternity.  —  ADDISON. 


CHAPTER  IX.  165 

WRITING    EXERCISE   TWENTIETH. 
The  phrases  are  separated  by  commas. 

As  it  were,  as  it  was,  as  it  will  be,  as  it  has  been,  as  it 
should  be.  At  all  events,  at  all  times,  at  first,  at  last,  at 
length,  at  large,  at  once,  at  one  time. 

Hy  chance,  by  some  means,  by  the  same  means,  by  no 
means,  by  all  means.  For  ever  and  ever,  for  instance,  for 
the  most  part,  for  the  purpose  of,  for  the  sake  of,  from 
time  to  time,  from  this  time,  from  that  time,  from  ancient 
times. 

In  accordance  with,  in  account  with,  in  connection  with, 
in  consequence  of,  in  many  cases,  in  many  places,  in  pro- 
portion to,  in  reference  to,  in  regard  to,  in  respect  to,  in  the 
mean  time,  in  the  name  of,  in  the  first  place,  in  the  last 
place,  in  the  next  place,  in  the,  second  place,  in  the  third 
place.  In  any  icay,  in  no  way,  in  some  way,  in,  every  way. 

Less  than,  let  its,  let  us  not,  let  us  see,  let  us  look,  let  us 
come,  let  us  suppose. 

More  and  more,  moreover,  more  or  less,  more  frequently, 
more  closely,  more  than,  more  than  that,  more  than  this, 
must  not,  must  be,  must  have  (the  —  is  retained  in  must 
have),  must  come.  JVo  more,  no  more  than,  no  less  than 
this,  now  and  then. 

On  account  of,  on  account  of  this,  on  no  account,  on 
some  accounts,  on  either  hand,  on  the  one  hand,  on  the 
other  hand,  once  more. 

The  other,  the  other  way,  the  other  day,  in  the  other,  on 
the  other.  With  respect  to,  with  reference  to,  with  respect 
to  this,  with  respect  to  that,  with  reference  to  this. 

Western  States,  in  the  western  States,  in  the  eastern 


166  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

States,  in  the  southern  States,  in  the  United  States  of 
America. 

LETTERS. —  G.  D.  MITCHELL. — JBlessed be  letters!  They 
ar  the  monitors,  they  ar  also  the  comforters,  and  they  are 
the  only  true  heart-talkers.  Your  speech,  and  their  speech, 
ar  conventional^  they  are  molded  by  circumstances'  they 
ar  suggested  by  the  observation,  remark,  and  influence  of 
the  parties  to  whom  the  speaking  is  addrest,  or  by  whom 
it  may  be  overherd.  Your  truest  tho^t  is  modified  half 
throo  its  utterance  by  a  look,  a  sign,  a  smile,  or  a  sneer. 
But  it  is  not  so  with  letters:  there  you  ar  icith  only  the 
soulless  pen,  and  the  snow-white,  virgin  paper.  Your  sotd 
is  mesuring  itself  by  itself,  and  saying  its  own  sayings : 
ther  ar  no  sneers  to  modify  its  utterance,  no  scowl  to  scare: 
nothing  is  present  but  you  and  your  thd*t. 

Oh,  the  glory,  the  freedom,  the  passion  of  a  letter !  It 
is  worth  all  the  lip-talk  of  the  world.  Do  you  say  it  is 
studied,  made  up,  acted,  reherst,  contrived,  artistic?  Let 
me  see  it,  then;  let  me  run  it  over;  tell  me  age,  sex,  circum- 
stances, andlwil  tel  you  if  it  be  studied  or  real, —  if  it  be 
the  merest  lip-slang  put  into  words,  or  hart-talk  blazing  on 
the  paper. 

Ar  we  not  creatures  ofthoH  and  passion?  Is  anything 
about  us  more  ernest  than  that  same  tho?t  and  passion? 
Is  ther  anything  more  real,  more  characteristic  of  that 
great  and  dim  destiny  tp  which  we  ar  born,  and  which 
may  be  written  down  in  that  terrible  word — FORE  VK  it! 
Let  those  who  will,  then,  sneer  at  what  in  their  wisdom 
tfiey  call  untruth,  at  what  is  false,  because  it  has  no  mate- 
rial presence:  this  daz  not  create  falsity,  —  wud  to  Hewn 
that  it  did. 


CHAPTER  X. 

THE    TACHYGRAPHIC    NOMENCLATURE. 

102.  a.  In  giving  oral  instruction  in  Tachy- 
grapby,  it  is  often  desirable  to  speak  of  the  com- 
pound and  complex  signs  that  enter  into  the 
word-forms  as  well  as  the  simple   letters.      In 
order  to  do  this  intelligibly,  it  is  necessary  that 
the  teacher  and  pupil  become  familiar  with  some 
system  of  naming  the  signs. 

b.  Names  for  the  simple  letters  are  given  in 
connection  with  the  alphabet,  on  page  43  of  the 
Elements;  and  the  names  of  the  compounds  of 
the  L,  R,  and  S-series  are  given  in  the  following 
table  of  the  compound  signs.  (See  p.  170.) 

103.  a.  In  spelling  Tachygraphically,  it  will 
-be  found  convenient  to  name  each  stem  by  a 

distinctive  name.  A  full-sized,half-length,  double, 
or  treble-length  sign,  with  such  circles  or  hooks 
as  may  be  attached  to  it,  forms  a  stem. 

b.  Stems  which  take  a  vowel  after  them  may 
be  properly  distinguished  from  those  which  do 
not  admit  a  vowel  after  them:  the  former  may 
b#  regarded  as  open,  and  the  latter  as  closed.  To 

167 


168  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

make  this  distinction  appear  in  the  names,  it  is 
convenient  to  name  stems  which  take  a  vowel 
after  them  with  open  syllables,  and  those  which 
do  not  take  a  vowel  after  them  with  closed  syl- 
lables. 

Ex. —  f  Ua,  1  Ira,  f  spe,  \  spra,  c/  qua,  when 
initial ;  and  f  bul,  \  bur,  °|  spur,  when  final. 

104.  Contracted  signs  should  designate  in 
their  names  either  that  use  to  which  they  are 
put  in  the  word  spelled,  or  that  use  to  which 
they  are  more  frequently  and  properly  applied. 

SPEC.  1.  —  The  double  circle  may  be  called  sus,  as  in  P 
sus-pe.  On  the  end  of  a  stem  it  may  be  named  ses,  as  I 
penses. 

2.  The  half-lengths  may  be  named  by  writing  the  short 
e   before   the   shortened   letter,  or   introducing  it  before 
the  added  d  or  t,  thus,  i  ept  or  pet,  \  ekt  or  ket.     When 
the  heavy  signs  are  halved,  the  name  will  end  in  d,  as  ebd 
or  bed. 

3.  When  a  circle  is  attached  to  the  half-length,  the  com- 
bination may  be  named  in  a  similar  manner,  as  in  P  sept 
or  spet.     So,  also,  with  the  double  circle,  as  in  p  sus  ept. 

4.  a.  When  a  circle  ends  the  character,  it  is  named  as 
in  the  table, —  ^  eps,  "%>  ex,  &c.    When  halved,  these  signs 
read  ^  epts  or  pets,    -^  ekts  or  kets. 

b.  When  a  hook  or  circle  commences  the  sign,  and  a 
circle  ends  it,  it  is  named  in  a  similar  manner,  as  in^plens, 
1  pres  or  purs,  ?  spes  or  seps,  ^  spres. 

5.  Final  hooks  are  treated  like  the  final  circle,  and  the 


CHAPTER    X.  169 

letter  or  letters  they  represent  end  the  name  of  the  stem 
on  which  they  occur. 

-Ex. —  J  pen,  \  spren,  J3  spen,  \jpeshn,   J  peforpev. 

6.  a.  The  lengthened  curves  are  named  by  adding  tr 

and  thr  to  the  name  of  the  letter  lengthened,  as — 

enter,  - enther,  &c. 

b.  The  trebled  ^^  is  named  ingger  when  it  implies  gr, 
and  ingtJier  when  it  implies  their. 

7.  The  names  of  all  prefixes  and  affixes  will  be  found  in 
the  tables  of  these  signs.     In  spelling,  the  prefix  or  affix 
may  be  named  in  all  cases  except  where  a  letter  is  used  as 
an  affix:  in  that  case,  the  letter  retains  its  own  name,  as  in 
V_^_^/  wi-enter-en-ya,  intercommunion. 

REII  — The  following  tables  give  the  names  of  the  principal 
modifications  of  the  straight  etems,  as  illustrated  in  the  letter  |  f 
and  the  names  of  the  compounds  of  the  L,  R,  and  S-series.  The  names 
of  the  letters  not  given  will  be  easily  understood  from,  the  illustra- 
tions given  in  this  section. 

105.  Vocals  may  be  named  separately,  as  in 
the  alphabet,  and  the  long  vocals  can  be  named 
in  no  other  way;  but  the  short  vocals  may  be 
named  in  connection  with  the  following  conso- 
nant, as  u\#c  for  a-JTa. 

Stems  ending  in  vowel-hooks  are  named   as 

o 

they  are  pronounced,  as  — =  dy,  — =>  ty,  \j  ca. 

106.  The  signs  used -in  phrases  may  be  named 

O  A  v 

as  the    same  signs   are  named   in  word-forms ; 
but  if  any  signs  occur  in  the  phrases  which  do 


170  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

not  occur  in  the  word-forms,  they  should  have 
distinctive  names. 

107.  Students  may  be  exercised  to  advantage 
in  spelling;  but  a  few  exercises  will  suffice  to 
render  the  method  of  spelling  entirely  familiar 
to  an  intelligent  class. 

The  following  examples  will  serve  as  farther 
illustrations  of  the  names  of  Tachygraphic  stems : 
f*~^  \^  ma-a-en-es-pra-ing,  mainspring;  ->Q.a 
la-ef-ty,  lofty;  (^  pe-o-est,  post;  ^  sest-ma,  sys- 
tem; J^  eps-est  or  pe-sest,  possest;  /~& —  e-sste, 
assessed;^  clet,  called;  })  ef-i-later,  filter;  /J 

ra-end-ar,  render;  ^ '  ra-ender,  render;  v^__ 

ka-o-enter  or  ka-onter,  counter ;  ^^ — -^  a-entJier 

or  anther,  another;  ' Ly*—  antlier-pe-la-o-gy, 

anthi'opology. 

-  con-ste-te-te,  constitute;  ^)     c&ntra-ve-e- 

en,  contravene;   ^v^~^<-—  im-ma-ra-tel,  immortal; 

y  in-shel,  initial;   ^  in-bred,  inbred;   <\  in-sect, 

insect;    ^   ob-s-Jm,  objection;   ^    opxhn,  option j 

~J  dis-pe-a  or  dis-pa,  dissipation. 


CHAPTEK    X.  171 

NAMES    OF   COMPOUND    SIGNS. 

1     bra  or  ber,  f  bla  or  bel, 

]    pra  OF  pel',  f  pla  or  pel, 

%   gi'a  or  ger,  ^  gla  or  gel, 

N  era  or  ker,  %  c]a  or  ke]> 

—  dra  order,  ^  del? 

-  tra  or  ter,  c_  tel, 

)  V6r'  J  vel, 

)     fraorfer,  j  fla  or  fel, 

/  zber,  o 

_y  zhel, 

/    sura  or  sher,  n  ,    , 

_x  shel, 

^  ther,  c^  nel, 

*>  tbra  or  ther,  ^v  sne  or  sen? 

*-*•          ner>  ^y  _J  sla,  sle,  sel, 

•^  wba,  ^  swa, 

f    speorsep,  ^  maz,  emz, 

\   ske  or  sek,  x__p  ens  or  enz, 

G_  ste  or  set,  ^^  eugz> 

")    sfe  or  sef,  _J  laz,  els,  or  elz, 

f~  f*  sma,  sme,  sem,      ^  ers  or  erz, 


172 


CHAPTER    X. 


NAMES    OP   COMPOUND   SIGNS  —  CONTINUED. 


L  eps, 


j  pens, 
j  penses, 
I  Pen, 
j  pen, 
I  Peshn, 
J  pef  or  pev, 
[,  peshns, 


seps  or  spes, 


spenses, 


s]>eshns, 


1 

p  sus-pe, 

9  sus-pra, 

i   pet  or  ept, 
f   spet  or  sept, 
p  sus-pet, 
1    spret, 
t   pets, 

j    peuts, 
£    pies, 
n   preses, 

^  sns-pens, 
1  pren, 
I  spren, 
*L  spreshn. 


CHAPTER    X.  173 

WRITING   EXERCISE   TWENTY-FIRST. 
Exercise  on  the  Use  of  the  Names  of  the  Signs. 

J3e-pe-te-sme,  in-ka-ma,  J£a-a-em,  de-sme,  de-sla~ish-en, 
sla-ve-dent,  con-tent,  con-eJct,  com-p-en-d,  com-peshn,  con- 
tra-acshn,  contra-dy-keshn,  contra-dy-ekt,  in-ef-te-yashn, 
con-gra-at-yulashn,  com-and,  corn-end,  con-si  end,  int&r-ef- 
e-rens.  Mqgni-te-de,  or-na-ment,  scra-ment-el. 

Through  knowledge  we  behold  the  world's  creation, 

How  in  his  cradle  first  he  fondled  was, 

And  judge  of  Nature's  cunning  operation, 

How  things  she  formed  of  a  f armies  mass. 

By  knowledge  we  do  learn  ourselves  to  know, 

And  what  to  man  and  what  to  God  we  owe; 

From  hence  we  mount  aloft  unto  the  sky, 

And  look  into  the  crystal  firmament. 

T/tere  we  behold  the  Heaven's  great  hierarchy, 

The  stars'  pure  light,  the  spheres'  swift  movement, 

The  spirits  and  intelligences  fair, 

And  angels  waiting  on  the  Almighty's  chair; 

And  there  with  humbk  mind,  and  high  in  light, 

The  Eternal  Maker's  majesty  we  view,— 

His  love,  his  trut7i,  his  glory,  and  his  might, 

And  mercy  more  than  mortal  man  can  view. 

Oh,  Sovereign  Lord,  oh,  sovereign  happines  ! 

To  see  Thee  and  thy  mercy  measureles! 

Such  happines  have  they  that  do  embrace 

The  precepts  of  thy  heavenly  discipline; 

But  shame  and  sorrow  and  acursed  case 

Have  they  that  scorn  the  school  of  arts  divine, 

And  banish  me,  which  do  possess  the  skill 

To  make  men  heavenly  wise  through  humbled  will. 

EDMUND  SPENCEK. 

MYSTERY.  —  In  loveliness  of  form,  or  of  moral  char- 
acter, or  of  the  material  creation,  it  is  that  which  is  most 


174  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

veiled  which  is  most  beautiful.  The  mysteries  of  the  heart 
and  of  nature  are  the  delight  of  the  intellect,  the  soul,  and 
the  eyes.  It  seems  as  if  the  Creator  had  drawn  a  shadow 
over  whatever  he  has  made  most  delicate  and  most  divine 
to,  by  its  secrecy,  heighten  our  aspirations  after  it,  and  to 
soften  its  lustre  from  our  gaze,  in  a  manner  as  he  has 
placed  lids  over  our  eyes  to  temper  the  light  when  its  im- 
pression is  too  great  upon  them.  Valleys  are  the  mysteries 
of  landscapes;  the  more  we  long  to  penetrate  them,  the  more 
they  try  to  wind  and  bury  and  hide  themselves.  Mist  is  to 
mountains  what  illusion  is  to  love,  —  it  elevates  them. 
Mystery  hovers  over  everything  here  below,  and  solemnizes 
all  things  to  the  eyes  and  to  the  heart. 

IMMORTALITY.  —  When  I  think  that  I  am  to  outlive  the 
sun  and  the  stars,  that  I  am  to  be  freed  from  the  limited 
influence  of  time,  that  ages  on  ages  will  roll  over  me  with- 
out touching  the  youthful  vigor  of  my  soul,  that  mansions 
< flight  and  purity  are  prepared  for  me  by  the  holy  being 
who  once  dwelt  on  earth,  that  I  shall  live  there  in  closer 
intimacy  with  God  than  with  an  earthly  parent,  that  saints 
and  apostles  will  be  my  companions,  Jesus  the  Redeemer 
will  be  my  brother,  I  am  oppressed  with  the  responsibility 
of  immortality.  And  to  tlie  hands  of  each  one  of  us  is 
committed  a  spirit  to  be.  fitted  for  this  endless,  glorious 
life.  The  spirit  is  ourself.  Its  culture  is  the  development 
of  its  every  faculty. 

Afar  'behind  expression  hides 

The  thing  to  be  expressed. 

Deep  underneath  all  that  we  do, 

And  all  we  seem, 

Lies  what  we  feel; 

And  what  we  feel,  we  are 


CHAPTER  XL 

ANALOGY   AND    EUGRAPHY. 

108.  Allusion  has  previously  been  made  to 
certain  general  principles,  or  laws,  that  have  an 
influence  upon  word-forms,  and  which,  running 
through  the  entire  field  of  word-forms,  bind  them 
together  into  one  system.    These  principles  may 
be  considered,  so  far  as  is  necessary  for  practical 
purposes,  under  two  general  divisions,  the  laws 
of  analogy,  and  the  laws  of  eugraphy. 

109.  Analogy  consists  in  a  similarity  in  certain, 
respects  between  things  which  are  in  other  re- 
spects different.     When  applied  to  the  outlines 
of  words  in  Tachygraphy,  analogy  consists  in 
writing  such  portions  of  two  or  more  words  as 
are  alike  in  sound  in  the  same  manner,  and  such 
portions  as  are  similar  in  a  similar  manner. 

SPEC.  1. —  The  nature  of  the  principle  stated  in  this  sec- 
tion will  be  seen  in  the  following  examples:  — 

175 


176  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

In  the  words  ingress,  egress,  digress,  congress,  regress, 
transgress,  digressing,  transgressors,  the  root  gress,  which 
is  put  in  italics,  appears  without  change.  The  law  of 
analogy  is  observed  here  in  the  common  spelling;  but  if 
the  first  word  was  spelled  ingress,  the  second  cgres,  the 
third  digress,  the  fourth  congrace,  and  so  on,  this  law 
would  be  broken. 

2.  In  Tachygraphy,  the  original  root-form  is  retained  so 
far  as  possible  in  all  the  derivations.     The  principle  may 
be  traced  in  those  derived  from  the  word-signs,  and  else- 
where. 

The  word  V~  form,  for  instance,  remains  unchanged 
throughout  a  list  of  over  a  hundred  derived  words.  (See 
section  90.) 

But  this  principle  applies  to  all  classes  of  words,  and  to 
all  parts  of  words.  As  the  same  sound  is  written  by  the 
same  sign,  so  the  same  combination  of  sounds  is  written  by 
the  same  combination  of  signs,  unless  some  other  law  inter- 
feres to  effect  an  exception  to  the  rule. 

3.  Such  exceptions  do  occur,  and  not  infrequently,  but 
no  exception  should  be  admitted  without  sufficient  reason. 
Some  exceptions  are  given  in  the  end  of  the  following 
section. 


THE    LAWS    OF    ANALOGY. 

110.  The  principal  features  of  the  agreement  of 
word-forms  with  similar  word-forms  are  included 
in  these  rules. 


CHAPTER   XI.  177 

a.  Derivative  words  are  written  in  analogy 
with  their  primatives. 

1.  Compound  words  are  written   in  analogy 
both  with  the  simple  words  from  which  they  are 
formed,  and  with  other  compounds  formed  by 
uniting  any  of  their  parts. 

c.  In  all  classes  of  words  the  same  combina- 
tion of  letters  are  written,  so  far  as  possible,  in 
the  same  manner. 

SPEC.  1.  a. — The  first  rule  applies  especially  to  the  deriva- 
tive word-signs,  and  to  that  large  class  of  words  formed  by 
means  of  the  addition  of  prefixes  and  affixes.  These  de- 
rived forms,  are,  for  the  most  part,  regularly  formed.  A 
given  stem  remains  unchanged  throughout  the  entire  list 
of  derivative  forms,  and  even  the  prefix  and  affix  signs 
have  some  analogy  to  the  signs  from  which  they  are 
derived. 

b.  The  words  \,  compress,  and    ^  impress,  for  exam- 
ple, are  written  analogically  in  having  the  root  press  written 
with  the  same  form  in  both  words ;  but  the  words   ^  and 
? —  are  analogous  only  in  regard  to  the  prefix  which  is 
common  to  them  both. 

c.  Some  exceptions  to  the  laws  of  analogy  will  be  noticed, 
such,  for  instance,   as     J,  larger,*  and     %  useful,  from 
A  and  ^.  / 

2.  Word-forms  remain  so  constant  in  outline  that  they 
suffer   change  very  infrequently  in   forming   compounds. 
Plence  the  2nd  rule  admits  of  very  few  exceptions,  and 
these  may  be  regarded  as  special  contractions. 


178  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

Ex. —   £_  overwhelm,  and  J'    elseioliere. 

3.  The  third  rule  embraces  a  much  wider  field,  and  one 
that  cannot  be  dismissed  so  summarily.  This  rule  applies 
to  all  combinations  of  consonant  sounds  that  are,  or  may 
be,  written  by  means  of  distinctive  signs ;  but  it  applies 
imperfectly,  for  entire  uniformity  in  the  use  of  these  second- 
ary signs  is  unattainable.  Still,  it  is  not  in  vain  to  recog- 
nize the  principle,  and  apply  the  law  wherever  it  can  be 
done. 

«.  Compounds  of  the  L  and  R-series  come  under  this 
law ;  and  it  is  imperative  in  the  use  of  all  true  initial  com- 
pounds like  pi  in  play,  pr  in  pray,  fr  in  free,  &c.  In  final 
compounds  the  law  does  not  demand  the  use  of  the  com- 
pound sign,  so  its  use  here  is  merely  for  convenience. 

b.  The  law  of  analogy  demands  also  that  all  consonants 
that  unite  with  a  following  d  or  t,  as  in  the  words  apt,  act, 
art,  and,  &c.,  represent  such  union  by  shortening  the  for- 
mer of  the  two  consonants.      This  principle  is  followed 
without  any  important  exception;  but  the  use  of  the  half- 
length  characters,  where  no  such  union  of  sounds  takes 
place,  is  for  convenience  merely,  and  not  demanded  by  the 
law  of  analogy. 

c.  The  lengthened  curves  present  another  instance  of 
the  operation  of  this  law;  but  it  applies  primarily  only  to 
cases  in  which  a  curved  letter  is  followed  by  the  sounds 
of  tr  or  dr  without  an  intermediate  vowel,  as  in  the  words 
after,  enter,  under. 

RKM.  1.  —  There  is  a  conflict  between  the  application  of  this  law 
in  the  use  of  the  half-lengths  and  the  double-lengths,  for  in  cases 
where  ter  and  der  are  added  to  a  consonant,  the  shortened  form 
might  be  used,  though  not  with  the  same  degree  of  appropriateness. 


CHAPTER    XI.  179 

After  might  be  written  aft-er,  and  enter,  ent-er;  but  the  true  sylla- 
bication is  af-ter  and  en-ter,  which  determines  the  mode  of  contrac- 
tion. 

REM.  2.  —  Other  cases,  however,  occur  in  which  the  application 
of  the  true  principles  are  not  so  obvious,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  use 
of  the  different  forms  for  st  and  sir,  as  explained  in  sections  39,  40, 
and  48.  The  student  is  referred  to  these  sections  for  further  details 
in  regard  to  the  application  of  this  law  to  half  and  double-length 
characters. 

111.  The  operation  of  the  laws  of  analogy 
may  be  traced  throughout  the  entire  system  of 
word  and  phrase-signs.  Whether  a  given  prin- 
ciple extends  through  a  larger  or  smaller  class 
of  words,  it  has  a  power  to  produce  uniformity 
as  far  as  its  influence  extends.  But  the  action 
of  one  law  is  partially  suspended  by  the  action 
of  another  law  in  many  cases.  The  termination 
ward,  for  instance,  and  the  words  word  and 
heard,  which  express  the  rd  by  making  the  end 
of  the  stems  of  c^  and  </  heavy,  have  usurped 
so  much  territory  from  the  action  of  the  law 
which  demands  the  expression  of  rd  by  means 
of  a  halved  /.  The  general  rule  could  be  fol- 
lowed in  these  cases,  but,  for  the  sake  of  briefer 
and  more  convenient  word-forms,  a  new  princi- 
ple is  introduced  which,  within  a  limited  sphere, 
overrides  the  first  or  more  general  law. 

SPEC.  —  Other  examples  of  the  operation  of  laws  within 
a  limited  sphere  will  be  noticed  by  the  student.  They 


180  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

need  not  be  specified,  as  the  object  of  these  specifications 
is  principally  to  call  attention  to  principles  which  have 
already  been  detailed  in  connection  with  the  rules  for  writ- 
ing in  previous  chapters. 


EUGEAPHY. 

112.  The  term  Eugraphy,  from  the  Greek,  eu, 
good  or  well,  and  graphs,  writing,  is  used  to 
designate  that  quality  in  the  writing  of  Tachy- 
graphy  which  gives  to  it  grace  and  flexibility. 
It  should  not  be  confounded  with  the  term  cali- 
graphy,  which  means  beautiful  writing,  for  eu- 
graphy  means  not  beautiful  writing  but  the 
beauty  or  gracefulness  of  .the  writing. 

SPEC. — The  term  eugraphy  is  applied  not  to  the  writing 
itself,  but  to  a  certain  quality  inherent  in  it,  or  to  be  cul- 
tivated in  it.  The  term  caligraphy,  on  the  other  hand,  is 
the  name  of  a  species  of  writing  instead  of  a  quality  per- 
taining to  it. 

Eugraphy  may  be  further  contrasted  with  cacography, 
which,  perhaps,  may  be  used  to  designate  the  badness  or 
ungracefulness  of  writing,  as  eugraphy  designates  its  grace 
ami  beauty,  cacography  may,  however,  be  also  contrasted 
with  caligraphy,  and  refer  to  bad  writing  in  general,  as 
caligraphy  refers  to  good  writing. 


CHAPTER    XI.  181 

113.  The  principles  of  eugraphy  apply  to  the 
letters,  the  word-forms,  and  \>\\Q  phrase-signs. 

As  applied  to  the  letters,  grace  of  form  is 
secured  by  accuracy  in  direction,  proportion, 
curvature,  and  shading. 

SPEC.  —  The  correct  formation  of  the  letters  belongs  to 
the  elements  of  the  science,  and  need  not  be  discussed 
here.  Yet,  as  some  attention  to  the  proper  size  and  pro- 
portion of  the  letters  is  ess'ential,  both  to  beauty  and 
facility  of  writing,  the  following  suggestions  may  not  be 
out  of  place. 

a.  Inclined,  full-sized  letters  should  be  so  proportioned 
in  length  as  to  fill  the  same  space  perpendicularly  as  the 
upright  letters. 

J&.H  i  \\  /  /  r  ^  ^  ^- 

b.  The  same  principle  will   apply  to  the  half-length, 
double,  and  treble-length  characters.      They  each  will  fill 
one-half  a  space,  or  two  or  three  spaces,  as  the  case  may 
be. 

REM.  —  An  earnest  effort  on  the  part  of  the  writer  to  accustom 
himself  to  accuracy  in  this  respect  will  be  rewarded  by  an  increased 
beauty  in  the  writing.  He  should  practice  on  each  letter,  contrast- 
ing its  half-length,  full  and  double-length  forms  with  one  another 
until  he  gains  skill  in  making  suitable  distinctions. 

114.  The  proper  size  of  the  letters  for  note- 
takino1  is  one-eighth  of  an  inch  for  i  and  i  as  the 

O  O  i 

standard  for  the  space  occupied.  The  \\  "^  J 
&c.  will  be  a  little  longer,  and  /  ^  and  </ 
a  little  longer  still  than  \\  &c. 


182  THE  NOTE-TAKER. 

SPEC. — In  making  the  standard  of  size  for  the  note-taker 
one-eighth  of  an  inch,  it  is  not  designed  to  urge  this  size 
upon  all.  Many  persons  will  prefer  to  write  larger  char- 
acters for  the  sake  of  greater  distinctness.  Characters 
may  be  made  of  any  size  without  interfering  with  the  prin- 
ciples of  eugraphy,  provided  the  proper  proportions  are 
maintained.  Yet,  greater  rapidity  of  writing  can  be 
secured  in  the  use  of  small  letters  than  larger  ones. 

115.  As  applied  to  words  and  phrases,  the 
principles  of  eugraphy  determine  the  compara- 
tive convenience  of  different  outlines.  Good 
outlines  are  those  best  adapted  to  speed  and 
legibility:  hence,  the  laws  of  eugraphy  have 
reference,  first,  to  the  requirements  of  speed, 
and,  second,  to  the  requirements  of  legibility. 
These  requirements  coincide  in  some  particulars, 
but  not  in  all. 


THE    REQUIREMENTS    OF    SPEED. 

110.  The  requirements  of  speed  are  based  on 
the  laws  of  motion,  and  relate  to  the  brevity, 
fac'deness,  and  lineality  of  the  outlines. 

SPEC.  1. — These  terms  are  employed  for  want  of  better 
ones,  although  they  poorly  define  the  qualities  indicated. 
2.  By  facileness  of  outline  is  meant  that  quality  in  the 


CHAPTER    XL  183 

relation  of  the  characters  joined  which  renders  transition 
from  one  to  the  other  natural  and  easy.  Some  outlines 
may  be  written  much  more  easily  than  others  which  con- 
tain the  same  number  of  strokes.  Hence  it  is  the  province 
of  the  laws  of  eugraphy  to  point  out  the  conditions  under 
which  the  most  facile  outlines  may  be  produced. 

3.  Lineality  refers  to  the  direction  of  the  outline,  which 
affects,  in  some  measure,  the  speed  with  which  it  can  be 
written. 

117.  a.  The  brevity  of  the  outline  will  be 
generally  determined  by  the  principles  of  con- 
traction.    Yet  some  discretion  may  be  used  as 
to  whether  to  employ  a  longer  or  shorter  form 
for  a  word  pr  phrase.     Where  brevity  can  be 
secured  without  sacrificing  too  much  to  obtain 
it,  it  is  desirable;   but  the  student  should  be 
cautioned   against   an   undue   regard   for  brief 
forms  which  are  gained  by  a  loss  of  flexibility 
or  legibility. 

b.  All  contractions  demanded  by  the  laws  of 
analogy  should  be  employed:  those  not  de- 
manded, but  only  permitted,  should  be  submit- 
ted to  the  limitation  of  the  other  principles 
which  enter  into  the  formation  of  good  word- 
forms. 

118.  The  facileness  of  an  outline  depends  upon, 
1,   the  nature  of  the  angles  made  in  joining 


184  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

its  letters;  2,  the  homogeneousness  of  the  curves 
that  unite;/ 3,  the  readiness  with  which  the 
word-forms  may  be  joined  into  phrases. 


1.  -  THE  NATURE  OF  THE  ANGLES. 

119.  When  the  hand  is  in  rapid  motion,  any 
change  of  direction  must  hinder  the  speed  of  the 
writer.  If  the  first  stroke  glides  into  the  second 
without  an  angle,  the  highest  rate  of  speed  can 
be  secured,  fbis,  gives  a  special  value  to  forms, 
which  are  very  numerous  in  Tachygraphy,  like 
the  following:  (J  f)  (~)  Q  Q  ^  \^ 

With  these  may  be  classed  all  letters  that  join 
without  an  angle,  whether  straight  or  curved. 
(See  examples  on  pages  54,  55,  and  56  of  the 
Elements.) 

SPEC.  1.  —  With  these  may  be  classed  also  the  so-called 
half-angles,  such  as 


which  in  rapid  writing  run  together  without  any  angle. 

2.  All  hooks,  both  initial  and  final,  and  the  circles,  add 
to  the  speed  of  the  writer  by  bringing  two  letters  into  one 
stroke  of  the  pen. 


CHAPTER   XL  185 

3.  So,  also,  a  circle  between  two  full  letters  adds  to  the 
grace  of  the  outline,  except  when  it  occurs  on  the  back 
side  of  the  curve. 

120.  When  an  angle  must  be  formed,  the 
more  acute  it  is  the  more  easily  can  it  be  made. 
Obtuse  angles  are  especially  objectionable,  and 
should  be  avoided  so  far  as  possible.  (See  Ele- 
ments, p.  54.) 

Obtuse  angles  may  be  avoided  in  the  Note- 
Taker's  style  in  most  cases,  and  better  angles 
secured,  as  specified  below. 

SPEC.  1.  —  The  nse  of  vowel  hooks  and  circles  modifies 
obtuse  angles  wherever  they  can  be  used,  as  in  Xj~"^>,  I.  . 

2.  The  use  of  half-length  signs  greatly  lessens  the  num- 
ber of  bad  angles.  In  most  cases,  where  \  either  pre- 
cedes or  follows  — ,  the  hall-length  letter  absorbs  it,  as  in 


So,  also,  where  —  follows  /,  the ,/  is  halved,  as  in  '^. 
Other  cases  will  be  noticed  in  connection  with  other 
angles. 

3.  The  skilful  use  of  the  variable  signs  will  secure  good 
angles  in  many  cases  where  a  careless  use  would  produce 
bad  angles.  The  variable  letters  are  V.VJ'V^.  f~  J  /  /  • 
Their  proper  use  is  discussed  in  the  Elements,  pp.  92,  93, 
and  94.  See,  also,  the  following  section,  where  the  proper 
use  of  the  variable  signs  is  determined  in  reference  to  the 
nature  of  the  curves  with  which  they  unite. 


186  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 


2. THE  HOMOGENEOUSNESS   OF  THE  CURVES. 

121.  a.  Curves  are  homogeneous  when  they 
face  the  same  way,  or  form  any  portion  of  a  cir- 
cle that  may  be  made  by  tracing  the  circle  in 
the  same  direction.  Opposing  curves  are  seg- 
ments made  by  tracing  the  circle  in  opposite 
ways. 

The  curves  /^,  x~>',/>\  ),  and  J  (downward) 
are  homogeneous;  so  are  the  curves  (,  V_, "  ,  J 
(upward);  but  the  curves  in  the  first  example 
are,  each  and  all,  opposed  to  the  curves  in  the 
second  example. 

b.  When  an  angle  occurs  between  them,  fac- 
ing  curves   are  made  much   more  easily   than 
opposing  curves,  for  the   pen  traces  a  second 
curve  in  the  same  direction  without  an  entire 
loss  of  motion ;  but  when  an  opposing  curve  is 
made,  the  direction  of  the  stroke  must  be  re- 
versed. 

c.  When  opposing  curves  unite  without  an 
angle,  they  are  made  with  perfect  freedom. 

SPEC.  1.  —  The  following  examples  will  sufficiently  illus- 
trate the  nature  of  facing  and  opposing  curves. 


CHAPTER  XI.  187 


FACING   CUEVES. 


OPPOSING  CUEVES. 


2.  When  opposing  carves  lie  in  the  same  direction,  and 
run  into  one  another,  they  are  more  convenient  than  facing 
curves,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  following  examples:  — 


3.  a.  As  a  general  rule,  when  a  variable  curve  follows 
a  curve  of  the  same  length,  it  may  be  turned  so  as  either 
to  unite  without  an  angle  or  to  face  the  same  way  as  the 
curve  to  which  it  is  joined.  The  union  without  an  angle 
takes  the  precedence  where  it  is  equally  convenient. 

b.  When  curves  of  different  lengths  unite,  those  facing 
are  always  to  be  preferred,  as  an  angle  must  in  these  cases 
always  be  formed. 

122.  a.  These  principles  apply  equally  to  vocal 
curves,  and  to  the  union  of  vocal  and  consonantal 


188  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 

curves.  For  these  reasons  f  is  struck  upward 
after  ^,  and  downward  after  c.  J  (-^0  fol- 
lows r>,  and  J  (La)  follows  «.  For  these  reasons, 
we  have  the  forms  La-and  for  land,  and  J^l-i-ent 
for  lint,  and  many  others  that  will  be  noticed, 
where  the  direction  of  the  letters  V^,  k_,  (^,  and 
J  are  varied  on  account  of  a  preceding  or  fol- 
lowing curve. 

b.  These  principles  apply  also  to  the  union  of 
curves  with  straight  lines  or  dashes.  If  a  curved 
letter  lies  in  the  same  general  direction  as  the 
straight  line,  though  an  angle  is  needed,  there  is  a 
continuous  movement  in  the  same  direction  favor- 
able to  speed ;  and  if,  added  to  this,  the  two  may 
unite  without  an  angle,  the  gain  is  still  greater. 

SPEC.  1.  —  The  direction  of  the  curves  as  controlled  by 
the  dashes  is  seen  in  the  case  of  J  in  the  word  J,  and 
others.  If  the  direction  of  the  dash  is  reversed,  the  direc- 
tion of  the  J  will  be  reversed  also. 

2.  Some  exceptions  to  the  principles  given  in  this  and 
preceding  sections  are  unavoidable,  for  in  many  cases  a 
curve  occurs  between  two  letters,  with  one  or  both  of 
which  it  will  unite  with  a  greater  or  less  degree  of  diffi- 
culty. If  any  of  the  letters  are  variable,  as  in  most  cases 
one  or  more  of  them  will  be,  the  difficulty  can  easily  be 
reduced  to  a  single  bud  angle;  but  even  in  case  of  variable 
letters,  a  change  that  aids  the  joining  with  a  preceding 
letter  may  increase  the  difficulty  of  joining  with  the  follow- 


CHAPTER   XL  189 

ing  letter,  and  vice  versa.     Cases  of  this  kind  will  afford 
scope  for  the  ingenuity  of  the  writer. 

3.  So  in  other  ways  one  principle  may  influence  or  over- 
ride the  operation  of  another  principle.  Such  details  can- 
not be  given  here;  but  the  teacher  of  the  art  is  advised  to 
add  to  the  illustrations  given,  so  as  to  adapt  them  to  differ- 
ent classes  of  his  pupils.  Such  instruction  will  bear  good 
fruit  in  the  increased  beauty  and  facileness  of  the  outlines. 


3. OUTLINES    EASILY   JOINED   IN   PHRASES. 

123.  Outlines  that  end  in  such  a  way  as  to  be 
easily  joined  to  a  following  word  add  greatly  to 
the  grace  and  rapidity  of  the  writing.  Such 
outlines  ma 7. be  secured  in  most  cases  by  avoid- 
ing the  use  of  final  hooks,  both  vocal  and  conso- 
nantal. 

SPEC.  1. — Vocal  hooks  are  seldom  used  in  the  end  of 
words  in  this  style,  and  the  use  of  consonant  hooks  is  suffi- 
ciently limited  in  the  instructions  for  their  use.  (Seo 
Chapter  VIII.) 

REM — Those  modes  of  contraction  which  encumber  the  ends  of 
•word-forms  with  signs  that  do  not  admit  of  connection  with  other 
words  are  so  great  a  hinderance  to  phrase  writing  as  to  nearly  neu- 
tralize their  value  as  contractions.  This  is  the  case  with  the  loups 
for  at  and  str  used  in  phonography.  Forms  of  this  kind  have  been 
purposely  excluded  from  the  Note-Taker.  If  they  can  be  made  of 
any  use  in  a  re{X)rting  stylo,  it  is  only  by  carefully  restraining  them 
to  certain  words  that  do  not  occur  in  phrases  very  frequently. 


190  THE   NOTE-TAKER. 


THE   LINEALITY    OF   OUTLINES. 

124.  Word -forms  should  have,  so  far  as  possi- 
ble, a  forward  instead  of  a  backward  tendency. 
If  the  outline  runs  downward,  or  backward, 
away  from  the  line  of  writing,  it  renders  it  unfit 
to  form  part  of  a  phrase;  and  time  is  lost  in 
bringing  the  pen  back  to  the  proper  place  for 
commencing  the  next  word-form. 

SPEC.— The  student  will  see  the  application  of  this  prin- 
ciple without  extended  illustration.  The  variable  letters 
and  the  contractions  may  be  so  used  as  to  favor  linear 
word-forms.  Such  words,  for  instance,  as  public,  publica- 
tion, aggregate,  aggregation,  and  others,  may  be  relieved 
from  running  too  far  below  the  line  by  using  the  upward 
forms  for  J  and  /  instead  of  the  compounds  P  and  °\. 

REM.  —  So  much  regard  has  been  paid  to  this  principle  in  the 
arrangement  of  the  alphabet  that  it  will  be  easy  to  secure  good 
outlines  by  a  little  attention  and  care  on  the  part  of  the  writer. 
In  any  extreme  case  of  difficulty,  the  word-form  may  be  divided,  as 
in  the  compound  word  book-keeper. 


THE    REQUIREMENTS    OF   LEGIBILITY. 

125.  The  requirements  of  legibility  presup- 
pose, as  a  basis,  a  fair  degree  of  accuracy  of  pen- 
manship, and  regard  to  the  proper  distinctions 
in  the  length  and  shading  of  the  letters. 


CHAPTER    XI.  191 

SPEC. — The  student  should  be  drilled  on  all  the  elements 
introduced  into  this  style,  contrasting  half-length  and  full- 
length  characters,  full-length  and  double-length,  double 
and  treble-length,  &c.,  till  he  can  make  the  new  distinc- 
tions as  readily  as  those  introduced  into  the  first  style. 

126.  The  first  special  requirement  of  legibility 
as  applied  to  word-forms  is  consistency  of  out- 
line.    When  the  reader  has  become  accustomed 
to  see  a  given  word  written  in  a  given  way,  he 
reads  it  from  memory,  without  looking  through 
the  characters  to  see  what  they  spell.      If  the 
form  be  changed  at  random,  he  will  read  with 
slowness  and  uncertainty. 

127.  Another   requisite   of   legibility   is   an 
,  observance  of  the  laws  of  analogy.     This  will 

greatly  aid  the  memory  of  forms,  and  the  reader, 
becoming  accustomed  to  see  a  given  combination 
of  sounds  expressed  in  a  given  way,  will  read 
with  certainty  and  ease. 

« 

SPEC.  1.  —  The  operation  of  this  principle  is  very  subtile 
and  far  reaching.  Suppose,  for  instance,  that  the  writer 
omits  the  sign  ^  uniformly  in  such  words  as  sound,  bound, 
found,  and  inserts  the  last  stroke  of  the  v  as  uniformly 
in  signed,  bind,  find,  and  the  u  in  sand,  band,  fanned,  &c., 
the  reader  instinctively  associates  the  sound  of  *  with  the 
open  uncontracted  and  unvocalized  forms  x-v^, — ,  L> — ) 
,  and  is  led  by  the  laws  of  analogy  to  expect  the  same 


192  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

sound  before  the  uncontracted  — **"" "  in  the  words  ground, 
frowned,  mound,  crowned,  &c. 

2.  It  will  be  observed  that  full,  long  vowels  and  diph- 
thongs separate  consonants,  and  that  they  generally  accom- 
pany full  and  open  outlines,  while  small  and  short  vowels 
more  frequently  accompany  contracted  forms.  This  is 
especially  true  in  regard  to  the  use  of  the  circle  and  the 
compounds  of  the  L  and  R-series,  and  to  some  extent  of 
the  half-length  signs. 

128.  A  third  thing  essential  to  a  legible  style 
of  writing  is  a  proper  distinction  of  words  con- 
taining the  same  consonants.     This  has  been  so 
well  provided  for  in  the  rules  for  the  formation 
of  outlines  that  it  is  only  necessary  here  to  call 
attention  to  the  subject.      If  the  words  in  ques- 
tion are  of  such  meaning  that  they  cannot  be 
confounded,  there  is  no  danger;  but  if  they  are 
of  like  or  opposite  significations,  there  is  need 
of  a  distinct  difference  in  the  word-forms. 

SPEC. — There  is  ample  opportunity  in  this  style  for  such 
difference  of  outline  as  may  be  necessary  to  legibility. 
When  fully  written,  no  word  can  bo  obscure  or  liable  to 
be  confounded  with  another;  and  where  any  form  of  con- 
traction would  reduce  two  or  more  words  to  the  same 
form,  the  contraction  should  be  applied  only  to  the  word 
of  most  frequent  occurrence,  leaving  the  others  to  be  writ- 
ten more  fully. 

129.  A  proper  use  of  vocalization  may   be 


CHAPTER    XI.  193 

named  as  a  fourth  requisite  of  a  legible  style. 
A  proper  regard  for  brevity  will  lead  the  writer 
to  omit  all  vowels  that  are  not  necessary;  but 
it  is  unwise  economy  to  add  to  the  labor  of  read- 
ing to  save  a  far  less  labor  in  writing. 

SPEC.  1. — Vowels  are  necessary  in  some  words  contain- 
ing only  one  consonant.  Some  of  these  are  mentioned  on 
pages  34  and  35 ;  but  the  list  may  be  increased.  Besides 
these  there  are  a  larger  number  of  words  of  two  conso- 
nants, comprising  nearly  all  uncommon  words  that  may  be 
written  in  full,  as  in  the  common  style.  The  following  will 
serve  as  specimens  of  the  words  alluded  to  in  this  specifi- 
cation :  bag,  sag,  ran,  pan,  cap,  gap,  map,  rap,  tap,  mob, 
sob,  jog,  job,  dame,  cape,  cake,  wake,  tall,  gall,  &c. 

2.  In  addition  to  these,  many  words  of  three  or  four 
consonants,  with  or  without  a  contraction  of  consonant 
outline,  may  be  vocalized. 

Ex. — Blab,  slab,  clod,  plod,  trod,  shad,  glad,  clog,  flog, 
grog,  Hank,  flank,  prank,  brine,  swine,  twine,  stripe,  strip, 
strap,  blame,  flame,  bloom,  flume,  broom,  brim,  trim,  band, 
sand,  bland,  grand,  &c. 

KEJI.  —  To  these  words  in  which  the  vocal  sign  is  used  for  the 
sake  of  greater  ease  in  reading  should  be  added  those  given  previ- 
ously under  the  rules  for  the  requirements  of  speed.  (See  sec.  120.) 

3.  The  vocal  v  is  frequently  contracted  before  — ,,  as  in 
the  word  U^,  bind;  and  words  ending  in  ny  may  be  writ- 
ten in  analogy  with  ^— -«,  any,  by  adding  the  tick.      The 
last  remark  applies  to  such  words  as  bony,  stony,  cony, 
funny,  honey,  briny,  &c. 


194  TITE   NOTE-TAKER. 

4.  When  two  vocal  sounds  occur  together,  as  in  the 
words  aerial,  pean,  pious,  science,  &c.,  one  or  both  of  the 
vowels  should  be  written.     The  former,  which  is  in  most 
cases  the  accented  vowel,  is  to  be  preferred  when  equally 
convenient. 

5.  Vocalization  will  be  frequently  necessary  in  the  fol- 
lowing cases : — 

a.  In  writing  proper  names  of  persons  and  places. 

b.  In  quotations  from  the  Latin,  Greek,  German,  French, 
and  other  foreign  languages. 

c.  In  technical  terms  used  in  the  arts  and  sciences. 

d.  In  all  unusual  words,  or  words  used  in  an  unusual 
connection,  or  in  a  peculiar  sense. 

REM.  1. — Words  generally  considered  technical  or  uncommon 
may  be  sufficiently  familiar  to  some  persons  to  be  treated  like 
ordinary  words.  The  purpose  of  the  writing,  and  the  knowledge 
of  the  subject,  will  determine  the  amount  of  vocalization  necessary  to 
perspicuity.  It  is  only  necessary  that  the  manuscript  be  easily  read 
by  the  parties,  and  for  the  purposes,  for  which  it  was  written. 

2.  The  careless  writing  of  bare  skeletons  of  consonant  letters, 
without  any  reference  to  their  legibility,  so  common  among  amateurs 
in  phonography,  should  be  discouraged  by  the  teacher. 

130.  A  fifth  requirement  of  legibility  is  a 
proper  regard  to  the  relations  of  words  in  the 
sentence. 

Words  that  are  used  in  familiar  phrases,  or  in 
constructions  that  are  familiar,  become  more 
easily  legible  from  the  connection  in  which  they 
stand.  But  words  that  are  isolated,  or  used  in 
unusual  connections,  or  in  peculiar  senses,  demand 


CHAPTEE    XI.  195 

more  care  in  the  writing  to  render  them  easily 
legible. 

SPEC.  1. —  The  power  of  position  in  a  sentence  to  add  to 
the  legibility  of  word-forms  is  illustrated  in  nearly  all  the 
phrases  given  in  Tables  B,  C,  D,  and  E,  and  in  Reading 
Lessons,  pages  13,  14,  and  15.  Properly  made  phrase- 
signs  will  aid  the  reader  by  making  the  connection  of  the 
words  "more  noticeable.  The  word  same,  for  instance, 
becomes  definite  in  the  phrase  _£""",  the  same,  since  the 
word  some  is  never  preceded  by  the  article  the. 

2.  The  joining  of  words,  however,  not   associated   in 
sense,  would  lessen  rather  than  increase  the  ease  of  read- 
ing by  intimating  a  connection  between  the  words  that  did 
not  exist. 

3.  Where  words  are  isolated  in  construction,  as  in  the 
following  sentences,  they  need  to  be  distinguishable  in 
form. 

Ex. — JSut  the  fruit  of  the  spirit  is  love,  joy,  peace,  long- 
suffering,  gentleness,  goodness,  faith,  meekness,  temper- 
ance. Can  youth,  or  health,  or  strength,  or  honor,  or 
pleasure  satisfy  the  soul  f  I  have  seen  the  effects  of  love 
and  hatred,  joy  and  grief,  hope  and  despair. 

REM.  1.  —  Even  in  these  cases,  the  reader  is  aided  somewhat  by 
the  context,  for  he  would  not  look  for  any  evil  affection  or  passion 
among  the  fruits  of  the  spirit ;  and  in  the  last  example,  the  contrast 
suggests  the  contrasted  word.  So  in  nearly  all  cases  the  context 
will  aid  the  reader  to  a  greater  or  less  extent ;  but  he  should  not 
rely  too  much  upon  it,  but  take  care  that  all  isolated  words  be  writ- 
ten clearly  and  definitely. 

2.  Uncommon  words,  and  those  of  doubtful  signification,  with 
words  from  foreign  languages,  mentioned  in  the  preceding  section, 
cannot,  from  the  nature  of  the  case,  be  referred  with  safety  to  the 


196  TTTE    NOTE-TAKETC. 

context  for  explanation,  but.  must  be  legible  independent  of  their 
connection. 

3.  Proper  names  that  are  mentioned  among  words  needing  vocali- 
zation may  also  be  considered  as  isolated  words,  as  they  are  not 
generally  inferable  from  the  sense  of  the  passage  in  which  they 
stand.  Outlines  chosen  for  autographs  should  be  easily  legible. 


CONCLUSION. 

131.  When  the  student  has  gone  through  the 
preceding  pages,  and  the  writing  and  reading 
lessons  which  follow,  he  is  advised  to  review  the 
entire  work,  and x  to  review  it  a  second  time,  if 
necessary  to  its  complete  mastery.  In  no  study 
will  thoroughness  bear  better  fruit.  He  should 
not  rest  satisfied,  however,  with  the  mastery  of 
this  little  text-book,  but  apply  the  principles 
of  the  style  in  a  larger  variety  of  exercises,  taken 
from  works  of  value,  by  which  he  may  add  to 
his  knowledge  of  the  best  literature  while  giv- 
ing it  a  beautiful  expression  in  the  Note-Taker's 
style  of  Tachygraphy. 


CHAPTEE    XI.  197 


WETTING   EXERCISE  TWENTY-SECOND. 

Form,  formal,  formalism,  formalist,  formality,  for- 
mally, formation,  formative,  former,  formerly. 

Conform,  conformable,  conformably,  conformation,  con- 
former,  conformist,  conformity.  Deform,  deformation, 
deformer,  deformity. 

Inform,  informal,  informality,  informant,  information, 
informative,  informer,  informity,informous,  inconformity, 
misform,  misinform,  misinformation,  multiform. 

Perform,  performable,  performance,  performer.  ^Re- 
form, reformation,  reformation,  reformative,,  reforma- 
tory, reformer,  reformist.  Retiform,  scutiform.  Trans- 
form, transformation,  transformative,  transforming.  Uni- 
form, uniformity,  uniformly,  uninformed,  vermiform. 

CONGRESSIONAL  ORTHOEPY. — A  phonographic  corres- 
pondent writing  from  Washington  to  the  Cincinnati  Com- 
mercial some  years  ago  said,  — 

"During  a  rough  and  tumble  debate  on  the  confiscation 
bill  yesterday,  I  paid  a  little  attention  to  the  manner  in 
which  certain  words  of  common  use  in  the  ^English  lan- 
guage were  pronounced  by  different  members.  About  twenty 
per  cent  of  the  representatives  had  something  to  say.  The 
Constitootion  was  talked  of  freely,  and  great  love  for  the 
instrument  was  expressed;  eloquent  appeals  in  behalf  of 
the  institooshuns  of  our  country  were  made,  and  it  was 
generally  conceded  they  were  very  great  indeed.  Several 
inquiries  were  made  by  rural  members  as  to  v;har  certain 
authority  was  obtained  from,  and  the  reply  generally  was 
that  if  the  inquirer  would  look  in  the  right  place,  he  would 
find  it  thar.  It  seemed  to  be  a  mooted  question  whether 


198  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

Congress  had  the  right  to  con-fis-cate  anything.  It  was 
asked  if  a  dooplicate  copy  of  something  or  other  could  not 
be  made,  and  a  gentleman  was  referred  to  the  Smithsonian 
Institoot/or  an  opportoonity  to  get  what  he  wanted.  Life, 
liberty,  and  the  pursoot  of  happiness  were  declared  the  con- 
stitushunal  rights  of  everybody.  The  democrats  thought 
the  republicans  were  revolootionary.  Eu-ro-pean  prece- 
dents were  quoted;  and  at  home,  here,  we  were  referred  to 
the  fine  States  o/"Ohia,  Injiany,  Noo  York,  and  Missooruh. 
These  were  all  prodoocing  States.  Everybody  was  either  a 
com-bat-ant  or  a  non-  com-bat-ant.  The  G\iver-ment  was 
assailed,  and  the  Gfover-ment,  was  defended.  The  Soo- 
preme  Court  was  thought  to  be  the  highest  law  power  in 
the  land.  Mr.  Sooard  was  said  to  be  the  Secretary  of 
State,  and  Mr.  TZoochanan  the  last  President.  Tlie  abeli- 
tionists  were  declared  to  be  fan-atics.  A  great  many  men 
had  been  enlisted  for  three  years,  or  dooring  the  war;  but 
the  quoto  of  some  States  was  not  full  yet.  Reference  was 
made  to  pro-vo  marshals,  provost  marshals,  and  the  Pro-vo 
Marshal  General.  High  eulogies  were  passed  upon  tlie 
people  of  certain  deestricks  because  they  had  done  their 
dooty  in  filing  up  the  old  rigiments.  Men  who  didn't 
enlist  were  advised  to  get  substitoots.  Finally,  somebody 
offered  a  resolootion  that  the  Souse  adjourn,  and  the 
members  went  home  to  sleep  over  their  imperfect  accentua- 
tion and  pronunciation." 

A  UNIVERSAL  ALPHABET.  —  We  cannot  but  render  hom- 
age to  the  efforts  made  by  the  powerful  minds  of  those  who 
have  striven  to  reduce  to  a  satisfactory  unity  the  lament- 
able diversity  of  signs  {alphabets}  which  have  thrown  such 
obstacles  in  the  way  of  truth,  and,  either  by  fortuitous  or  de- 
signed resemblance,  have  so  long  retarded  the  progress  of 


CHAPTER    XI.  199 

the  comparative  study  of  languages,  and  their  etymological 
affinity  so  important  to  their  philosophical  development, 
and,  consequently,  the  knowledge  of  their  real  origin,  as 
well  as  of  the  characters  employed  in  writing,— funda- 
mental principles  which,  in  referring  each  language  to  its 
true  source,  would  enable  us  to  study  each  group  of  lan- 
guages at  the  same  time,  and  thus  to  obtain,  (if  it  were 
possible  to  tlevote  sufficient  time  to  each}  an  universal 
knowledge  of  languages. 

To  illustrate  this  proposition  by  an  example,  the  study 
of  the  languages  named  Arabic,  Hebreio,  Samaratan, 
Ethiopic,  Syriac,  and  Chaldean  might,  to  a  certain  extent, 
be  reduced  to  the  study  of  only  one,  and  a  knowledge  of  the 
alphabets  of  each  of  the  others,  —  alphabets  founded,  for 
the  most  part,  upon  circumstances  which  have  wholly  past 
away,  but  which,  nevertheless,  have  given,  and  still  con- 
tinue to  give,  to  each  of  the  above-named  languages  an 
appearance  of  individuality  which  they  do  not  in  reality 
possess,  but  which  will  subsist  until  this  appearance  shall 
vanish,  and  all  these  languages  be  written  with  the  same 
alphabet,  whereby  it  would  at  once  be  apparent  that  they 
are  really  dialects  of  one  and  the  same  mother-language, 

—  the  Arabic,    An  able  professor,  who  should  occupy  his 
scholars  in  this  wide  field  of  inquiry,  explaining  the  rules 
of  the  mother-tongue,  and  the  exceptions  and  peculiar  char- 
acter of  its  dialects,  might  teach  six  languages,  or  rather 
an  entire  family  of  languages  at  the  same  time. 

An  analogous  idea,  but  of  less  easy  execution,  has  been 
suggested,  namely,  the  composition  of  an  universal  alpha- 
bet, or  one  embracing  at  least  all  the  languages  of  Europe. 

—  SYLVESTEKB'S  P ALLOGRAPH Y. 


200  THE   NOTE-TAKEK. 


WRITING   EXERCISE  TWENTY-THIRD. 

No  EXCELLENCE  WITHOUT  LABOR.  —  The  education, 
moral  and  intellectual,  of  every  individual  must  be  chiefly 
his  own  work.  Rely  upon  it  that  the  ancients  were  right, 
—  Quisque  suae  fortunae  faber.  JSoth  in  morals  and  intel- 
lect, we  give  their  final  shape  to  our  own  characters,  and 
thus  become  emphatically  the  architects  of  our  own  for- 
tunes. How  else  could  it  happen  that  young  men  who 
have  had  precisely  the  same  opportunities  should  be  con- 
tinually presenting  us  with  such  different  results,  and 
rushing  to  such  opposite  destinies..  Difference  of  talent 
will  not  solve  it,  because  that  difference  very  often  is  in 
favor  oftJie  disappointed  candidate.  You  shall  see  issuing 
from  the  watts  of  the  same  college,  —  nay,  sometimes  from 
the  bosom  of  the  same  family, —  two  young  men  of  whom 
the  one  shall  be  admitted  to  be  a  genius  of  a  high  order, 
the  other  scarcely  above  the  point  of  mediocrity.  Yet,  you 
shall  see  the  genius  sinking  and  perishing  in  poverty, 
obscurity,  and  wretchedness,  while,  on  the  other  hand,  you 
shall  observe  the  mediocre  plodding  his  slow  and  sure  way 
up  the  hill  of  life,  gaining  steadfast  footing  at  every  step, 
and  mounting  at  length  to  eminence  and  distinction, — an 
ornament  to  his  family,  a  blessing  to  his  country. 

And  of  this  be  assured,  —  I  speak  from  observation  a 
certain  truth, —  there  is  no  excellence  without  great  labor. 
It  is  the  fiat  of  fate,  from  which  no  power  of  genius  can 
ever  absolve  you.  If  genius  be  desirable  at  all,  it  is  only 
of  that  great  and  magnanimous  kind  which,  like  the  con- 
dor of  /South  America,  pitches  from  the  summit  of  Chim- 
borazo,  above  the  clouds,  and  sustains  herself  at  pleasure 
in  that  empyreal  region  with  an  energy  rather  invigorated 


CHAPTER    XI.  201 

than  weakened  by  the  effort.  It  is  this  capacity  for  high 
and  long-continued  exertion,  this  vigorous  poioer  of  pro- 
found and  searching  investigation,  this  careering  and 
wide-spreading  comprehension  of  mind,  and  those  long 
reaches  of  thought 

TMt  pluck  IrigJit  honor  from  the  pale-faced  moon, 
Or  dive  into  the  bottom  of  the  deep, 
Where  fathom  line  could  never  touch  the  ground, 
And  drag  up  drowned  honor  by  the  locks. 

This  is  the  prowess,  and  these  the  hardy  achievements, 
which  are  to  enroll  your  names  among  the  great  men  of 
the  earth. — WIRT. 

WEITIXG. — Whatever  be  the  fate  of  this  or  that  system, 
though  every  author  perish  without  a,  name,  yet  the  art  of 
writing  is  not  only  commanding  in  its  origin  and  history, 
but  is  beautiful  in  its  graceful  perfections,  and  imposing 
in  its  proper  imagery.  T/ie  true  imagery  of  writing  is 
culled  then  from  the  sublime  and  beautiful  in  nature;  and 
here  the  mind  cannot  but  contemplate  its  advent  among 
the  Hebrews  with  mingled  emotions  of  veneration,  awe, 
devotion,  admiration,  and  pleasure.  The  summit  of  Sinai 
is  clad  with  vivid  lightnings,  and  rocked  by  the  awful 
thunders  of  the  Eternal,  while  amid  the  conflicting  ele- 
ments and  blazonry  of  heaverfs  artillery  the  pen  of  the 
Law-giver  is  put  forth  to  give  his  divine  law,  and  the  first 
tracings  of  this  proud  art  to  man.  There  he  grouped  in 
lessened  lines  the  sun  in  his  glorif,  and  the  moon  in  her 
unshorn  majesty,  the  varied  shore,  the  straits,  the  indenta- 
tions, the  sparkling  islands,  and  culminating  leaves  of  the 
ocean.  He  blent  the  windings  of  the  Euphrates  and  Jor- 
dan with  the  oaks  of  Bashan  and  the  cedars  of  Lebanan; 
with  the  rainbow  of  the  cloud  he  capped  the  tall  pines  of 


202  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

Tdumea,  and  mingled  the  rich  shrubbery  of  Paradise  with 
the  spiral  furs  of  Sidonia.  Every  dot  was  a  star,  and 
every  cross  [dash]  a  line  of  light  from  the  eternal  hills; 
and  when  the  whole  was  finished,  this  wondrous  art  flamed 
out  from  t/ie  bosom  of  the  rock,  bearing  the  solemn  and 
divine  injunction  of  the  moral  law,  as  rules  of  action  for 
all  mankind.  —  KBY  TO  SPENCER'S  PENMANSHIP. 


WRITING   EXERCISE  TWENTY-FOURTH. 

WRITING  WELL.  —  When  a  man  would  speak  well,  he 
must  conceive  clearly  t/ie  ideas  which  he  desires  to  express; 
and  if  he  would  write  well,  he  must  have  distinctly  im- 
pressed on  his  mind  the  characters  w\ich  he  means  to 
exhibit.  To  illustrate  the  second  essential  of  good  writing, 
viz.,  power  of  execution,  by  the  same  analogy,  however 
just  and  clear  a  marts  conceptions  may  be,  if  his  utter- 
ance be  labored,  slow,  and  timid,  his  discourse  ^cill  be 
imperfect  and  unsatisfactory.  In  like  manner,  iftlie  let- 
ters be  well  formed,  but  combined  and  arranged  without 
ease  or  gracefulness,  the  writing  will  never  be  thought 
beautiful  or  pleasing.  By  long  experience  and  observa- 
tion in  teaching,  we  are  induced  to  believe  that  but  a  small 
proportion  of  minds  are  deficient  in  the  faculty  of  appre- 
hending proportionate  forms,  and  happy  blending  of 
imagery,  reflected  throfigh  the  medium  of  the  eye.  Such 
apprehension  is  generally  developed  with  the  greatest  quick- 
ness, particularly  when  tlie  judgment  is  assisted  in  its 
decisions  by  the  active  power  and  happy  opportunity  of 
comparison  presented.  Imagery,  commended  to  our  favor- 
able notice  and  selection  when  young,  by  those  we  love,  and 


CHAPTER   XI.  203 

on  whose  judgment  we  depend,  or  left  unforbidden  to  vol- 
untary selection  amid  our  school-boy  scenes,  when  the 
young  heart  first  begins  to  revel  amid  Nature's  varied 
charms,  and  drink  the  smiles  from  friendship's  sun-lit 
brow,  makes  a  deep  and  lasting  impression,  which  time 
and  toil  and  age  can  scarcely  mar,  and  never  obliterate. 
Such  is  our  nature.  It  is  the  poetry  as  well  as  the  reality 
of  our  existence,  embalming  the  scenery  we  loved  in  the 
innocent  days  of  untried  being. 

Better  is  it  for  the  noviciate  in  the  art  of  writing  to  sit 
down  alone  with  his  materials  and  copy  the  moon  in  all 
her  phases,  borrow  from  the  serpentinings  of  the  brook 
that  meanders  at  his  feet,  bring  the  Lombardy  poplar  to 
his  aid,  follow  the  curve  of  the  pendant  willow  from  ten- 
dril to  stamen,  and  bind  the  whole  with  the  undulating 
folds  of  the  woodbine,  and  then  call  it  chiroyraphy,  than 
depend  for  a  model  of  his  hand  on  those  miserable  pro- 
ductions that,  without  form  or  comeliness,  pain  and  per- 
plex, and  against  the  worship  of  which  there  is  no  com- 
mand, either  specified  or  implied.  He  would  thus  have 
•more  of  nature,  and  therefore  more  of  the  true  art  of 
writing. 

Thus,  the  proper  images  of  writing  being  implanted  in 
the  mind,  by  having  them  early  before  the  eye,  are  adopted 
by  the  judgment  after  comparison  has  done  its  labor  and 
doubt  has  ceased. 

The  power  to  bring  forth  such  imagery  on  paper  is  latent 
in  the  arm,  forearm,  hand,  and  fingers,  and  can  only  be 
developed  by  exercises  that  affect  these  auxiliary  localities, 
and  bring  a  fourfold  power  to  act  conjointly  with  ease 
and  skill. 

Without  a  free  and  unobstructed  constant  horizontal 


204  THE    NOTE-TAKER. 

movement  from  right  to  left  through  the  whole  line,  the 
writing  will  be  wanting  in  harmony  of  slope,  ease,  and 
truthfulness  of  combination. 

But  when  oil  these  movements  are  practiced  fully  and 
systematically,  all  the  muscles  from  the  shoulder  down- 
wards develop  themselves  rapidly,  and  power  is  gained 
over  the  pen  to  bring  forth  the  adopted  imagery  of  tlie 
mind  in  all  the  grace  and  elegance  that  spring  from  just 
proportions  and  easy  execution. 

Practice,  to  be  sure,  is  indispensable  in  bringing  to  per- 
fection any  art,  science,  or  profession. 

The  pupil  must  not  expect  to  be  able  at  once  to  execute 
what  he  fully  comprehends.  Patience  and  energy  are 
required  to  attain  a  thorough  and  perfect  command  of 
hand.  There  is  no  royal  road  by  which  idleness  and  indif- 
ference may  find  their  way  to  a  goal  which  is  only  to  be 
reached  by  diligent  and  well-directed  application.  The 
only  process  really  short  is  such  as  is  made  so  by  com- 
mencing in  a  right  manner  from  the  outset,  securing  the 
advantage  of  the  instructions  of  an  experienced  teacher  till 
the  object  is  accomplished.  And  when  the  object  is  accom- 
plished, how  beautiful  and  imposing  are  the  specimens  of 
art  which  the  proficient  is  able  to  produce!  The  eye 
glances  along  the  well-written  page  with  as  much  pleasure 
as  it  rests  on  a  beautiful  grove  when  nature  and  art  have 
unitedly  tasked  themselves  to  blend  the  greatest  variety 
with  the  utmost  symmetry.  —  SPENCER'S  PENMANSHIP. 


ItllllH^il^G:!! 


Ti;  .->SJi—  J*.'- -i* 


[(ESSON  Km. 


LESSON  THIRD. 

V_AJ—  VJlx-w- 

4.  (See  Set.'l*.          *J 


9        }         J          9 
-  •/      -f—^      •£-+>    -s 


J.    5.        ,^- 


J> 

/ 


.  6. 


A 


n 
I-  —  ^        U-~v         l^v    .      7 


.    \0 


)' 

*1 


10  . 


u^> 


X 


11. 


^^j 

tittlim  £mm 


/i/vo — 
14.      ^     n  ^     JL_     </ 

C  ^U~7      ~\    L    - 


mm. 

^Lf*~ 


.*x 


T 


U  % 


'-v         — V   V~"V'   \ 

^  .    <— ^^     S~-* —   I    ~^v 
<i  '         \t   s          w 

-%,   "  _^Z_   ^   "  ^    *  ^X-^  L-"   ^  ^^ 

,  -^.     V  «    —    ^    - 

r^  ^    ^  —    l/\_ 


15.   f    f 


18.  a. 


.   16. 


.  IT. 


19. 


.  20. 


U, 


.  21. 


23.  - ^  |X^ 

_ ^, ^~  : 

-3     -^^     ^    , 

^  ^rr^  y  ^  - 

^  ^) 


^v-^     ^   . 

en-.  ^  i-i_> 

-7  Iv       V^     . 


so. 


31.  <T 
32. 

b.  V    2s- 

33. 


* —    •  -A 


40. 
41. 

43. 


46. 


1, 


.    44.  a,,  r* 


47 


•  -o  1 


.   50. 


51 


J> 


52. 

53.   5 


.    55 .  a . 


.    54. 

/ 

VN      .      C. 


56. 


58. 
59. 


V 


.   60 


v 

.  63. 


10 


68.  a. 


70. 


^T 

^    .  69. 


"-f 


1 


81 


18. 


2 


J 


11 


wELPTH. 


79. 


°V-   ^t .   80.     ^~< 


82. 


°^ 

<"-!  9           9  \_ 

jj^^/    u v — ^x  a — ^- 

^  ~3  O 

86.  V-^7 


• 83-'  ^" 

.    84. 


.  85. 


/> 


.   87. 


.    88. 


.  89. 


90- 


CA- 


vJl 


L_ 


^^?        V A-^^x       ^    ,       ~~~3      ^    ^X 

-L.,  i,  ^-VK"^^  n  ^^  ' 


12 


91  .   6^  —  ' 
93.  ^    °7 

i,  ~X_,  95  • 
3    97.    1    I    1 
99.     " 


100. 


.  103. 


.  104  . 


105. 


92  . 


94. 


96.  .3 


98. 


101. 


>XH 


1        \  A        P 


13 


106.  a. 


107.  "1    S 


X 


108. 


109. 


K, 


ill.  u. 


.  112. 


.  us. 


114. 


115. 


.  I 


y    y 


117.    --XV_      ^     ^  </         7.   118.   O 

&$**e0€kfe^  ^ — -  "L    1    - 

\ 


S 


.    -\S~ 

~*  ^  ^  ' 

•1»  /    L    — -< 


^   ri    1-i^ 


14 


(7 


119. 


.    120. 


.  121. 


\ 


124.  a.. 


P 


\S    <^^   123. 

b.  ~- 
.    125. 
.    126. 
127.    1j»    3— 


^— ^(     o-^— 

128.  )  r^  y^v  V 


.  130. 


s 


.     Ckp.  1. 


15 


~«—        "V~.      A.      ~1        "~l    .       C. 

.    of.   "    ~|    "^—j  .     133.    <=- 

.     134 .    c^^ 
135.    u ^_     L_ 


136- 


V, 


t 


Chap.  1 
•*  _  *• 


.     2 


.  S.    «^a—  D 


4. 

V 


>1 


16 


~r 


*,  -*.-, 
<2_ 


^  j 


3 


1 


VOCABULARY. 


The  following  word-forms,  brought  together  and  arranged  alpha- 
betically for  greater  convenience,  are,  mostly,  illustrations  of  the 
principles  scattered  throughout  the  volume. 


L 

vt 


A 

A,  aye  (forever). 

-.         \       advise, 
^     J       after. 

abbreviate, 
brevity. 

\S^  —  ~*^~  agrarianism. 
"N^             agree. 

acceptance, 
accessible. 

f  /   ^         aimed,  almighty. 
/__,  ^        already,  although. 

access, 
accession. 

J                Alsace. 

^~~~^S*~***: 

accident, 
accidental. 

^^3         analysis. 
/         ancestor. 

acclaim, 
accomplish. 

"<-^J          anciently. 

c^—  \^        angel. 

accompany. 

^~\^J\     angelic. 

act,  addition. 

^-~  —    —  "    anger. 

adjoin. 

^^*X          angry. 

adjust. 

v^_    ^s*    another. 

advantage, 
advantages. 

^^   ^        ant,  &c. 

adverb,  adverse. 

"~~  1^—  anthropology. 

223 

224 

VOCABULARY. 

^-^N  any,  anything. 

f    I             blow,  bone,  boon. 

1 

apotheosis. 

[_^  —           boned,  bound. 

1/^5 

apprehensive. 

1                   bounty. 

t  j- 

-""^^            O 

V  -1 

apt,  art. 
article,  as. 
>       ask,  assess. 

T    'Y          briskly, 
%  <—  -        bristol. 

I    Ix-7        bubble, 
1                  burn. 

x~<— 

astride. 

V 

auspicious, 
azure. 

aye  (yes). 

c 

<f*~^         Caesar. 
^^^x^0      CaBsarea. 

B 

\  *s           call,  called. 

\Lr 

back, 
baptism. 

\^  \^     card,  cart. 
\j   \.-*^    case,  cases. 

UJl 

base,  basket. 

~X      (*        cast,  cession. 

i  i, 

2  f 

be,  bee. 

^    bean, 
because. 

°7  <H>          chair,  chance. 
^-^>  <s~~w/^  chess,  Cicero. 

0  U    i 

best,  bestow. 

tf^-°  —  o        circumstance. 

L\! 

J  bid,  big, 
bill. 

QA               cisalpine. 

U,U- 

bind,  binder. 

c:^>\j-^  c^ean»  coalition. 

•7 

bindery. 

^^           coast. 

VOCABULARY. 


225 


IT. 


5 


coaster. 

^                contravene. 

command. 

\i   ^)      coal,  cool. 

commend. 

\__  —         count,  county. 

commander. 

v^__^-       counter. 

commingle. 

\J  \y        culture,  cultured. 

commission, 

commissioner. 

commit,  common. 

D 

communion. 

/             danger. 

comply,  compress. 

concede. 

^L      \j    dealt,  deception. 

concomitant. 

c  —  —  r;      dear,  dense. 

condense. 

-      °          debts,  doubts. 

conduce. 

~J              dell,  dull. 

confession. 

"=  ^         dent,  dental. 

congratulation. 

I        describe. 

consent. 

—  ^   _  ^    dissect,  desert. 

consider. 

)             difficult-y. 

consists-ence. 

_  ^ 

console. 

\^,      discipline. 

^^L            disclose. 

constitute. 

contradict. 

—  e\}       discretion. 

VOCABULARY. 

disorder, 
dissuade, 
distress. 

^           exclaim. 
\^-^     exercise. 

do,  done, 
down,  dun. 

Vs  ^^        exist,  existence. 

^N?   ^N^.       explain, 
^      {>      express. 

E 

X^               extra,  cast. 

each,  eat. 

F 

earns, 
earth. 

edge,  effort. 

3    i  Q  —     fable, 
I                  falsehood. 

elder, 
elementary. 

elements,  else, 
less. 

y~*s  }        familiar, 
/^     favor. 

\  }    J       fetter, 
LS        filter. 

elsewhere. 

^\          \      fiscal, 
^~^  J>     fisher. 

emission. 

r"  J/*^  form,  forward. 

encumbrance. 

\                  found. 

end,  enter, 
equal. 

I  ^         founder. 

elision, 
error,  ever. 

C_s  —         foundry. 
n              fragile. 

V 

VOCABULARY.                                   227 

G 

=    ^-^S    hungry. 

•=-±7 

general,  generally 

^~^_^    hunter. 

^y 

gent,  gentle. 

I 

c^° 

gentleman-en. 

V     V 

get,  got, 

v    v  —       I,  eye,  idea. 

*£> 

'  gospel. 

S<L  ,  immortal. 

v^> 

grad  ual  ,  gradually 

n^   T«          impart,  imply. 

«\9 

graduation.  . 

*  i  ?  j       impel,  impels. 

X~J 

grandeur. 

"1    "]          impress,  improve. 

V 

Grecian. 

^  <J            inbred,  incline. 

\y          income. 

H 

2  index. 

v^ 

half,  hard,  heard. 

y    ^        injure,  initial. 

<^~-^ 

harden. 

*^-> 

hardy. 

^    \/        insect,  inspire. 

Q       »-*i 

\  hasty,  hath. 

3—0             instance. 

C- 

-,_                institute. 

£t 

he,  head. 

_    /y>        instruction, 

\   f~ 

heavy,  him. 

/         insure. 

* 

^-__^^—  ^intercommunicate 

<fj    -* 

himself,  how. 

-^ 

^  J  intercommunion. 

53 

however, 
howsoever. 

a  —             into,  intra,  intro. 

228 


VOCABULARY. 


) 


intransive. 

M 

intrepid. 

*-j>>             magnanimous. 

intrigue. 

introduce, 
intrude. 

K 

knowledge. 

'  JL           magnificent. 
'            \^  mainspring. 

/^~            matter, 
1                 mutter. 

/^~*>           matters, 
'                  mutters. 

know,  no. 

^2—           melt,  moult. 

L 

s*\         member. 

lagged,  large. 

f7  f  —  D   men,  mention. 

language,  long. 

larger, 
latter. 

3              mental. 
r~\  —  £       methodism. 

length. 

)         mischief. 

lessen,  lesson. 

letter, 
letters. 

(y~         misinform. 
(  —  ^-c—      misjudge. 

linger. 

^"T           misplace. 

local,  lofty. 

(?             mission. 

-longer. 

f^s        mistranslated. 

VOCABULARY. 


229 


^~\\J     mock,  mole. 
(O  /O        move,  muff. 

1     s            O  !  oh  !  owe. 
4   1             object,  objection. 

A  4              objective, 
"  'N//       obscure. 

N 

<^l/>'^^     obsequeous. 

1  obstruct. 

(^J          national. 

(_J           nationality. 
•        i      nature,  natural. 

,^     \        occasional, 
fj  *^j  offspring. 

>     ,/^       ocean,  omission. 

^^             naturally. 

^   ^          office, 
)  ^"^         offices. 

^_£yS         necessary. 

•  —  •  {/^>     on,  own,  one. 

-^_^-"  —       need,  undo. 

^_^c^         onward. 

~X"^         neighbor. 
-.  -     neither. 

l^^^^—       opportunity. 
"1     -^-r^?      option,  ourselves. 

^~r    q          nevertheless. 
~"V^          nothing. 

^^^  —       outrage. 

A     *)          over, 
'    1^-        overwhelm. 

^S~~          notwithstanding. 

P 

v_x^              now. 

I        }           pannier,  part. 

number. 

JA^     J        particle,  pebble. 

230 


VOCABULAET. 


1   I 


perceive, 
perhaps. 

UT           proposition, 
!__,      propriety. 

perish,  pet. 

1     1            prosper, 
*     \          provisional. 

pets,  pent, 
phonography. 

1                   Prussian. 

physical, 
picture. 

pictures,  pleasure. 

\f-  I/""      pursue,  pursued. 

Q 

possess,  possest. 

^0            qualify. 

post,  poster. 

practicable, 
practical. 

practice, 
preacher. 

d/"""*  —     quench. 
oSL--'          question. 

R 

^**~^       races. 

precede,  proceed. 

JCx  /*)  reason,  received. 

press,  presses. 

^*s    ^       recess. 

principle, 
principles. 

x/~-^>         recognition. 

professional, 
professionally. 

/        /      recommence, 
^  —  °  £**     recommend. 

prophecy, 
prophecies. 

^    C^      redemption. 
x/Ni_-x/     regular. 

VOCABULARY.                                   231 

regularly. 

5—  ^>            sanctification. 
U 

remark. 

<^2  °\         sanction,  save. 

remembrance. 

rf  —  s  °\_^   says,  screen. 

render  (^"fa"). 

'""(^           secession. 

render  (°«nT.h.°). 

V^  <i—^      section,  seen. 

rendition. 

}  /~^^     self-admiring. 

rent,  represent. 

±X  ^J       selfish,  sell. 

respect,  rest. 

(J—  O  Q^.      senses,  sensual. 

restrain. 

(     1  j         shackle, 
•x^                shall,  shell. 

revision, 
risen. 

(shatter, 
shutter. 

river. 

7    ^^          short,  sit,  seat. 

rosin. 

•^~X.^  ^   sickly,  signify. 

runs. 

Q                 significant. 

s 

<^s              8mg>  sung. 

sad,  sadder. 

/  /^  slaughter,  siuatte 

saddle,  safe. 

£~}            smooth. 

232 

VOCABULARY. 

1    9 

sober,  social. 

Q—c^_s         sustain. 

^                          ck 

society,  soft. 

/^            system. 

o 

sole,  soul. 

T 

/•^-x 

soon,  sown. 

—  &v             tachygraphy 

^^_ 

sound. 

\                 (ta-k*)- 

^"U 

south,  spring. 

/            teacher.' 

a— 

stir,  strew,  setter. 

—n  ~^»        tell,  tool,  ten. 

^_2       tension. 

o        - 

strayed. 

«  _          test. 

r/" 

stream. 

\^  ^s    "^  than,  that,  thee. 

f  J5 

subject,subjective 

'^V-*/      Atheism,  then. 

^S 

subsist, 
subscribe. 

**-^  "^"  theist,  them. 

(^  ^_          these,  they. 

Sr~N  \D 

success, 

'  G 

succession. 

"^\  "^  ^\  thing,this,  though 

^M 

successive, 
superb. 

Q_       J~  till,  time. 

P  p 

sup,  supped. 

—  v      ^     together, 
toward. 

1  ? 

supper,  sure. 

c  —  <**s          transact. 

I 

suspicious. 

c    CN^           tranHfrrass. 

VOCABULARY. 


233 


V 


—          transit. 

w 

/          translucent. 

<^/             wellspriiig. 

true,  turn. 

V-/ 

u 

<  -  CP     when,  whensoever 

x        uncommon. 

*^^  }        wheresoever. 

under. 

/  6          while,  whim. 

—  '         undo,  need. 

•      /          who,  whole. 

°\  unsatisfied. 

"^  "^          whosoever, 

<v 

*          whosesoever. 

NA     unscrew. 

j                wholly. 

-\^x     unstrung. 

^J  t/J       will,  willed. 

up,  us. 

c^            withdraw. 

v^y>    urgent,  urgently. 

o 

>-^*"              word,  ward. 

cS]      use,  useful. 

^"S.           wreathe. 

—o        utter,  utters. 

/'^-^         wrongs. 

V 

Y 

value. 

n    «^         ye,  you. 

^          vascular. 

Z 

\         verb, 

S        vigil. 

—  o              zest. 

TACHYGRAPHIC  AND  PHONETIC 

PUBLICATIONS. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  TACHIGRAPHT. 

A  Complete  Treatise  on  the  simplest  style  of  the  Art.  Tho  prin- 
ciples are  illustrated  by  numerous  examples  of  short-hand  word- 
forms  inserted  in  the  text;  by  an  extended  series  of  exercises  to 
be  written  by  the  student;  and  by  reading  lessons,  beautifully 
engraved  on  copper.  120  pp.  12mo. 

In  cloth  ....:....  Price,  81.75 

Per  dozen  ........  16.80 

In  boards    ...        ......  1.50 

Per  dozen         ......        .       .  14.40 

Postage  ....  10  cents  a  copy. 


e  Third  Edition  now  on  sale,  is  printed  on  paper  of  the  first 
quality,  in  the  neatest  manner. 

THE  TACHYGRAPHIO  ALPHABET. 

With  directions  for  its  use,  and  reading  Lesson  with  Key     . 

Per  dozen        ..........        75 

THE  RAPID   WRITER  (Quarterly)  for  1869,  '70,  and  'TL 

Volume  1,  bound  in  cloth  (postage  paid)      ....    $1.25 
Rapid  Writer  and  Philological  Magazine  for  January  and 
April,  1873   ...........  2* 

THE  NOTE  TAKER. 

A  full  Treatise  on  the  Second  Style  of  Tachygraphy,  to  follow  the 
"  Elements," 

Bound  in  cloth        ....        .....    $2.75 

ADDRESS, 

A 

No.  3     Beacon  Street,  Boston. 

D.  EIMBALL,  Bex  398,  Chicago,  111. 


NOTICES   OF   THE   PRESS. 


From  the  Cormeaut  (O.)  Beporter. 

For  several  months  we  hav  compard  It  (Tachygraphy)  with  other  systems, 
and  ar  witisflcd  that  thin  is  the  best.  It  is  more  perfect,  easier  to  lern,  easier 
to  read,  and  better  adapted  to  general  use. 


From  Rev.  Peter  Vogel,  in  the  Christian  Standard,  Cincinnati,  O- 

It  is  becaus  I  kno  whereof  I  affirm  that  I  desire  to  speak.  So  long  as  men 
bav  not  found  out  the  value  and  convenience  of  any  given  thing,  it  is  no  hard- 
ship for  them  to  do  without  it.  But  who  that  has  livd  in  our  day  of  railroads, 
telegraphs,  printing- preses,  and  kindred  improovments,  cu'd  wish  them  ban- 
isht,  or  desire  to  hav  livd  in  an  age  when  these  wer  unknown  ?  What  these 
ar  to  former  modes  of  travel,  dispatching  news,  or  disseminating  information, 
is  short-hand  to  the  ordinary  means  of  writing.  .  .  .  The  phonography  of 
Pitman,  of  Bath,  Eng.,  surpast  all  previus  systems.  This  system  I  studied, 
practist,  and  taught.  Several  years'  experienc  has  forst  the  conviction  upon 
me  that  as  a  corresponding  style  it  is  worthies,  and  for  reporting  purposes 
only  the  adept  few  wil  ever  use  it.  Tocbygraphy,  which  is  but  a  few  years 
old,  as  a  corresponding  stylo,  is  more  easily  red  than  ordinary  long-hand,  and 
from  three  to  four  times  as  rapidly  written.  This  I  kno  from  experienc. 
As  a  reporting  style  it  is  adequate  to  a  verbatim  report,  more  easily  lernd,  and 
far  more  redily  red,  than  any  other  system  whatever.  I  hav  studied  the  re- 
porting style,  but  do  not  use  it.  The  corresponding  stylo  scrvs  all  my  pur- 
poses better.  My  advice  to  all  literary  men  —  preachers,  lawyers,  doctors, 
clerks  — is,  Study  Tachygraphy. 

From  the  American  Farmer's  Advocate,, Jackson,  Tenn. 

THE  ELEMENTS  OF  TACHYGRAPHY  :  CLOTH,  $2.  —  We  are  indebted  to  the 
publishers  for  a  copy  of  the  abov.  It  is  by  far  the  most  satisfactory  system 
of  "  brief  writing  "  we  hav  ever  examind,  and  we  hope  the  day  is  not  far  dis- 
tant when  it  shal  becora  one  of  the  studies  of  the  common  scool.  To  young 
men,  to  the  students  of  our  colleges,  we  unhesitatingly  advise  that  they  lern 
this  system  of  rapid  writing,  and  practice  it  until  they  bccom  expert.  They 
wil  never  regret  the  three  or  four  months'  time  devoted  to  it. 


From  the  Daily  Journal,  Jacksonville,  111. 

We  hav  taken  pains  to  cxamin  into  Mr.  Lindsley's  system,  which  he  calls 
Tachygruphy,  and  can  now  speak  of  It  in  terms  of  the  highest  commendation. 
PoBgesing  all  the  advantages  of  phonography,  to  which  it  boars  som  resem- 
blance, Tncliygraphy  1ms  so  many  mnrkt  excellences  of  its  own,  that  it  must 
be  considerd  far  in  advance  of  all  other  styles  of  short-hand.  .  .  .  The  case 
with  which  it  can  be  lernd,  written,  and  red;  its  simplicity,  grace,  and  beauty, 
must  commend  it  to  all  who  ar  anxius  for  sorathing  more  economical  of  time 
aud  space  than  our  present  cuiubursom  long-hand. 


From  the  Toledo  (O.)  Democrat. 

The  distinctly  feature  of  this  system  is  continuity  of  pen-stroke  by  means 
of  conncctiv  vowels.  This  principl  is  strongly  illustrated  in  the  superior 
rapidity  of  our  long-hand  writing1,  with  its  coutinuua  stroke,  over  the  ordinary 
Roman  letter  of  print,  requiring1  nearly  every  pen-stroke  to  be  disconnected. 
.  .  .  We  hav  not  time  to  go  further  into  the  subject  at  present.  It  is  one  in 
which  teachers,  clergymen,  authors,  and  students,  as  wel  as  editors  and  re- 
porters, hav  a  deep  interest. 


Prom  the  Detroit  (O.)  Commercial  Advertiser. 
"We  hav  studied  both  these  works  (Graham's  and  Pitman's),  and  our  expe- 
rience is,  that  they  ar  BO  complicated  and  obscure,  and  withal  eo  vast,  that  it 
seems  like  dedicating  one's  life  to  a  wild-goose  chaso  to  attempt  to  lern  it 
(them).  True,  these  systems  can  be  lernd ;  but  then  the  person  wljo  expects 
to  keep  all  these  geometrical  figures  In  his  bed  must  not  expect  to  hav  any- 
thing else  in  his  mind.  After  having  gaind  a  knowledge  of  the  art,  it  then 
requires  years  and  years  of  practice  befor  you  ar  abl  to  use  it  with  any  degree 
of  proficiency.  Seeing  these  great  difflcultis,  we  had  almost  mentally  resolvd 
to  put  our  wits  to  work  to  invent  a  simpler  and  shorter  method,  when  we 
herd  of  the  new  system,  lately  brought  out,  calld  Tachygraphy.  We  hav 
examind  it,  and  find  it  to  be  the  most  elmpl  system  that  we  hav  ever  seen. 
And  not  only  is  it  commendabl  for  its  simplicity,  but  is  actually  interesting 
to  the  student.  Every  mark  used  in  it  is  nicely  calculated  and  laid  out  upon 
general  principle.  ...  If  we  pretend  to  hav  a  reform  in  writing,  we  must  hav 
a  system  that  is  plainly  and  easily  comprehended.  The  times  demand  that 
BOIU  improovmeut  on  the  old  long-hand  system  should  be  mode. 


From  the  Reveille,  (Publisht  at  Gen.  BussePe  Collegiate  and 
Commercial  Institute,  New  Haven,  Ct.). 

This  system  (Tachygraphy)  has  bin  used  in  the  scool  during  the  past  year, 
and  has  proovd  easy  of  acquirement,  and  better  adapted  to  general  use  than 
any  previusly  attempted.  We  recommend  it  to  our  readers. 


From  the  New  Bedford  Evening  Standard. 

Those  desirous  of  lerning  a  short  method  of  writing  wo'd  do  well  to  exam- 
in  this  system. 


From  the  Carver  (111.)  Times. 

The  system  of  Mr.  Lindsley  is  taught  in  first-class  colleges,  and  Is  pre- 
ferred by  reporters  and  professional  men  above  all  others  that  hav  bin  intro- 
duced. 

From  the  Peninsular  Herald,  Detroit. 

The  leading  object  of  the  RAPID  WRITER  Is  to  Introduce  a  simple  and 
practicable  system  of  Rapid  Writing  as  the  general  and  universal  medium  of 
communication.  There  is  a  pressing  want  in  this  direction. 


From  the  Chicago  Daily  News. 

In  Tachygraphy  the  letters  ar  almost  invariabl,  and  easily  memorized.  .  .  . 
For  verbatim  reporting  it  is  equal  to  Phonography,  and  for  all  other  purposes 
far  superior. 


THE  AMERICAN  TAOHYGRAPHIO  ASSOCIATION. 

To  the  Friends  of  Tachygraphy : 

We  Lav  frequent  inquiries  concerning  the  American  Tachy- 
graphic  Association,  and  wish  to  say  to  those  friends  interested 
that  it  is  an  Association  of  such  writers  of  Tachygraphy  as  de- 
sire to  unite  with  others  in  their  efforts  to  increase  their  knowl- 
edge of  the  art,  or  to  aid  in  its  introduction.  Circles  hav 
been  formed  for  correspondence,  which  are  found  to  blend  in- 
struction with  amusement  in  a  happy  manner.  Circulars  explain- 
ing this  mode  of  correspondence  will  be  furnished  on  application, 
and  those  members  desiring  it  will  be  introduced  to  circles. 

The  following  extract  from  the  Constitution  gives  the  terms 
of  admission: — 

ART.  m.  SEC.  1.  Any  writer  of  Tachygraphy  may  become  a  member  of 
this  Association  on  application  to  any  officer  of  the  Association,  and  the  payment 
to  the  Treasurer  of  the  sum  of  one  dollar. 

SEC.  2.  Children  may  be  received  with  the  consent  of  their  parents  or  guar- 
dians at  15  years  of  age,  but  shall  not  be  entitled  to  vote  in  the  elections  for  o ulcers 
of  the  Association  until  they  reach  the  age  of  twenty-one  years. 

SEC.  3.  Each  member  shall  contribute  to  the  funds  of  the  Association,  In  pro- 
portion to  his  ability,  a  sum  not  less  than  twenty-five  cents  annually ;  and  it  shall 
DC  the  duty  of  the  President,  with  the  aid  and  co-operation  of  the  Corresponding 
Committees  of  the  several  districts,  to  organize  and  maintain  circles  for  corresp  ind- 
ence,  to  which  all  members  who  contribute  one  dollar  or  more  yearly  shall  be 
admitted  free. 

SEC.  4.  Any  person  eligible  to  membership  may  become  a  life  member  on  tho 
payment  of  twenty  dollars  at  one  time,  or  five  dollars  a  year  for  five  consecutive 
years,  into  the  treasury  of  the  Association.  Life  members  shall  be  entitled  to  all 
the  advantages  of  the  Association,  without  further  payment  of  dues  or  assess- 
ments. 

SEC.  6.  Persons  not  writers  of  Tachygraphy,  but  friendly  to  Its  Interests,  may 
be  enrolled  as  Patrons  on  the  payment  of  ten  dollars.  They  shall  not  be  eligible 
to  ofQce,  nor  subject  to  any  dues  or  duties. 

Note.  Previous  to  1873,  all  members  were  expected  to  pay  $1  a  year.  It  la 
hoped  that  the  present  arrangement  will  be  more  satisfactory  to  some  who  prefer 
to  pay  for  the  KAPID  WRITEH  and  for  instruction  separately,  and  that  those  who 
are  able  to  do  so  will  contribute  liberally. 

We  hope  that  our  friends,  so  far  as  they  Indorse  these  provi- 
sions, will  endeavor  to  add  to  the  membership  of  the  Associ- 
ation, and  to  organize  branch  societies. 

Tachygraphers  willing  to  serve  the  Association  as  members 
of  the  Corresponding  Committees  are  wanted  to  conduct  circles 
in  all  parts  of  the  country.  Friends  of  the  art,  who  are  rfcady 
for  the  work,  are  requested  to  address  the  President.  A  Circu- 
lar containing  the  districts  to  be  represented,  and  the  nature  of 
the  work,  will  be  sent  on  application.  Every  possible  aid  and 
encouragement  will  be  extended  to  members  who  conduct  circles. 

LKT  ALL  TACUYGRAPHERS  JOIN  TUB  ASSOCIATION.  "  Come 
with  us  and  we  will  do  thee  good !  " 

T.  W.  Hannum,  Hartford,  Conn.,  Secretary. 

D.  Kimball,  Chicago,  111.,  P.  O.  Box  398 ;  Treasurer. 

D.  P  Lindsley,  Andover,  Mass.,  President. 


THE   RAPID  WRITER  QUARTERLY. 


TABLE    OF   CONTENTS. 
i  a  71. 


Wo.  6.  —  January.       PACK 

Report  on  the  New  Short-hand, 
presented  to  the  American  Phi- 
lological Society,  New  York  .  .  81 

The  Cherokee  Alphabet 85 

The  Foundations  of  Despotism.— 

Edward  Everett 85 

Editorial  Items 88 

Correspondence 88 

Literary  Notices 91 

Wo.  7.  —  April. 

Professional  Reporting 97 

The  Saxon  Orthography 99 

Rapid  Writing 101 

Chinese  Printing 103 

Foreign  Correspondence. — Gabels- 
berger's  Stenography 104 

Wo.  8.  — July. 

The  Origin  of  Words.  —Dan  Saxon  113 

1  8 

Wo.  10. —April.  PAGE 
Where  was  Fusang?  An  Inquiry 
into  the  Settlement  of  the  West- 
ern Coast  of  America,  and  the 
Introduction  of  the  Buddhist  Re- 
ligion by  the  Chinese  in,  or  prior 
to,  the  Fifth  Century  of  our 
Era.  15y  Rev.  Nathan  Brown, 

IX  D 1 

The  Sun  an  Kmblem.    Beecher  .  .    13 

Editorial  Items 15 

A  nswers  to  Correspondents  .  ...    17 
Literary  Notices 18 


Wo.  8  —  continued.         PAO» 
What  Clergymen  are  Learning1  .  .  115 

Undo  the  Heavy  Burdens 110 

Friendly  Neutrality 117 

Various  Replies  to  a  Practical  Ques- 
tion   117 

Editorial  Items VJO 

Books  and  Periodicals 121 

Wo.  9.— October. 

The  Origin  of  Words,  No.  3,  writ- 
ten in  Illustration  of  a  New  The- 
ory of  the  Meaning  of  the  Ulti- 
mate Roots  of  Language  ....  129 

Our  Mother  Tongue 131 

Editorial 138 

Extracts  from  Correspondence  .  .  137 

Literary  Notices 138 

Second  Biennial  Address,  by  the 
President  of  the  American  Ta- 
chygraphic  Association 110 

73. 

Wo.  11.  —  October.        PAOB 
The  English  Phonography  —  How 
Managed 19 

The  Helm  of  Language.  Max  Miil- 

ler 22 

Bost  Works  for  Study  in  Philology    23 

Ministerial  Work 24 

Self  and  AH.    Horace  Greeley    .  .    25 
Elihu  Burritt  and  the  Vowel  U .  .    27 

Moov  Forward 28 

EDITORIAL. —  The  Note-taker ;  To 
Old  Phoneticians;  Eight  Styles 
of  Phonography,  &c 31 


1S73. 

The  Rapid  Writer  and  Philological  Magazine. 

No.  12  <fc  13.—  Continued. 


No.  12  <fc  13. — Jan.  and  April. 

PAGE. 

First   Steps   In  the  Invention    of 
Wilting 35 

The  Spelling  of  the  Passive  Parti- 
ciple   38 

Report  on    the    Pronunciation  of 
Greek  and  Latin 39 

Educational  Notes 40 

Volume  1,  comprising  the  first  9  numbers,  (144  pp.)  bound  In  cloth 

Nos.  10  and  11,  unbound 

"      12  and  13,        "  

\ddress,  THE  RAPID  WRITER  ASSOCI  \TIO3T,  ANDOVF.R,  MAS*. 

OTIS  CLAPP  &  SON,  3  Beacon  Street,  Boston,  orD.  KntBAU.,  Chicago,  111., 

P.  O.  Box  398. 


Editorial  — The  New   Spelling.  — 
Elements  of  Tachyeraphy,  Third 
Edition,  — Note  Taker.       ...     43 
Personals    ....      .*......     45 

Book  Table 47 

The  Am.  Tachyfrraphic  Assoc'n   .     49 
Introduction  to  the  Xote  Taker  .  .     58 
25 
25 
25 


OTIS  CLAPP  &  SON, 

NEW-ENQLAND 


No.  3  ALBION  BUILDING, 

BEACON   STF^EET,    -  BOSTON,    MASS. 


German    Hom&opathic    Tinctures, 

Sugar  of  Milk,  Corks,  Homoeopathic  Globules, 

LERHMANN'S,  DUNHAM'S,  AND  TAFEL'3 

IEIIQ-IH: 


iPfiystctans'  and  ^Domestic  Cases, 

And  all  the  latest  and  most  approved 

WORKS    ON     HOMOEOPATHY. 


Aloo,  a  complete  nnoortment  of  everything  pertaining  to  Homoeopathy  nnd 
required  to  complete  11  I'hyni'-lnn'B  outfit. 
All  preparations  warranted  to  be  pure.    Catalogues  sent  free  on  applicntion. 


University  of  California 

SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

305  De  Neve  Drive  -  Parking  Lot  17  •  Box  951388 

LOS  ANGELES,  CALIFORNIA  90095-1388 

Return  this  material  to  the  library  from  which  it  was  borrowed. 


UCLA  YRLflLL 


Forn 


UNIVERSITY  ot  CALIFORNIA 

AT 


tdndsley- 
L6ljn     The  note-taker. 


A    000  576  284    4 


1873 


